40 + Easy No-Cook Recipes (Delicious Raw Food Ideas) - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/raw-food/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 24 Nov 2023 13:55:48 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.2 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/cropped-icon-1-32x32.png 40 + Easy No-Cook Recipes (Delicious Raw Food Ideas) - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/raw-food/ 32 32 Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away. Hummus Ingredients A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the...

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, grilled lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is hummus?

Hummus originated in the Middle East, but many countries have welcomed and adapted it to their own. Such variations include Israeli, Lebanese, Palestine, Egyptian, and Greek hummus.

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 13
1905 Salad https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/#comments Thu, 31 Aug 2023 19:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70366 Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston Salad. And this Columbia 1905 salad recipe has so much rich history, it’s no wonder it has taken the internet by storm. What is 1905 Salad? The 1905 salad was invented by a waiter named Tony Noriega at the Columbia Restaurant (one of the most iconic restaurants in America) in...

The post 1905 Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston Salad. And this Columbia 1905 salad recipe has so much rich history, it’s no wonder it has taken the internet by storm.

Columbia restaurant salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

What is 1905 Salad?

The 1905 salad was invented by a waiter named Tony Noriega at the Columbia Restaurant (one of the most iconic restaurants in America) in the heart of the Ybor City neighborhood of the Tampa Bay area in Florida. He was working late at the restaurant one night and used some leftovers in the fridge to create what the restaurant now serves tableside (with some minor adjustments made to the original).

Contrary to its name, it was actually created in the 1940s and was later adapted by Columbia and added to the menu in the 1970s as an answer to the salad bar. The name of the salad, ‘1905’, was created to celebrate the year the restaurant was founded as Florida’s oldest restaurant.

Since then, the unique flavors of the 1905 salad have been considered a culinary representation of the Cuban and Spanish heritage of Ybor City and the Tampa Bay area. Because of its Cuban/Spanish origin, the salad goes by many names, including the 1905 Columbia Salad, Cuban 1905 Salad, Florida Salad, Tampa Salad, or Tony Salad.

Ingredients

The beauty of the 1905 Columbia salad recipe is that it relies on simple, yet delicious, ingredients. Yet there are details in both the dressing and salad that are important to point out. I highly recommend sticking to the below ingredients to make the original 1905 Columbia salad recipe, but I also offer plenty of substitutions to give it your own unique flavor.

Columbia Restaurant Salad Dressing

This Columbia 1905 salad dressing has become so popular over the years, that it is now sold as a salad dressing in grocery stores like Publix and even online stores like Amazon. While you can always buy a bottle, making it at home is so easy. Here’s what you will need:

1905 salad dressing recipe ingredients with text on the image.
  • Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves will provide the best flavor. In this case, I would not substitute it with garlic powder.
  • Dried Oregano: I used dried oregano, but you can use 1 sprig of fresh oregano for a stronger, floral flavor.
  • Worcestershire Sauce: This is the secret ingredient that gives the salad dressing that special umami flavor. Pick up a bottle of the popular Lea and Perrins Worcestershire Sauce (affiliate link) for authentic flavor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: The original recipe calls for extra-virgin Spanish olive oil, but you can use whichever olive oil you have on hand.
  • White Wine Vinegar: White wine vinegar provides a nice bit of acidity.
  • Fresh Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice, which would be the juice of about 1 lemon.
  • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper

Salad Ingredients

  • Iceberg Lettuce: We need 7-8 cups of crisp lettuce, which you can get from about one large head of iceberg lettuce. The key is to slice, rinse, and then dry it really well. If you have a salad spinner, this is the time to use it.
  • Tomatoes: Ripe, juicy tomatoes are key, but any kind will do. My favorites are heirloom, beefsteak, tomatoes on the vine, cherry, or Roma tomatoes.
  • Ham Slices: We need about 4-5 slices of deli ham. Slice them into thin, julienne slices (matchstick strips) when you get home.
  • Swiss Cheese: The same goes for the Swiss cheese. We need about 5 slices, also sliced into julienne.
  • Green Olives: Use pitted green olives, roughly chopped, or even pimento-stuffed green Spanish olives if you want to take it up a notch.
  • Pecorino Romano: The original recipe uses Romano cheese, which is Pecorino Romano sold here in the United States. Pick up a box of finely grated cheese or grate a whole block at home.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

While I highly recommend sticking to the original 1905 salad recipe, I wanted to make sure I provided you with a few substitutions and optional additions. 

  • Salad Greens: A good substitute for iceberg lettuce would be romaine lettuce. Just be sure to slice it as thinly as you can.
  • Celery Stalks: Add some thinly sliced celery stalks for extra crunch.
  • Black Olives: Swap out the green olives for milder black olives instead.
  • Ham Substitutions: If you are not a fan of ham, you can use thinly sliced, deli-style chicken, turkey breast, salami, or pepperoni, or try some Grilled Shrimp instead.
  • Cheese: If you don’t have Pecorino Romano, finely grated Parmesan cheese will also work.
  • Croutons: Whether store-bought or Homemade Croutons, add a handful to the top for some extra crunch.
  • Hard-Boiled Eggs: Slice or dice some hard-boiled eggs for extra protein.
  • Onion: Toss in some thinly sliced red onion or green onions for an extra savory bite.
  • Make it Vegetarian: Omit the ham and use some Baked Tofu instead, or simply add more Swiss and green olives to compensate for the lack of meaty flavor.

How to Make 1905 Salad Recipe?

The recipe for the 1905 salad follows the same basic steps as any other salad: First, whip up the salad dressing, prepare the salad ingredients, and then toss them all together. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make Columbia restaurant salad recipe.
  1. Make the 1905 Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce. Slowly add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt, and pepper, while still whisking until smooth.
  2. Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine lettuce, tomatoes, ham, Swiss cheese, and green olives.
  3. Toss: Toss salad ingredients with the dressing. Sprinkle with Romano cheese, taste for seasoning, and add more, if desired. Serve and enjoy!

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

The Columbia Salad can be made ahead and even stored for later if done properly. Here are my best storage tips:

  • Make Ahead: Columbia restaurant actually recommends making the dressing 1-2 days in advance, but I find it lasts up to 3 days if stored in an airtight container or mason jar in the refrigerator.
  • Storage: The dressed salad will only keep fresh for 1 day. Please be aware that as it sits, it releases all of its juices. If you plan to store the salad for longer or know you will have leftovers, refrain from tossing the salad with the dressing until the day you are going to serve. Store the prepared salad ingredients in a large airtight container with a paper towel to absorb excess moisture for 2-3 days.

What to Serve With the 1905 Salad?

This is a hearty salad all on its own, so it can be served simply with bread and butter. The Columbia Restaurant serves it with a Cuban sandwich from the menu. Here at home, I love to serve it as a side salad with any of the following:

1905 Columbia salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Expert Tips

  • Authentic flavors: The reason this salad became so famous is because it is so well-balanced. I highly recommend sticking to the original recipe to bring out all those Spanish flavors. This may mean a quick trip to the store, but I promise it is worth it.
  • Take your time when making the dressing: It’s interesting to note, that The Columbia restaurant actually adds the Worcestershire sauce and lemon juice at the end so that you can taste more of the savory, bright components. But I find the ingredients marry together well when mixed into one. The key is to emulsify the dressing so that the olive oil is mixed well with the Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, and lemon juice. To do so, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and give it one more good whisk just before tossing.
  • Assembly: The salad at the Columbia restaurant is prepared tableside for all guests who order it. If you really want to stick to history, serve this salad tableside for all your family members and friends, and for extra flair.
  • Salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss, salty green olives, and grated cheese. Be sure to taste test once you mix the dressing with the salad. The exact measurements will be based on your personal preference.
  • Mix at the last minute: Drizzle with the dressing just before serving to keep the iceberg lettuce crisp and crunchy and the rest of the ingredients fresh.
  • Presentation: Each ingredient brings its own color, taste, and texture, so have fun with the presentation, especially if serving this salad to a crowd. For extra bonus points, serve in a chilled salad bowl to keep it super cold.

FAQs

Why is it called 1905 salad?

Although the 1905 salad was technically invented in the 1940s, it is named after the year the Columbia restaurant was founded.

Who invented the 1905 salad?

The 1905 salad was invented by waiter Tony Noriega, who pulled leftovers from the fridge one night after work to create this famous salad.

How many calories are in a 1905 Columbia Salad?

One serving of the 1905 Columbia Salad is 306 calories. This will vary based on the amount of Romano cheese you add at the end.

Other Meal-Worthy Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this 1905 Salad recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

1905 Salad from Columbia restaurant in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

1905 Salad Recipe

Be a part of the viral sensation and make the famous 1905 salad right at home! Made with the iconic Columbia Restaurant’s garlic salad dressing, sweet ham, and creamy cheese, it is an easy salad you can make in 15 minutes.
Course Salad
Cuisine Cuban
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For The Salad Dressing:

  • 4 garlic cloves minced
  • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire Sauce
  • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons white wine vinegar
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 1 head iceberg lettuce sliced and rinsed (~7-8 cups)
  • 1 large ripe tomato sliced
  • ½ cup ham slices* julienned – about ¼ lb or 5 slices of ham
  • ½ cup Swiss cheese julienned – 5-6 slices
  • ½ cup green olives pitted and chopped
  • ¼ cup Pecorino Romano grated or grated Parmesan cheese

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, whisk garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce in a bowl. Gradually add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  • To assemble the Columbia restaurant salad, place iceberg lettuce, sliced tomatoes, julienned ham and Swiss cheese, and green olives in a large bowl.
  • Drizzle the salad with the dressing. Give it a toss until combined. Sprinkle it with Romano cheese.
  • Taste for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields a large bowl of salad (about 7-8 cups), which is ideal for 6 servings as a side dish.
  • Ham: The original recipe uses baked ham. If you have some on hand, go ahead and use it. Otherwise, deli-style ham slices are a good substitution. You can also use deli-style chicken/turkey breast or even shrimp.
  • A word on salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss cheese, salty green olives, and Romano cheese. Be sure to give it a taste right after mixing it and adjust it according to your taste buds.
  • Store: This salad is best on the day it is made. However, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for one day. Please be aware that it gets watery as it sits, so it is best to give it a good mix before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 346mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 857IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 173mg | Iron: 1mg

The post 1905 Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/feed/ 2
Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#respond Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that...

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

Ingredients

This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
  • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
  • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves
  • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
  • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
  • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
  • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

Make it by Hand

Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
  1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
  2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

In the Food Processor or Blender

When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
  1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
  3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
  4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
  2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
  3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
  4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
  5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
  6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
  7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

How to Store the Leftovers?

It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

How to Serve?

Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

  • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
  • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
  • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
  • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
  • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
  • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
  • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

Expert Tips

This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

  • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
  • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
  • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
  • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

FAQs

Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
Print

Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 36kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
  • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cilantro chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

Instructions

Make it by Hand:

  • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

Food processor version:

  • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
  • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
  • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
  • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
  • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
  • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

Nutrition

Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 0
Virgin Pina Colada https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/ https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/#comments Mon, 24 Jul 2023 00:57:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6290 If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist. And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure...

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist.

And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure to check out our Strawberry Basil Limeade, Rosemary Mint Lemonade, Kale Pineapple Smoothie, and Ginger Iced Tea.

Person holding a virgin pina colada in her hand with a cherry on top.

Virgin Pina Colada Ingredients

A frozen virgin pina colada recipe only requires a handful of key ingredients. It’s a short list of  tropical flavors, including the following ingredients:

Ingredients for virgin colada from the top view.
  • Frozen Pineapple: Look for frozen pineapple chunks in the frozen fruit section of your local grocery store. If you cannot find frozen pineapple, flash freeze fresh pineapple. To do so, simply remove the outer skin and core, then cut the pineapple into bite-size pieces. Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet and freeze for 30 minutes – 1 hour. You can also add more ice if frozen pineapple is unavailable.
  • Coconut Milk: We used full-fat coconut milk to create a healthier (and mildly sweet) version. For a sweeter take, make a virgin pina colada with 3-ingredients by using 1 cup sweetened Coco Lopez Cream of Coconut (affiliate link) and omitting the coconut sugar – add more pineapple juice (or try coconut water) if you find the mixture to be a little too thick.
  • Pineapple Juice: We think that unsweetened pineapple juice, usually found in a can, gives this Piña Colada mocktail an even more tropical flavor. Add more juice after blending based on your desired consistency. Swap it out for mango juice or orange juice for a different flavor.
  • Ice Cubes: Ice adds a creamy, slushy, icy texture. You can also use about ½ cup crushed ice, which will blend more evenly.
  • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps it naturally sweetened with no refined sugar. Add more after blending if you would like it on the sweeter side.
  • Garnish: Stick to the classic fresh pineapple wedge or pineapple slices and maraschino cherry. Or, give it a real warm beach vibe with fresh mint and a mini cocktail umbrella. Maple Whipped Cream or a dollop of Honey Ice Cream takes it that much more over the top.

Optional Add Ins / Variations

  • Rum: Make a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.
  • Extracts: If you would still like to enjoy a pina colada mocktail, but with rum flavor, add 1 – 2 tsp rum extract for extra flavor. A dash of vanilla extract never hurts, either.
  • Lime Juice: Add a squeeze of fresh lime juice to balance the sweetness of the pineapple and coconut flavor.

How to Make Pina Colada without Alcohol?

Non-alcoholic pina coladas are ready in less than 5 minutes after a quick whiz in the blender. It is so refreshing and creamy, you will never miss the alcohol. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make virgin pina colada.
  1. Add ingredients to blender: In this order, place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  2. Blend: Start off on low power, then increase to high power and blend until smooth, about 30 seconds. Taste for sweetness and add more if desired.
  3. Serve: Pour into a chilled cocktail glass. Garnish with pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

While this homemade non-alcoholic pina colada is best served the moment it is made, there are a few steps you can take to get ahead. You can:

  • Make Ahead: Prep and measure out all the ingredients in advance. Keep stored in the freezer and fridge, respectively.
  • Storage: Leftover virgin pina colada mix can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!

Expert Tips

  • Coconut milk vs coconut cream: This recipe is best made with canned coconut milk rather than coconut cream (which has a higher fat content). To make sure the can of coconut milk is well blended, vigorously shake before opening or blend in a high-speed blender.
  • Use a hurricane glass: Stick to the curved hurricane glasses for classic pina coladas right at home.
  • Chill cocktail glasses: Chilled cocktail glasses keep the drink super cold without diluting it with extra ice. Place the glasses in the fridge or freezer for at least 1 hour, or until ready to serve.
  • Prep the garnishes: Make sure to have pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries at the ready so that your virgin colada cocktail doesn’t have time to melt. And don’t forget the paper umbrella for authentic Caribbean vibes.
Two glasses of virgin colada garnished with pineapple wedges.

FAQs

What’s in a virgin pina colada?

This healthy and mildly sweet pina colada without alcohol is made with frozen pineapple, coconut milk, pineapple juice, ice, and coconut sugar.

Who invented the pina colada?

Deemed the official drink of Puerto Rico, the first accounts of a pina colada came from bartender Ramon “Monchito” Marrero at the Caribe Hilton in 1954 in San Juan, Puerto Rico.

Why is it called virgin pina colada?

Pina Colada is Spanish for ‘strained pineapple’. Virgin pina colada denotes an alcohol-free version, which means the whole family can enjoy this fun drink on a hot summer’s day.

Are virgin pina coladas healthy?

This virgin colada is quite healthy as it contains no refined sugar, no alcohol, and clean, fresh ingredients you can feel good about. As a bonus, it is also vegan and dairy-free.

Other Non-Alcoholic Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this non-alcoholic pina colada recipe, I am pretty sure you will also like a few of our other mocktails. Below are our favorite summer sips that are worth checking out:

If you try this Pina Colada recipe without alcohol, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Homemade virgin piña colada recipe in glasses.
Print

Virgin Pina Colada Recipe

Here’s a simple Virgin Pina Colada recipe that’s made with healthier ingredients without any refined sugars. With only four simple ingredients, you can make this non- alcoholic and refreshing drink in minutes. It is surely the best mocktail to enjoy on a hot summer day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Caribbean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 serving
Calories 144kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups frozen pineapple chunks (8 ounces)
  • 1 can unsweetened coconut milk (13.5 ounces) – Shake well
  • ½ cup unsweetened pineapple juice
  • 1 cup ice
  • 2 tablespoons coconut sugar more if necessary

Garnishes

  • 4 wedges pineapple
  • 4 Maraschino cherries Optional

Instructions

  • Place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  • Blend until smooth. Taste for sweetness and add more if necessary.
  • If preferred, pour into a glass and garnish with pineapple wedges and Maraschino cherries (if preferred.)

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields ~ 32 ounces of virgin colada. Each serving is about 8 ounces.
  • Chill your glasses: Place your glasses in the freezer at least 30 minutes before making this drink to ensure that they are super cold.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!
  • Rum: Turn this into a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.

Nutrition

Calories: 144kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 331mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/feed/ 6
Mediterranean Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/#respond Wed, 28 Jun 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68504 There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels...

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels or modifying how much salt you include.

So, go ahead and make a batch and bring the most-loved flavors of the Mediterranean region to your own kitchen with this unique combination of warming spices you probably already have in your spice cabinet.

Mediterranean seasoning with a spoon from the top view.

What is in Mediterranean seasoning?

Also referred to as a Mediterranean herb blend, this seasoning is a classic mixture of common Mediterranean spices and herbs—basic, natural ingredients you likely already have in your spice cabinet!

Mediterranean herbs and spices in small spoons with text on every ingredient.
  • Garlic powder: I use garlic powder here. However, you can use granulated garlic if you can’t get your hands on it. The granulated version is thicker compared to its powdered version. Therefore, if you prefer a finer Mediterranean spice mix, simply use a food processor or spice grinder to crush your granulated garlic into smaller fragments.
  • Onion powder
  • Dried basil
  • Dried oregano: I prefer Italian oregano in this spice blend recipe due to its minty, herbaceous undertones. Mexican oregano will add too much citrusy flavor, resulting in a different flavor profile. 
  • Dried dill weed
  • Dried parsley
  • Dried rosemary
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Dried Lemon peel: This is probably the only ingredient that may require a trip to the store, but it is worth it. Dried lemon peel (affiliate link) lends this simple spice mixture an irresistible hint of fresh, tart flavor—in addition to its signature bright color. However, you could also use orange peel. And if that doesn’t work, you can add fresh lemon zest right before you are ready to use this Mediterranean seasoning in your recipe.

Optional Additions:

  • Kosher salt: Add ½ teaspoon salt to your mixing bowl for extra savory spice. Or, add it separately to your recipe while cooking to ensure it doesn’t come out too salty.
  • Ground cumin: Cumin is the key to giving Mediterranean cuisine its hearty, earthy taste—especially when making meat dishes and kabobs. Depending on your recipe, you can add ground cumin directly into your spice or separately. If you are a spice nerd like me, you can also purchase cumin seeds and grind them in your own spice grinder for an even fresh flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Want to add a little warmth to your Mediterranean spices? Just ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon will add a woody richness to your blend, making it the perfect addition to meat recipes.
  • Dried mint: Mint is a wonderful addition to this recipe, as it naturally sharpens the unique flavors of the other herbs. However, remember that dried mint is a potent herb, and a little bit can go a long way in this spice blend. 

How to Make This Recipe?

You can have a sumptuous flavoring for all your favorite dishes in just five minutes and one step.

Person mixing Mediterranean spices in a jar from the top view.

Simply add your ingredients to a small mixing bowl, adjusting the salt and seasoning levels to your taste. Mix until thoroughly blended. Use it in your recipe right away, or transfer the Mediterranean herb seasoning to an airtight jar for later use.

Storage Instructions

Whether you’re using this Mediterranean spice blend recipe for weeknight meals or a special occasion, use these storage tips to ensure that your mix stays fresh and flavorful for months.

  • Airtight container: It’s essential that you store your Mediterranean herb mix in an airtight container to ensure the ingredients don’t lose their flavor over time. A jar with a tight-fitting lid is ideal.
  • Check for dryness: Ensure your storage container is fully dry before adding your spice mixture. Also, if you dried your own fresh herbs, ensure all ingredients are completely dry before storing them. Any moisture will make your blend difficult to use, dull its flavors, and may result in unwanted bacteria or mold.
  • Store in a dark place: To keep your spices’ flavors as robust and fresh as possible, store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. Exposure to heat and sunlight can strip your herbs of their flavors and limit how long you can use them. 
  • Date and label: I recommend dating and labeling your Mediterranean spices and herbs before storage to keep track of their freshness. This way, you won’t have to fret over your calendar every time you prepare a new dish.
  • Use within six months: To ensure maximum flavor, I suggest using it within six months of preparation. Though the seasoning won’t go bad, it will likely lose its potency the longer it sits.

Uses of this Mediterranean Spice Mix

There are endless ways to incorporate it into your cooking. In minutes, you can add fresh, sunny flavors to fan-favorite recipes, from hearty chicken to light seafood.

  • Rub for chicken and turkey: This Mediterranean rub does wonders to enhance the succulent, tender flavors of chicken and turkey recipes. Use it to season chicken thighs in my Mediterranean Chicken with Lemon to bring out their zesty profile. Or, sprinkle a bit over my Baked Split Chicken Breast for a savory, herby addition perfect for soups, salads, and everyday meal prep. For an elegant recipe made for presentation, you could use this spice in my Baked Turkey Tenderloin or add it to my Middle Eastern Chicken Kabob recipe for a summer-ready dish any party crowd will love.
  • Beef and steak seasoning: Using Mediterranean spices for beef is an easy way to balance the hearty flavor of steaks, burgers, meatballs (hello, Turkish Kofte!), and roasts with delicately fresh flavors. 
  • Lamb: If you’re a fan of its grassy, robust taste, I recommend using your Mediterranean spices for lamb. Take your recipe to the next level by adding this seasoning mix to lamb shanks, grilled chops, or lamb burgers with feta.
  • Grilled seafood: It’s no secret that Mediterranean cuisine and fresh seafood go hand in hand. Rub fresh-caught fish with olive oil, lemon juice, sea salt, and Mediterranean seasoning for a delectable dish that comes together in minutes. Or, add a dash of this tasty rub on some of my favorite seafood recipes, like Grilled Mahi Mahi and Shrimp Kabobs
  • Marinades and sauces: You won’t be able to resist eating your favorite sauces by the spoonful when you include this simple recipe. Add a touch of authentic Mediterranean taste to flavorful kitchen staples, like Basil Tomato Sauce, Green Pasta Sauce, or Garlic Butter Sauce. Or, elevate your meat marinades using it in my basic Easy Shrimp Marinade or Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade recipes.
  • Salad Dressings: Looking for an easy way to bring your weekday salads to life? Mix your Mediterranean seasoning with olive oil, minced garlic, and either lemon juice or vinegar, and you’ll have a light, healthy salad dressing you can use all week long. You can also embellish my tart Lemon Dressing or creamy Yogurt Dressing by adding a pinch of this easy mixture.
  • Soups and stews: There’s no reason why your favorite soups shouldn’t explode with flavor. Add this Mediterranean blend to my healthy Broccoli and Feta Soup, creamy Red Lentil Soup, or hearty beef stews (hello, Eggplant Beef Stew!) to enliven every spoonful with herby, savory flavors.   
  • Bread dipping oil: The only thing better than a piece of freshly baked bread is one that you serve alongside delicious dipping oil. This Olive Oil Bread Dip would be the perfect accompaniment to dozens of menu ideas—with the addition of this spice mix, of course!
  • Sautéed or roasted vegetables: While some may only think to use this Mediterranean rub for chicken, this fragrant spice mix is one of the easiest ways to add mouthwatering flavor to your favorite veggie dishes. I love including this simple spice in tasty sides, like Pan Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Whole Carrots, and Roasted Cauliflower
Mediterranean herb blend in a wooden spoon from the top view.

Expert Tips

Making your own savory blend of herbs and spices is a great way to add bright, fresh flavor to your menu. With these tips for making Mediterranean spice, you’ll never eat bland food again.

  • Use new herbs and spices: The trick to getting your spice mixture as herbaceous and flavorful as possible is using fresh ingredients. You can make your own dried herbs for extra freshness, but ensure they dry thoroughly before adding them to your mixture.
  • Make it your own: My favorite part about making my own spice blends is how easy they are to customize. Feel free to adjust the spices in this recipe to match your taste. Or, if you don’t like any of the ingredients, you can omit them entirely or use a bit more of something else. For example, if you’re not a fan of dill, you can leave it out and add more thyme. For a spicier mix, you can add red pepper (aka chili pepper flakes), or you could include Spanish paprika for a slightly smokier taste.
  • Give it a good shake: Shake your spices’ storage container before incorporating the blend into your cooking. Because some ingredients tend to shift to the bottom during storage, shaking your mixture will ensure an even distribution of flavors.
  • Start with a small amount: When adding this seasoning to your cooking, I recommend beginning with a small amount and adding more after tasting. Remember, you can always add more spice but you can’t take it out. 
  • Customize your salt levels: When you buy spice blends at the store, you never know how much salt is inside. That’s why I prefer to make my own seasoning mixtures. For this recipe, you can either add the salt directly into the blend or omit it and add salt to your recipe as needed.

FAQs

What is Mediterranean seasoning?

Mediterranean spices generally include a signature blend of ingredients, such as basil, oregano, rosemary, garlic, and onion powder. However, other versions—often resultant of regional differences in the Mediterranean area—include flavor-enhancing additions, such as parsley, thyme, and dill. These different combinations give this classic mixture such versatility in Mediterranean cooking.

Is Greek seasoning the same as the Mediterranean?

Because these two variations often include the same spices used in Mediterranean cooking, there is a significant flavor overlap between them. However, Greek seasonings tend to have earthier overtones due to the inclusion of marjoram. Still, because of their similar flavor profiles and regional variations, you can use this Mediterranean spice mix instead of Greek seasoning in your recipes.

What can I use in place of Mediterranean seasoning?

Several options exist if you need a replacement for these Mediterranean food spices. Herbs de Provence is a common seasoning blend from France with a slightly more fragrant, herbaceous flavor. You can also use Italian seasoning due to its earthy, somewhat sweet overtones. However, remember that these seasoning blends have slightly different flavor profiles and may affect the outcome of your recipe.

Is Mediterranean food spicy?

Generally speaking, Mediterranean dishes are not spicy. However, chefs may add spice to their recipes to increase heat levels and accommodate personal preference.

Other Homemade Seasoning You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean spices for beef, chicken and lamb in small spoons from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Seasoning Recipe

This Mediterranean spice mix is perfect for flavoring meats, vegetables, soups, stews, sauces, and more. Use this unique blend of spices and herbs in your recipes and bring the Mediterranean to your table.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
  • 1 tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ tablespoon dried dill weed
  • ½ tablespoon dried parsley
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon lemon peel
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon coarsely ground black pepper

Optional

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, mix all the ingredients and transfer the mixture to an airtight jar.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1/3 cup of spice blend. However, it can be multiplied as many times as you need.
  • Storage: B sure to store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. As long as it is kept in an airtight container, it should be fresh for up to 6 months. It would technically still be good after then, but we find that you get the freshest flavors if you use it within the first 6 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/feed/ 0
Breakfast Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/#comments Wed, 21 Jun 2023 15:29:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68420 This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal....

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal.

Fruit in a large bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Fruit Breakfast Salad

You only need two sets of simple ingredients for this breakfast fruit salad recipe: the fruits and the fruit salad dressing.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text written on each ingredient.

Breakfast fruits: Wondering what ingredients to include when you make fruit for breakfast? This classic mix of colorful produce will brighten your table with nutritious, brilliant flavors.

  • Pineapple: Pick out a ripe pineapple that is juicy and sweet.
  • Grapes: You can use both red and yellow grapes in this recipe. However, I would recommend getting the seedless variety.
  • Berries: Nearly any berry will make this simple morning dish full of ripe, juicy flavors. My favorite fresh berries include strawberries, blackberries, and blueberries.
  • Oranges
  • Kiwis
  • Banana: I adore the creamy, sweet taste of fresh bananas. However, you can omit this ingredient if you’re not a fan of the fruit or preparing this recipe beforehand.

Fruit salad dressing:

  • Orange juice and orange zest: Be sure to use fresh orange juice and orange zest when you make fruit dishes for breakfast. Fresh oranges will give your recipe a delectable balance of tartness and sweetness guaranteed to satisfy your cravings.
  • Lime juice and lime zest: Fresh lime juice is the secret ingredient to giving this dish its zesty, bright flavor—and keeping your fruit fresh for longer! If you don’t have any limes, you can substitute this ingredient for lemon juice and zest.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Sweetener: Because this dish gets natural sweetness from fruits, adding an extra sweetener is optional. If you want to enhance the sweetness of your fresh fruit breakfast, add a bit of honey (or honey syrup), maple syrup, or agave. You could also use my Honey Lime Dressing as a citrus-sweet alternative to this classic fruit dressing.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Fresh mint: Amongst all fresh herbs, I think mint is the most flavorful addition to a fruit salad. Adding a few fresh leaves will enliven every bite of your breakfast fruit recipes while adding a garden-green color.
  • Shredded coconut flakes: I love using unsweetened coconut flakes as a healthy, no added sugar topping for this sweet spread. Not only do their sweet, nutty flavors complement this simple mix, but they also add an irresistibly crunchy texture.
  • Spices: To add a warm, gourmet spice to your fruit bowl recipe, you can substitute a sprinkle of cardamom, nutmeg, or poppy seeds in place of cinnamon.

Variations Based on Season and Dietary Restrictions

The best fruits for a fruit salad match the time of year. If you want to transform this easy dish into a seasonal treat or satisfy a dietary need, you’ll love this collection of tasty fruits to use.

  • Summer: Looking to fill your morning fruit bowl with a mixture of sunny, summer-ready produce? I recommend making your summer salad with peaches, plums, raspberries, nectarines, cantaloupe, honeydew, papayas, and mango.
  • Fall: Fall produce makes some of my favorite fruit breakfasts. To make an autumn fruit salad, use apples, figs, pears, and pomegranate seeds for a dish perfect for the holiday season.
  • Winter: To make a winter fruit salad perfect for special occasions, I recommend adding tart, warm-colored fruits like Mandarin oranges, blood oranges, tangerines, grapefruit, and bananas.
  • Spring: When jumping into the garden-fresh spring season, you’ll want these fruits in your breakfast spread. Apricots and strawberries are some of the most spring-forward fruits in the produce aisle.
  • Low-sugar fruit salad: If you are in need of a healthy fruit salad recipe that has low quantities of sugar, I recommend using low-sugar fruits (as recommended by Healthline), like raspberries, strawberries, blackberries, kiwis, and grapefruit.
  • Low-calorie fruit salad: Want to cut down on your morning calorie intake? No problem! Some of the lowest-calorie fresh fruits for breakfast include apples, berries, grapefruit, passion fruit, and stone fruits (e.g., peaches, nectarines, and apricots).

Hot to Make Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

You don’t need a home garden to make a healthy breakfast. While it takes a bit of time to chop all the fruit, once you have them ready, you can prepare a breakfast or brunch fruit salad in just four simple steps:

A collage of images showing how to make breakfast or brunch fruit salad recipe.
  1. Add the fruit: Take out a large bowl, and add the fresh strawberries, pineapple, grapes, blueberries, blackberries, cut oranges, and kiwis. Add the banana if you plan to serve this dish immediately. If you’re making this dish ahead, wait to add the banana just before serving.
  2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon. Either whisk or vigorously shake everything until combined thoroughly. If you are using honey, be sure also to whisk that into the dressing.
  3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the fruit salad and gently toss to combine.
  4. Serve: If using, garnish the fruit salad with fresh mint leaves and serve.

How To Make Ahead, Meal Prep, and Store?

It doesn’t matter whether you want a make fruit salad ahead for a crowd or an easy recipe for everyday meal prep. This simple guide will show you how to keep your salad fresh for a few additional days.

  • Make ahead: This recipe is one of the greatest brunch fruit ideas because it’s so easy to make ahead of time. Simply cut up your fruits and place them in a large mixing bowl. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with your prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Looking for easy breakfast fruit cup ideas? Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups or mason jars (or Weck Jars (affiliate link) as I did in the photo below), and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: You can store this sugar-free fruit salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
Breakfast fruit placed in glass jars from the top view.

What to Serve with Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

Want to serve fruit for a brunch buffet or make a delicious fruit bowl for breakfast? When you make this easy recipe, you’ll discover countless ways to transform seasonal produce into a filling meal. 

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving this fruit salad for lunch or want to make a kid-friendly fruit salad your children will love. The below tips will ensure your salad is as fresh and flavorful on your first try.

  • Choose fresh fruits: The key to any good fruit breakfast is selecting high-quality fruits. Ensure your produce isn’t bruised or moldy, and try to choose adequately ripe fruit. However, avoid overly ripe fruit, as these ingredients likely won’t hold their shape and become mushy in your salad mixture.
  • Visual interest: To make the best fruit salad for a special event, I recommend using fruits in a variety of colors—red, yellow, green, and beyond! This way, it will look appetizing and add a nice pop of color to your tablescape.
  • Proper cutting: I recommend cutting your fruit into equal bite-sized pieces to ensure your salad is easy to eat. If you’re serving this recipe as a breakfast fruit plate, you can slice your larger fruits, arrange them on a plate, fill the empty spaces with strawberries, and top the spread with blueberries. 
  • Wash and dry your fruit properly: It’s essential to ensure your fruit is clean and safe to eat before incorporating it into your homemade fruit salad. However, remember that some fruits bruise easily, and washing berries requires particular gentleness. Be sure to be equal parts thorough and light when washing your produce.
  • Do not skip on the lime juice or lime zest: Because of its preservational properties, a little lime or lemon juice is a great way to prevent your fruit from browning. Plus, this addition enhances the taste of the salad by balancing its sweet flavors with an irresistible tanginess.
  • Adding banana: Some people think banana has no place as seasonal fruit for summer. However, they add a creamy, mild taste to any fresh fruit salad, and they pack tons of Vitamin C and potassium to fuel you through your day. Still, you can easily omit it if you are not a fan.
  • Dress it right before serving: I recommend dressing the salad right before serving. If you drizzle on the dressing too far in advance, your salad may become overly juicy and soggy.
  • Make it kid-friendly: The below recipe as written, is a great fruit salad for kids due to its bright color, nutritious ingredients, and sweet taste. However, depending on your kids’ age, you may want to cut your fruit into smaller or bite-sized pieces.

FAQs

Is it okay to eat a fruit salad for breakfast?

Yes! Fruit salad makes one of the healthiest options for a quick morning meal due to its high vitamin and mineral content. Plus, depending on which fruits you add, you can kick-start your day with other nutrients, such as potassium, that may help maintain healthy blood pressure, reduce your risk of diabetes, and promote immunity. With that being said, it is important to consume fruit in moderation.

Is fruit salad a healthy snack?

Definitely! Doctors recommend that people eat at least 400 grams of fruit per day (or five servings of 80 grams), so eating fruit salad as a snack will help you reach your dietary goals while reducing your risk of disease, aiding weight loss, and enhancing your body’s store of essential nutrients. However, it is always best to consult your doctor and get the best advice for your dietary requirements.

Should I peel fruits when making fruit salads?

Peeling your fruit is a personal choice for this breakfast fruit bowl recipe. However, I recommend peeling off any skins that are hard to digest, such as orange, kiwi, and banana peels.

Can I use frozen fruit?

Yes, but ensure your fruits are fully thawed (room temperature is best) before adding them to your mixture.

Other Fruit Breakfast Recipes

No one can resist a sweet bowl of fruit for breakfast. If you want other ingenious ways to incorporate nutritious fruit into your morning, you’ll love these simple dishes.

  • Yogurt Parfait: If you want a recipe incorporating healthy breakfast fruit with creamy, light Greek yogurt, this dish is precisely what you need.
  • Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal: Pack all the fresh, crisp flavors of the orchard into your morning bowl with this 15-minute recipe.
  • Instant Pot Quinoa Breakfast Bowl: This vegan, gluten-free breakfast recipe comes together in less than 20 minutes and is the perfect make-ahead dish.
  • Peach Galette: Search no more for a healthy dessert. This sophisticated recipe makes for the perfect brunch dessert—especially when served with my fan favorite Honey Vanilla Ice Cream.
  • Can’t get enough? Check out all our fruity desserts.

If you try this Breakfast Fruit Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Breakfast fruit salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Breakfast Fruit Salad Recipe

Here is a breakfast fruit salad that will help you start the day in a healthy way. Made without the use of any additional sugars, this easy fruit salad can be served by itself or as a side dish served with baked goods, eggs, or oatmeal.
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 131kcal

Ingredients

For The Fruit Salad

  • 2 cups pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 cup grapes rinsed and halved
  • 1 cup strawberries rinsed, hulled, and quartered
  • 1 cup blueberries rinsed
  • 1 cup blackberries rinsed
  • 1 orange peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 Kiwis peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 banana peeled and sliced – optional

For The Salad Dressing

  • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • 2 teaspoons lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice from approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Handful of fresh mint leaves chopped – Optional

Instructions

  • Place the pineapple, grapes, strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, cut orange, and kiwi in a large bowl. If you are serving it right away, add the banana, but if you are making it ahead of time, we recommend adding the banana right before serving.
  • To make the fruit salad dressing, combine the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon* in a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake vigorously to incorporate.
  • Drizzle the fruit salad with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  • If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8-9 cups of breakfast fruit salad. The nutritional values below are for 1 serving.
  • Sweetener*: As we were working on this recipe, we wanted it to be a healthy no-sugar-added breakfast option. However, if preferred, you can add a tablespoon (or more) of honey (or honey simple syrup) to the dressing. Honey-sweetened fruit salad is slightly sweeter but has a subtle (but welcome) honey flavor.
  • Make ahead: If you want to make it ahead, simply cut up the fruit (except the banana) and prepare the dressing. Store them in separate airtight containers. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with the prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups, mason, or weck jars, and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: The leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
  • Making it for a crowd? Feel free to multiply the recipe as many times as you need.

Nutrition

Calories: 131kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 232IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/feed/ 2
Homemade Blackening Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/#respond Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:52:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68051 Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and...

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and you’ll never be at a loss for simple and flavorful weeknight meals again.

Blackened seasoning on a plate with a spoon in the middle.

What Does Blackening Mean, and How to Blacken Foods?

“Blackening” is a process in which you pat dry your main ingredient (primarily meat and fish), brush it with melted butter or olive oil, then dredge it through a combination of spices—usually a traditional blackened seasoning blend. Then, cook the meat in a scorching cast-iron skillet until it forms a charred, spice-infused exterior.

Popularized by Paul Prudhomme, this technique of cooking and the seasoning mix is usually used when cooking seafood and chicken dishes, but you can also use a blackening rub on other meats—such as steak and pork—veggies, soups, grains, and even pasta. 

What is Blackened Seasoning?

Blackened seasoning, also referred to as “Blackening Seasoning”, is a traditional Louisiana spice blend that creates a crisp, blackened exterior when added to meat, poultry, or seafood and cooked in a hot cast iron skillet. 

Popular in Cajun cooking, this iconic spice mixture often includes paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, thyme, oregano, black pepper, and salt. 

What is in Blackened Seasoning?

You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this iconic Louisianian spice mix:

An image showing what spices are in blackened seasoning with text on each spice.
  • Paprika: Smoked paprika is ideal for giving this Cajun blackened seasoning its signature smoky flavor. However, regular paprika will also work.
  • Onion powder
  • Garlic powder
  • Dried oregano
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Kosher salt: Salt is the key ingredient to livening up the other spices’ unique flavors. However, if you’re watching your sodium intake or simply want to limit how much salt you use, you can easily make a salt-free blackened seasoning by omitting the salt. 
  • Cayenne pepper: Though cayenne pepper is optional, it’s a great addition if you want to give your rub a spicy kick. Feel free to heat level according to your taste buds.
  • Other optional additions: While these are the basic blackened spice mix ingredients, you can also add other spices for more complex flavor profiles. Some of my favorites include ground cumin, white pepper, and dried basil—though there are countless others to try.

How to Make It?

Making blackening seasoning is an easy way to infuse your kitchen with bold, aromatic flavors. With a total time of five minutes, making this recipe is as easy as it gets.

  1. Mix the spices: Place all the blackened seasoning ingredients in a small bowl. Stir them together until they blend evenly.
  2. Store: Transfer the mixture into an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid—such as a mason jar and store it in a cool, dry space. Your blackened seasoning will stay fresh for up to a year.

How to Use Blackened Seasoning?

You’ll add countless mouthwatering dishes to your recipe book when you make your own blackened seasoning. Prepare to cook like a master Lousianian chef with these tasty menu ideas.

Fish coated with blackened spice mix on a plate from the top view.
  • Meat: The traditional way to enjoy this blackening spice blend is by using it to create a flavorful crust on meats. I love dredging my favorite meats (i.e., shrimp and salmon) through this homemade seasoning, making the perfect blackening recipe for fish, chicken, seafood, and steak. I even use this seasoning as the flavor base of my Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe
  • Vegetables: This blackening spice recipe is essential when adding a savory, piquant flavor to grilled or roasted vegetables. Sprinkle it on veggies like corn, zucchini, potatoes, and eggplant for a simple veggie dish.
  • Pasta, rice, and grains: One of the best ways to use this versatile seasoning is in your favorite grain recipes. Add this secret ingredient to creamy pasta sauces, or sprinkle it in a bowl of plain rice to give it a kick of New Orleans flavor.
  • Nuts and popcorn: Transform your everyday snacks into five-star fare by adding a dash of this robust seasoning. I love sprinkling this DIY blackened seasoning over a bowl of nuts or popcorn, giving each bite an out-of-this-world taste.
  • Soups and stews: Just like Italian seasoning, this easy blackened seasoning recipe is just what you need to take your soup-making to the next level. With just a few simple ingredients, every tablespoon will burst with delicious, bold flavors.

Expert Tips

There’s no guesswork when making this easy blackening seasoning recipe. These pro tips will make your kitchen smell like a gourmet market any day of the week.

  • Fresh spices: The best blackened seasoning begins with fresh spices. Not only do quality spices have a more potent flavor, but they’ll also keep your seasoning fresher for longer. Be sure to check the expiration date of all your ingredients before adding them to your mixture, and use new ingredients whenever possible. 
  • Sealed storage: Tightly seal your blackened seasoning in an airtight container to keep it fresh during storage. I also recommend placing your sealed seasoning in a cool, dark place to keep the flavors from drying out.
  • Mix well: To give every teaspoon of this blackening spice mix a well-balanced taste, evenly blend the spices. Each spoonful should have an equal amount of every ingredient.
  • Make it your own: The best part about the ingredients in blackened seasoning is how easy they are to adjust. Feel free to experiment with each spice’s proportions to satisfy your own preferences. For example, you could give your rub more heat by increasing the amount of cayenne pepper. Or, add more paprika for a smokier, deeper taste.
  • Adjust salt: If you’d prefer a low-sodium blackening seasoning, add less salt to your mixture or omit it altogether.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your spices to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid this from happening, I recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

FAQs

Still have questions about this homemade blackened seasoning? Don’t worry! This simple guide covers everything from cajun seasoning vs. blackened seasoning to how to adjust spice levels.

Is blackening seasoning spicy?

It can be! This spice rub’s heat comes primarily from its cayenne pepper, so you can adjust how much you use to reach your desired spice level.

What does blackened seasoning taste like?

Blackened rub tastes very similar to cajun and creole seasonings, with a spicy, smoky, and savory flavor.

What’s the difference between blackening seasoning, cajun seasoning, and creole spice?

Though similar, slight variations exist between blackened, cajun, and creole seasoning. Cajun seasoning tends to be spicier, with a higher proportion of cayenne pepper, and people often add it to traditional Cajun cuisine dishes, such as gumbo and jambalaya. Meanwhile, creole spice uses more herbs—like celery seed and dried basil—to make milder, more refined creole dishes.

What is a good blackened seasoning substitute?

If you need a substitute for blackened seasoning, don’t worry! There are dozens of similar recipes to try. Cajun and creole seasonings use a similar base, producing comparable flavor profiles. Old Bay seasoning also has a similar taste but tends to be saltier. If you don’t have any pre-made spice mixes, you could make a stripped-down version of this recipe with a chili, onion, and garlic powder blend. You could also use homemade taco seasoning—usually a chili powder and cumin mix—for an earthier, more citrusy version. If you don’t mind a sweeter, tangier alternative, you could also use a Canadian classic made with brown sugar and dry mustard: Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub.

If you try this Blackening Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened chicken seasoning recipe on a plate with a spoon.
Print

Blackened Seasoning Recipe

Learn how to make your own blackened seasoning and use it to blacken fish, chicken, steak, and vegetables. This unique seasoning mix is an inexpensive and easy way to add spicy, smokey, and earthy flavors to all your favorite dishes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 13kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 1 ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Optional:

  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • Mix all the ingredients in a small bowl and stir to ensure that they are evenly blended.
  • Store in a jar with a tight-fitting lid (such as a mason or a small glass jar) for up to a year.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ¼ cup of blackened seasoning. It can be multiplied as needed.
  • Make it your own: Feel free to adjust the amount used according to your taste buds. This also applies to the amount of salt used. If you prefer to salt your food separately, we recommend omitting salt.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your seasoning mix to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid discomfort, we recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

Nutrition

Calories: 13kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 64mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 617IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/feed/ 0
Mango Pineapple Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/#comments Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:49:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68053 Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it. Ingredients This recipe for...

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it.

Mango pineapple salsa in a bowl with chips on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This recipe for mango pineapple salsa uses a handful of fresh, healthy ingredients to get its signature fruity taste:

Ingredients for the recipe on a white backdrop with text on each ingredient.
  • Pineapple: Pineapple is essential to give this recipe its sweet, tropical overtones. I recommend using fresh pineapple for the freshest, healthiest taste. You can even add grilled pineapple for extra smoky, caramelized flavors. Canned pineapple will work in a pinch if you don’t have fresh alternatives, but be aware of their added sugar.
  • Mango: Fresh, sweet mangos are the best pick for this fresh pineapple mango salsa. Frozen mango will also work, but thaw it completely before adding it to your recipe.
  • Red onion: Red onion gives this simple salsa a sharp, bold flavor kick. You can also use Mexican Pickled Onions for a tangier, zestier take.
  • Jalapeño pepper: A bit of pepper is the key to giving this mango pineapple jalapeno salsa its classic balance of sweet and spicy flavors. I recommend using seeded jalapeno peppers to give this recipe a little heat, but you can also remove the seeds if you like.
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Fresh Lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for this easy salsa dish. However, you can also use lime juice from a bottle if you don’t have any fresh limes on hand.
  • Salt

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Green onions: Want to make this tangy salsa a little milder? Use a bit of finely chopped green onions instead of red onions. This easy ingredient substitution is both delicious and colorful.
  • Mint: If you’re not a fan of cilantro, fresh mint makes an excellent substitution, giving this recipe a bright, herby flavor.
  • Avocado: Adding a few chunks of ripe avocado is the best way to add a mild, creamy taste to this fruit salsa.
  • Cherry tomatoes: Transform this simple recipe into pineapple mango pico de gallo by adding a cup of finely chopped cherry tomatoes. This addition will add sharp juiciness to each bite—perfect for tacos!
  • Habanero: To increase the heat level of this recipe, add a little bit of finely chopped habanero peppers. These tiny veggies will give your salsa a bold kick, perfect for spice lovers.

How to Make Mango Pineapple Salsa

Even beginner chefs can prepare pineapple mango jalapeno salsa in a snap! With just four steps and a handful of ingredients, your table will overflow with sweet, zesty, and salty flavors.

A collage of images showing how to make mango salsa.
  1. Add the ingredients: Add the chopped pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeno, cilantro, lime juice, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Mix: Stir until you thoroughly combine the ingredients.
  3. Let it rest: Cover the mixed salsa with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to two hours to combine the flavors.
  4. Serve: Serve the mango pineapple salsa as a condiment or with a bowl of tortilla chips.

How to Make and Ahead and Store?

This fresh fruit salsa is a great recipe for make-ahead meal plans during the summer months.

  • Make ahead: You can make this easy salsa recipe up to 24 hours in advance. Simply store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Store: Transfer your leftover salsa to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. When ready to serve, give it a good stir, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary, as fruit salsa tends to lose its saltiness during storage. This step will ensure your recipe’s flavors are still bold and evenly mixed.

What to Serve with Mango Pineapple Salsa?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re preparing a light Thai lunch or pork chops on the grill. With this delectable collection, you’ll never wonder what to serve with pineapple salsa again.

Mango pineapple salsa for fish over blackened mahi mahi on a plate.
  • Appetizer with chips: One of the easiest, tastiest ways to serve this simple salsa recipe is as an appetizer or a snack with your favorite tortilla chips. Served alongside my Super Easy Guacamole and Corn Salsa, this crowd-pleaser will complete your menu of game-day recipes.
  • On grilled or roasted fish: This mango pineapple salsa for fish is a refreshing, bright combination that will make you feel like you’re at a seaside restaurant. Serve this luscious condiment on top of Cajun Mahi Mahi (as pictured above), Grilled Mahi Mahi or Breaded Fish, and it’ll disappear in minutes.
  • Over chicken: No one can resist the tender, sweet combination of grilled chicken with pineapple salsa. Serve your salsa with grilled or roasted chicken using my succulent recipe for Chicken Breast for an elegant pairing perfect for special occasions and weeknight dinners.
  • Tacos: Take your taco game to the next level by topping your spread with this fruity, Instagram-ready condiment. I recommend serving your salsa with fish tacos—especially shrimp tacos!—to bring out your meat’s fresh, tropical flavors.
  • Rice bowls: Adding a few spoonfuls of this pineapple and mango salsa to your favorite rice bowls is an easy way to add a pop of color and sweetness to them. This simple condiment adds a rich, refreshing taste to dishes like a salmon rice bowl and fish taco rice bowl.
  • Pork chops: Few combinations are as sumptuous, sophisticated, or tasty as serving mango pineapple salsa with sweet-and-savory pork. You can even add a touch of classic outdoor smokiness to your plate by preparing grilled pork chops for the table.
  • Thai recipes: Nothing balances Thai recipes’ savory, spicy, and sweet flavors better than a fruity salsa. Top your favorite dishes, like my Thai Steak Noodle Salad, with this 20-minute condiment, and prepare yourself for a host of compliments to the chef.

Expert Tips

If you want a fresh salsa with vibrant color and the best flavor, these pro tips are a great way to cook like a master chef. Follow this simple guide for the perfect balance of presentation and taste.

  • Ripe fruit is the best: The best mango pineapple salsa begins with sweet, ripe ingredients. If you have difficulty telling which fruits are ripe, purchase pre-cut fruit at the grocery store. Not only will this save time, but it’ll also guarantee that your ingredients are maximally fresh.
  • Finely chopped: When making this salsa, it’s essential that you chop your ingredients into small, bite-sized pieces. Use a sharp knife and cutting board to ensure easy slicing, and avoid using a food processor, as it will likely result in a watery, off-colored mixture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more: No one wants their salsa to come out bland. I recommend tasting your mixture for seasoning before serving and adding more if necessary. 
  • Let it rest: Let your fruit salsa chill for at least 30 minutes before serving. This extra resting time allows the ingredients to mix flavors and absorb the added seasoning, giving each bite an exquisite balance of fruity, savory taste.

FAQs

What can I substitute mango for in mango salsa?

If you don’t have ripe mangos, papaya or pineapple are easy substitutes that perfectly mimic mangos’ juicy, sweet taste. Plus, no one can say no to tropical salsa!

Can you freeze pineapple mango salsa?

I don’t recommend freezing this condiment, as the temperature change may result in a grainy, unpalatable texture.

Other Mango Recipes You Might Like

This mango pineapple salsa recipe explodes with sweet, tangy flavors. These simple recipes are just what you need for more refreshing ways to incorporate mango into your weekday menu.

If you try this Mango Pineapple Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mango Pineapple Salsa placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

This pineapple mango salsa recipe is a delicious fruit salsa that is packed with fresh flavors. Serve it as an appetizer with tortilla chips or as a condiment over blackened or grilled chicken, fish, or pork.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 57kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into ¼ inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • 1 cup mango peeled and cut into ¼-inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • ¼ cup red onion roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed; approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional add ins:

  • ¼ cup red bell pepper roughly chopped

Instructions

  • In a bowl, add pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, and salt. If using, add in the red pepper too.
  • Stir to combine.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes* or up to 2 hours for the flavors to combine.
  • Serve as a condiment or with your favorite tortilla chips on the side.

Notes

  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Ripe and finely chopped: We recommend using fresh ripe fruit that is finely chopped for this fruit salsa.

Nutrition

Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 828IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/feed/ 2
Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/#comments Mon, 29 May 2023 20:06:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19835 The best thing about this cucumber Greek yogurt salad is that it is easy to make with the most delicious yogurt salad dressing. Plus, it is made with a handful of ingredients you probably already have in your pantry. If you are a fan of similar easy Greek yogurt-based recipes, check out our Tzatziki (aka Greek cucumber salad dressing), Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, and Greek Yogurt Chicken Salad recipes. Ingredients You’ll...

The post Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The best thing about this cucumber Greek yogurt salad is that it is easy to make with the most delicious yogurt salad dressing. Plus, it is made with a handful of ingredients you probably already have in your pantry.

If you are a fan of similar easy Greek yogurt-based recipes, check out our Tzatziki (aka Greek cucumber salad dressing), Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, and Greek Yogurt Chicken Salad recipes.

Greek cucumber salad recipe with greek yogurt dressing in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need:

You only need a few basic ingredients and a few pantry staples to make this cucumber yogurt salad. The ingredients list has two parts:

Ingredients for cucumber yogurt salad recipe from the top view.

For the Greek yogurt salad dressing, you will need the following:

  • Greek yogurt: I recommend using full-fat plain Greek yogurt for the most creamy Greek cucumber salad. However, low-fat Greek yogurt or plain yogurt would also work.
  • Garlic cloves: Be sure to mince them finely to easily incorporate them into the dressing.
  • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best. 
  • Extra virgin olive oil: A drizzle of olive oil deepens the flavors of this yogurt dill cucumber salad, but it is an optional ingredient.
  • Vinegar: All you need is a splash of red wine vinegar to brighten up the yogurt salad dressing. I used red wine vinegar, but white wine vinegar, rice vinegar, or even apple cider vinegar would also work.
  • Fresh Dill: A small amount of chopped fresh dill is a classic ingredient for any Mediterranean cucumber yogurt salad recipe, and this one is no exception. If you find the flavors of fresh dill too strong, you can use a teaspoon of dried dill instead.
  • Kosher Salt and Pepper

For The Salad, you will need:

  • Cucumbers: I used English cucumbers (aka seedless cucumbers) as they have fewer seeds than most other types of cucumbers. However, Persian cucumbers (aka Lebanese cucumbers) and garden cucumbers (the most popular type you find in US grocery stores) would all work. Removing and peeling the seeds is optional and depends on the type of cucumber you use. 
  • Onion: A small amount of sliced red onion pairs beautifully with all the other flavors of this creamy cucumber dill salad. However, scallions can be used as a substitute.

Optional Add-ins and Substitutions:

  • Sour cream: Not a fan of yogurt? Use sour cream instead. I recommend using a lesser amount, about ½ cup. If you are a fan of mayo, you can add a few tablespoons to make it a bit more tangy and flavorful.
  • Fresh herbs: If fresh dill is not your favorite, substitute it with fresh mint and fresh parsley. While you can omit fresh herbs altogether, I love the burst of fresh flavor they bring to this summer salad.
  • Seasoning: Add a teaspoon of my Mediterranean seasoning blend to the creamy yogurt dressing for an even more authentic flavor.
  • Honey: You can add a teaspoon of honey to the tzatziki sauce salad dressing if you want your yogurt cucumber dill salad to taste slightly sweet.
  • Lemon Zest: I find that a small amount of lemon zest helps enhance the flavor of the creamy dressing and make it even more citrusy, but it is optional.
  • Ranch Dressing: If you are a fan of ranch flavors and don’t mind a different flavor profile (with a more American twist), you can use our yogurt ranch dressing instead of the yogurt sauce in the recipe below.

How To Make Cucumber Greek Yogurt Salad?

Making cucumber salad with yogurt dressing cannot be easier. If you have 10 minutes, you can make this recipe. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cucumber salad with Greek yogurt.
  1. Make the yogurt dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together Greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, olive oil, vinegar, fresh dill (if using), kosher salt, and black pepper until creamy.
  2. Slice the cucumbers: If preferred, peel the cucumbers. Using a mandoline slicer or a sharp knife, slice them in ¼-inch thickness. Transfer to a large bowl along with sliced red onions.
  3. Dress the cucumbers: Drizzle the vegetables with the creamy yogurt dressing and gently toss to ensure all of the cucumbers are evenly coated. 
  4. Taste for seasoning & serve: Give it a taste and add more if necessary. Serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

When it comes to summer cookouts, planning, and meal prepping are key. Thankfully, with just a few steps, you can make this creamy cucumber salad a day ahead and put it together in minutes. Here is how I do it:

  • To Make Ahead: Make the creamy Greek yogurt dressing up to 3 days in advance and store it in a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Slice cucumbers and red onion a day in advance and store them in separate containers. When ready, assemble the salad as directed in the recipe card below.
  • To Store Leftovers: Place the leftover Greek cucumber yogurt salad in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Please be aware that cucumber slices will release their juices as they sit. You can drain the excess liquid or add a few tablespoons of Greek yogurt to thicken the dressing. Regardless of which method you choose, be sure to give it a toss before serving.

What To Serve It With?

This easy cucumber salad pairs beautifully with various of main dishes and similar salads. Here are some suggestions for pairing:

Expert Tips:

While this creamy cucumber salad with Greek yogurt is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to pay attention to for the best results. Here are a few tips I learned during my recipe testing:

  • Use a mandolin slicer: If you have a mandolin slicer, this is the time to use it, as thinly sliced cucumbers make for a more aesthetically pleasing and delicate salad. Not to mention, it makes the process of making this yogurt and cucumber dish much faster.
  • Salt cucumbers: The cucumbers will inevitably release their juices as they sit. However, if you have the time, you can place the sliced cucumbers in a bowl fitted with a colander and sprinkle them with half a teaspoon of salt. Give them a toss and let the juices drain for 15-30 minutes. Doing so will draw the water out of the cucumbers and ensure that your cucumber yogurt dill salad remains crisp rather than becoming watery. 
  • Chill before serving: This salad can be served right away, but letting it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes to an hour allows all the flavors to blend and intensify, resulting in an even more refreshing yogurt cucumber salad. 
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste before serving and add more seasoning if necessary.
Greek Yogurt Cucumber salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

FAQs

Is Greek yogurt and cucumber good for you?

According to Healthline, Greek yogurt is high in many nutrients and a good source of protein, fat, and carbohydrate source. Conversely, cucumber is a nutritious and low-calorie fruit that is high in water content and provides many essential nutrients and vitamins. So, consuming yogurt and cucumber together, as we do in this healthy cucumber salad, can be good for you.

How do you keep cucumbers crisp in a salad?

You can keep cucumbers crisp by salting them for 15-30 minutes before assembling the salad. Place cucumber slices in a colander set in a bowl. They should release their juices as they sit. Drain and use them in your salad.

How to thicken a cucumber salad?

You can thicken your cucumber salad by adding and tossing a few tablespoons of extra Greek yogurt into the salad.

Other Cucumber Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Greek yogurt cucumber salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad is a refreshing and healthy side dish you can make in 10 minutes. Tossed in a tangy, tzatziki-inspired Greek yogurt dressing, it is a lighter and healthier alternative to mayo or sour cream-based cucumber salads.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 76kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup plain Greek yogurt full fat
  • 2 cloves garlic ~ 2 teaspoons, minced
  • cup lemon juice freshly squeezed – from 2 lemons
  • 1 teaspoon extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
  • ¼ cup chopped fresh dill optional
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 English cucumber* sliced in 1/4 inch slices (peeling is optional)
  • ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion or scallions – optional

Instructions

  • To make the yogurt dressing, whisk together yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, olive oil, vinegar, dill (if using), salt, and black pepper.
  • Place cucumber and red onion slices in a large salad bowl.
  • Drizzle the cucumber salad with the Greek yogurt dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This cucumber salad yields approximately 4 cups of salad (with 1 ¼ cup yogurt dressing). It is ideal for 4 servings if you are serving it as a side dish. If you are serving it to a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe as many times as you need.
  • Cucumber: I used an English cucumber, but yu can also use 4-5 (smaller) Persian cucumbers. 
  • To Make Ahead: Make the yogurt dressing up to 3 days in advance and store it in a jar. Slice cucumbers and red onion a day in advance and store them in separate containers. When ready to serve, place cucumber and onion slices in a bowl, drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine.
  • To Store Leftovers: Place the leftover cucumber salad in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Please be aware that cucumber slices will release their juices as they sit. You can drain the excess liquid or add a few additional tablespoons of Greek yogurt to thicken the dressing. Be sure to toss before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 76kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 609mg | Potassium: 177mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 340IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 92mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/feed/ 29
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Sun, 28 May 2023 16:17:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Nothing says summer more than ripe, juicy tomatoes, and this one celebrates tomato season in style. And if you are looking for more ways to use your summer tomatoes, be sure to check out Mozzarella Cucumber Tomato Salad, Turkish Bean Salad, and Caprese Pasta Salad. Ingredients Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You will...

The post Burrata Caprese appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Nothing says summer more than ripe, juicy tomatoes, and this one celebrates tomato season in style. And if you are looking for more ways to use your summer tomatoes, be sure to check out Mozzarella Cucumber Tomato Salad, Turkish Bean Salad, and Caprese Pasta Salad.

Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Burrata: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese similar in taste and appearance to fresh mozzarella cheese but with a creamy center. Look for a ball of burrata in smaller Italian markets, cheese shops, or in the cheese section of your local grocery store.
  • Tomatoes: I use a combination of large heirloom tomatoes and cherry tomatoes. Juicy heirloom tomatoes are best for their steak-like quality, and the cherry tomatoes add a sweet bite. Feel free to use any tomatoes, including Roma tomatoes, beefsteak tomatoes, tomatoes on the vine, or grape tomatoes.
  • Fresh basil leaves: Finish with whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands.
  • Balsamic vinegar
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Balsamic reduction: Balsamic reduction – affiliate link – (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for Caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette, or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Avocado: Although untraditional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad.
  • Mozzarella: If you can’t get your hands on burrata, you can use fresh mozzarella balls instead.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato, and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional Caprese salad. But the best part – it’s ready in less than 10 minutes after a few easy steps. Here’s how to make this burrata caprese:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.
  1. Prepare tomatoes: Slice tomatoes with a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter and season with ½ teaspoon kosher salt.
  2. Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  3. Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the rest of the salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Garnish with basil leaves. Enjoy!

How to Store Leftovers

Leftover tomato caprese with fresh burrata will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Expert Tips

  • Use good quality ingredients: Since this is a salad with such minimal ingredients, use ingredients that taste good to you. I like to seek out good olive oil and aged balsamic vinegar for the best flavor.
  • Season tomatoes liberally: Don’t skip on the salt when it comes to tomatoes; they benefit from a good sprinkle. As always, opt for the juiciest, freshest tomatoes you can find.
  • Serve at room temperature: Burrata tastes best when served at room temperature or just above, as the creamy center is soft and spreadable. Tomatoes also turn mealy and lose their flavor if stored in the fridge.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or be scattered into pieces.
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

What to Serve It With?

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

Person cutting the burrata in burrata caprese salad from the top view.

FAQs

Where does caprese salad come from?

Also referred to as “Insalata Caprese”, Caprese has its roots in Campania, Italy at the Hotel Quisisana on the island of Capri. The salad was a tribute to Italy, as the ingredients represent the color of the Italian flag.

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and Caprese?

Burrata is a soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is a simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Who sells burrata cheese?

You can find burrata in Italian markets, specialty cheese shops, or in the cheese section of large grocery stores. It is most often sold in plastic deli containers with some water or brine to keep the moisture intact.

Other Caprese Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato-basil-burrata or have been a huge fan of the cult-favorite Carabba’s Caprese salad or just cannot get enough of the flavors of caprese, here are a few Caprese-inspired recipes you might like:

If you try this Burrata Caprese recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or reduced balsamic vinegar

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Burrata Caprese appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Watermelon Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Thu, 11 May 2023 16:51:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Easy to make, this cucumber watermelon feta salad is inspired by my Watermelon Avocado Salad. Similarly, it can be served as a light meal by itself or as a visually impressive colorful side dish. If you are looking for more cucumber recipes, be sure to also check out our Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad, Cucumber Mozzarella Salad, and Watermelon Cucumber Smoothie. Ingredients This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts...

The post Watermelon Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Easy to make, this cucumber watermelon feta salad is inspired by my Watermelon Avocado Salad. Similarly, it can be served as a light meal by itself or as a visually impressive colorful side dish.

If you are looking for more cucumber recipes, be sure to also check out our Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad, Cucumber Mozzarella Salad, and Watermelon Cucumber Smoothie.

Watermelon cucumber salad in a bowl being stirred by a woman from the top view.

Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts off with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. Here’s a look at what we need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Olive oil: We recommend using a brand of extra virgin olive oil that you like.
  • Lime juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice works best for this watermelon salad dressing, but you can use bottled juice in a pinch. The flavors would be slightly different, but freshly squeezed lemon juice can also be used when making the dressing.
  • Kosher salt
  • Honey
  • A small watermelon: Seedless watermelon is preferable for this watermelon cucumber mint salad. However, if a regular watermelon is all that is available, pick out the watermelon seeds as you go.
  • Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers have a great crunch, but regular cucumbers or English cucumbers can be substituted. It is optional, but you can remove the seeds if you like.
  • Herbs: A handful of fresh mint leaves is all you need. However, fresh basil would be a great substitute.
  • Feta cheese: Crumble a whole block of feta cheese rather than buying pre-crumbled feta.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this cucumber watermelon salad recipe your own? Swap out one ingredient for another or simply omit it altogether.

  • Dressing: Whenever I want to switch it up, I use Lemon Balsamic Dressing in place of the honey-lime dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as delicious and tangy. Alternatively, you can also use balsamic reduction as a drizzle at the end right before serving.
  • Cheese: Prefer a watermelon salad without feta cheese? Omit the feta completely for a light, refreshing salad full of fresh summer produce. Or substitute it for goat cheese or even queso fresco.
  • Without mint: If you prefer your watermelon salad with mint, you can double up on the basil and omit the mint entirely.
  • Onion: Add a savory bite with sliced fresh red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. Or, you can add in a handful of chopped scallions.
  • Vegan: Make it vegan by omitting the cheese, or try your hand at vegan feta. Also, make sure to swap out the honey for maple syrup instead.

How to Make Watermelon Salad with Cucumber?

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in 15 minutes, start-to-finish! Here’s how to do it in just a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make watermelon salad.
  1. Make the dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, add olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk vigorously until emulsified.
  2. Assemble the salad: In a large bowl, add diced watermelon, cucumber, mint, and basil.
  3. Drizzle with the dressing: Just before serving, pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently.
  4. Finish with feta: Finish with salty feta cheese, mix once more, and serve in your favorite serving bowl. A final sprinkle of sea salt is optional but a great addition!

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

  • Make Ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in separate containers with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble the watermelon salad right before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover watermelon cucumber salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

What to Serve with Watermelon Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

A close up of watermelon feta basil balsamic salad in a bowl.

Expert Tips

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is easy, but I’d love to share a few helpful tips to help you as you make it in your own kitchen:

  • Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that is heavy for its size with a large yellow spot on one side (this is the field spot that indicates ripeness).
  • Properly cut watermelon and cucumber: Dice watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller if you want to make it look pretty. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend cutting it into thin slices or equal size cubes.
  • Do not skip on salt: Although adding salt to sweet watermelon may sound strange, do not skip this step. The salt brings out the natural sweetness and freshness of the watermelon and cucumber.
  • Serve it chilled: This salad is best eaten cold. I like to keep the watermelon, cucumber, and feta in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all components of this recipe are cold (and super refreshing) just before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Combine watermelon, cucumber, and mint with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle when mixing: Use gentle hands when mixing to keep the shape and structure of the delicate ingredients.

FAQ’s

What is watermelon salad?

Watermelon salad can be whatever you like it to be, but this version is a simple mix of watermelon, cucumber, mint leaves, basil leaves and feta cheese, all mixed gently in a lemon or lime dressing.

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do you cut watermelon to make a salad?

Dice the watermelon into small, 1-inch pieces or cubes. For a special presentation, you can also use a melon baller.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you try this Watermelon Cucumber Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to give it a star rating and leave a short comment about your experience. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 10 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon cut into 1-inch cubes ~ 5 to 6 lbs – preferably seedless
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese or goat cheese

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields about 6-8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad.
  • You can use a melon baller to scoop out the watermelon for a special presentation.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers of this salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.
  • Balsamic glaze: A light drizzle of balsamic glaze is optional but highly recommended if you have some in your fridge.
  • Short on time? The most time-consuming part of this recipe is the cutting of the watermelon. If you want to make it even quicker, you can buy pre-cut watermelon when you are at the store.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Watermelon Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Honey Lime Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/#respond Thu, 11 May 2023 16:00:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67142 I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own, you will never want to spend money on dressings that are usually made with low-quality ingredients. Plus, most homemade dressings can also be used as a marinade for meat and vegetables, and this honey lime vinaigrette dressing is no exception. The good news is that our recipe archives have so...

The post Honey Lime Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own, you will never want to spend money on dressings that are usually made with low-quality ingredients. Plus, most homemade dressings can also be used as a marinade for meat and vegetables, and this honey lime vinaigrette dressing is no exception.

The good news is that our recipe archives have so many dressings to choose from. For a simple yet satisfying option, try our Lemon Olive Oil Dressing, or indulge in the rich flavors of Balsamic Lemon Vinaigrette for a more elevated taste experience. And if you like spicy food, our Chili Lime Dressing is a must-try!

Person holding a jar of honey lime vinaigrette in her hand with fresh lime around it.

Ingredients

All you need is 5 simple ingredients for this honey lime dressing. And guess what? You probably already have everything in your pantry. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for lime dressing for salad from the top view.
  • Extra virgin olive oil: Olive oil is the base of this honey-lime vinaigrette. However, a neutral oil like avocado oil can also be used.
  • Fresh lime juice and lime zest: Every dressing needs an acid! For the best lime vinaigrette recipe, be sure to use fresh lime. Keep in mind that it is best to zest the lime before squeezing it.  
  • Honey: Honey is the perfect way to balance the tartness of the lime. However, for a vegan version, you can use maple syrup instead.
  • Kosher Salt: A pinch of salt will bring out these wonderful flavors.

Optional Add-Ins

While the basic honey lime dressing recipe has more neutral flavors ideal for sweet fruity salads, adding just a few basic ingredients can easily turn it into a dressing (or sauce) for savory salads, grain bowls, and more. Below are a few add-ins to give your sweet, savory, and spicy dishes a pop of flavor:

  • Garlic: One small fresh garlic clove would be a nice addition to any savory salad. However, in a pinch, garlic powder would also work.
  • Shallot: A small shallot or a quarter cup of thinly sliced red onion adds another layer of flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh cilantro is a great addition to any Mexican-style dressing; this one is no exception. Add a teaspoon of chopped fresh cilantro to turn this into a delectable honey lime cilantro dressing (just like I did in my Black Bean and Quinoa Salad) to use in any of your favorite Southwest-flavored salads. Or, use a few fresh mint leaves for a refreshing flavor twist when incorporating it into your favorite fruit salad.
  • Spices: Add a small amount of ground cumin and/or chili powder to enhance the depth of flavor and add warmth and complexity to any of your favorite Mexican salads with lime dressing.
  • Balsamic vinegar: Add a splash of balsamic vinegar for an additional layer of flavor! Thanks to balsamic vinegar’s rich, sweet, and tangy taste, balsamic lime dressing is a luxurious version of this basic lime juice salad dressing perfect for your next summer or winter fruit salad.
  • Dijon Mustard: Not only is it a natural emulsifier, but adding a small amount (½ to 1 teaspoon) of Dijon mustard can help balance the sweetness from honey and the acidity of the lime juice in the dressing.

How To Make Honey Lime Dressing?

You can make a jar of this simple honey lime dressing with only 5 minutes of hands-on time. Juice, zest, whisk, and pour. Here is how to make lime vinaigrette in just 4 simple steps:

Two photos side by side showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Combine: Lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl and whisk together. If you decide to use garlic, shallot, or ground cumin, you can add it here. 
  2. Emulsify until creamy: Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil and constantly whisk until emulsified.
  3. Season: Give it a taste and adjust it to your liking.
  4. Pour: Drizzle it over your favorite fresh salad or store it in a mason jar and refrigerate for later.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this honey lime vinaigrette recipe is that it keeps well in the fridge, so you can make it ahead and refrigerate it until you are ready to use it. 

To store, pour the lime honey dressing into a mason jar (or an airtight container) and keep it in the fridge for up to one week.

How To Use Lime Honey Dressing

Wake up your taste buds with the many ways to use this recipe. Try fruit salad with honey lime dressing or marinade chicken before grilling for some mouth-watering goodness. Here are a few ways to use it:

  • Fruit Salads: This dressing is my favorite way to bring together a brunch side dish like summer fruit salad with strawberries, blueberries, pineapple, red grapes, kiwi, or other tropical fruit you like. 
  • Savory Salads: This honey lime salad dressing is the perfect compliment whether your salad is the main course or the side. Pour it over leafy greens like spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or kale for a natural sweetness with a kick of citrus. Mix with nuts, cheese, and beans for a sweet and savory combination. It’s my first choice when making Mexican-inspired salads and the ultimate last step for my Southwest Chicken Salad and Corn and Black Bean Salad.
  • Grain Bowls: Another way to use this flavorful honey and lime juice recipe is for grain bowls. It perfectly soaks into couscous, bulgur, and quinoa mixed in with roasted veggies and proteins. You’ve got to try it on my Southwest Quinoa Bowl or even this Caribbean Jerk Chicken Bowl!
  • Marinades: This recipe has more intent than just honey lime dressing for salad. I also use it for marinating chicken, pork, beef, and seafood. The acid from the lime tenderizes the meat, and the honey will caramelize it when cooked. This dressing is one of my go-to recipes when I make Grilled Mahi Mahi and Grilled Shrimp Skewers. I like playing with the ingredients by adding paprika for the Mahi Mahi Marinade and parsley for the Shrimp Marinade.  
Person drizzling a watermelon salad with honey lime dressing from the top view.

Expert Tips 

Check out some of these tips to nail this delicious salad dressing recipe the first time. Here are a few expert tips for the best results:

  • Use fresh ingredients: As with any recipe that uses minimal ingredients, prioritizing using fresh, high-quality ingredients is crucial to achieving great results. You’ll create the best honey-lime dressing that stands out by squeezing fresh limes and using high-quality olive oil.
  • Seasoning: Salt is an important addition to bring out the citrusy and sweet flavors of lime and honey, so do not skip using it (even if you are using this honey lime sauce in a fruit salad.) Additionally, as it is with any recipe, it is best to give it a taste and adjust the amount of seasoning based on your taste buds and the recipe you are using it in.
  • Change it up according to your recipe: This basic Mexican lime dressing can easily be adapted to complement the flavors of the recipe you are using it in. So, take advantage of the use of optional add-ins and make it your own.
  • Emulsify the dressing: While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. If you skip this step, the salad dressing will not be as creamy.
  • Use a blender or food processor: If you are making a large quantity of this recipe, you can use a blender or food processor.
  • Let it marinate: For maximum flavor, let it marinate for a minimum of 30 minutes to a few hours. I like to let it sit overnight to allow everything to sink in. 
  • Shake well: Dressings separate with time, so if you decide to make it ahead of time, give it a solid shake before using. 

Other Salad Dressings You Might Like

It is no secret that a salad is as delicious as its dressing. If you agree, you will love our collection of salad dressing recipes below:

If you try this Honey Lime Dressing recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A batch of freshly made honey lime salad dressing in a jar from the top view.
Print

Honey Lime Dressing Recipe

This honey lime dressing recipe is a versatile savory vinaigrette you can make with just a few basic ingredients. Endlessly customizable with a number of optional add-ins, it can be used as a drizzle for fruit or savory salads or as a marinade for meats.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 161kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ¼ cup lime juice ~ 2 limes (freshly squeezed)
  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Optional Add-Ins:

  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 small shallot or ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin

Instructions

  • Whisk together lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl. If using, add in the garlic, shallot, and ground cumin.
  • Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil while whisking constantly until emulsified.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in, if necessary.
  • Use it right away or store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator up to a week.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields approximately 1/2 cup of honey lime dressing.
  • Storage: You can store the dressing in the fridge for up to 7 days.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more if necessary before using it in your recipe. 
  • If you make it ahead, be sure to give it a good shake before using it.
  • While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. So, for the most creamy dressing, do not skip this part.

Nutrition

Calories: 161kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 10IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Honey Lime Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/feed/ 0
Chickpea Salad with Tuna https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/#comments Wed, 03 May 2023 16:46:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18721 If you never thought of making your tuna salad with chickpeas, then I have got you covered with an exceptional recipe that you will find yourself making over and over again. Protein-rich tuna and fiber-rich chickpeas flavored with homemade salad dressing is the perfect quick lunch recipe. Whether you want to turn it into a Tuna Chickpea Sandwich or keep it light over a bed of greens, there are so...

The post Chickpea Salad with Tuna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you never thought of making your tuna salad with chickpeas, then I have got you covered with an exceptional recipe that you will find yourself making over and over again. Protein-rich tuna and fiber-rich chickpeas flavored with homemade salad dressing is the perfect quick lunch recipe.

Whether you want to turn it into a Tuna Chickpea Sandwich or keep it light over a bed of greens, there are so many possibilities. If you are a tuna fan, be sure to check out this Tuna Melt Sandwich and Tuna Steak Salad to incorporate more seafood into your life, too.

Chickpea Tuna Salad in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

I like to think of this garbanzo bean tuna salad as a nice mix of pantry staples and fresh ingredients from the grocery store. The list of ingredients has been broken down into the dressing and the salad for ease.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

To make the salad dressing, you will need:

  • Mayonnaise: I like to use vegan mayo made with avocado oil (affiliate link.) However, feel free to use a brand you like.
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Dijon mustard: You can use Dijon mustard, stone ground, or whole grain mustard.
  • Lemon juice: As it is in any other salad recipe, freshly squeezed lemon juice provides the best flavor, and this garbanzo tuna salad is no exception.
  • Red wine vinegar: A splash of vinegar helps with brightening up the flavors. You can also use apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: When making salad dressing, I prefer chopped fresh garlic, but in a pinch, garlic powder would also work.
  • Kosher salt + black pepper

To assemble the salad, you will need:

  • Chickpeas: I used canned chickpeas as they are convenient. Of course, you can cook your own chickpeas for this recipe. If you used canned beans, make sure to drain and rinse beforehand.
  • Canned tuna: When buying tuna, look for sustainably sourced wild-caught tuna in water. This has exceptional flavor, and the tuna will naturally flake when mixing the salad. Keep in mind if you use tuna packed in olive oil, you will have to adjust the quantity of olive oil in the recipe.
  • Tomatoes: You can use grape, Roma, or cherry tomatoes.
  • Celery stalks
  • Green onions: Alternatively, you can also use a thinly sliced small red onion, or Pickled Red Onions would also work.
  • Yellow bell pepper: I used yellow peppers, but any color of bell peppers would work in this recipe.
  • Cucumber: Persian cucumber has a great crunch and holds up well, but a regular cucumber or English cucumber can also be used.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

  • Mayo substitutes: Not a fan of Mayo? Try an equal amount of Greek yogurt, mashed avocado (or a few tablespoons of Creamy Avocado Dressing), or store-bought pesto. A few tablespoons of this Pesto Salad Dressing could be a wonderful substitution too. If none of those work for you, use my all-purpose Lemon Dressing or Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette instead.
  • Add hard-boiled eggs: Incorporating a few eggs into this recipe is a great way to increase the protein content. The addition of eggs also gives it another layer of texture. When preparing them for the salad, be sure to dice them into bite-sized pieces.
  • Add vegetables: Add a handful of sweet vegetables, like cooked corn or green peas, or make it a Mediterranean chickpea tuna salad with drained and rinsed artichoke hearts.
  • Fresh herbs: Finish it with a sprinkle of fresh dill, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or a combination of all three.
  • Cheese (optional): Adding a small amount of crumbled feta cheese would give it a nice creamy flavor. 
  • Dill pickle relish (optional): The briny flavors of pickled relish, whether it is dill pickles or chopped Kalamata olives, or pickled red cabbage, would brighten up the flavors of the overall salad.
  • Salad greens (optional): Adding a handful of arugula, baby spinach, and spring mix or serving the salad on a bed of lettuce is an easy way to up the nutritional value of this simple salad.

How to Make Chickpea Tuna Salad?

This tuna garbanzo bean salad recipe is made in a few easy steps. Simply:

A collage of images showing how to make Tuna and chickpea salad.
  1. Make the dressing: Whisk mayonnaise, extra virgin olive oil, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, vinegar, garlic, salt, and pepper in a small bowl or measuring cup.
  2. Prepare the salad: Place the chickpeas, tuna, tomatoes, celery, scallions ( or sliced red onion), bell pepper, cucumber, and tomatoes in a large salad bowl.
  3. Toss: Drizzle over the dressing and gently toss to combine. 
  4. Serve: If you have the time, marinate for at least 30 minutes before serving.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

This simple chickpea tuna salad is the perfect lunch salad that you can incorporate into your weekly meal plan. I’d like to make it over the weekend as it stores well. Here’s how I like to do it:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the tuna salad as directed. If it is a part of your weekly meal prep lunches, divide it amongst small single-serve airtight containers and keep them in the fridge until ready to eat. With that being said, I usually do not keep tuna past the 3-day mark to avoid spoilage. 
  • Storage: Leftover tuna salad with garbanzo beans will keep in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid for 2-3 days. If you are making this salad using greens, keep in mind that greens such as butter lettuce, and spring mix will wilt quicker than more sturdy greens such as arugula or kale.

What to Serve It With?

Tuna chickpea salad is wonderful all its own, but it can easily be elevated to the next level by serving it in any of the following ways:

  • Bread: Serve it with crusty bread, like Olive Bread, or turn it into a crostini platter with toasted French baguette, cheese, and fruit. I also love it with soft pita bread or pita chips for scooping.
  • Serve it with Grains: Make it the main dish by serving it with a side dish of cooked Quinoa or Bulgur wheat.
  • Make it a side dish with a bowl of soup: Enjoy it throughout the summer months alongside a bowl of Basil Tomato Soup or Cold Cucumber Soup.
  • Turn it into a Sandwich: Layer it between a few slices of your favorite bread (I like pita bread or brioche) or stuff it into a pita bread to make Tuna Chickpea Sandwich, along with green leaf lettuce and a tomato slice.
Tuna chickpea salad placed in small bowls from the top view.

Expert Tips

While this recipe requires only a few steps and a handful of pantry ingredients, we wanted to share a few expert tips to help you make the best chickpea tuna salad recipe on your first try:

  • Good quality tuna: Look for a high quality (preferably wild caught), sustainably sourced can of tuna in water. This has exceptional flavor and texture.
  • Rinse chickpeas: Make sure to drain and rinse the can of chickpeas to get rid of preservatives and excess salt (or purchase a can with no salt if watching your salt content). 
  • Mash chickpeas: Alternatively, you can mash the chickpeas with a potato masher for a richer and creamy consistency.
  • Taste the dressing for seasoning. The dressing is not too heavy on the salt, so be sure to taste test first and adjust it to your liking.
  • Let it marinate. I highly recommend marinating the salad for at least 30 minutes before serving, either at room temperature or in the fridge, as this helps the ingredients to marry together.

FAQs

Which canned tuna is best for tuna salad?

I suggest using sustainably sourced, wild-caught tuna packed in water for the best flavor.

Why is chickpea salad good for you?

A simple chickpea salad like this one is good for you because it is packed with healthy fats, protein-rich chickpeas and tuna, and fiber-rich vegetables. Not to mention, it is super filling and easy to make.

Other Lunch Salads You Might Also Like:

Need more inspiration for creative lunch salads that are also on the healthier side and packed with protein? Here are a few more ideas:

If you try this Chickpea Salad with Tuna recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Chickpea Salad with tuna in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Chickpea Salad with Tuna Recipe

This Chickpea Salad with Tuna recipe is the perfect weekday lunch. Made with canned tuna and packed with veggies, this is a quick and easy to make salad recipe that is also meal prep friendly.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 267kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise or Greek Yogurt
  • 1 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoons Dijon mustard
  • cup freshly squeezed lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Salad

  • 1 can chickpeas 15 ounces – drained and rinsed
  • 1 can solid packed Tuna in water 5-ounces – drained
  • 1 cup tomatoes – grape or cherry; approximately 5 ounces – halved
  • 3 tablespoons chopped celery about 1 stalk
  • 2 tablespoons chopped scallions or sliced red onions
  • 1 small yellow bell pepper chopped
  • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced and quartered

Optional Add Ins:

  • 1 tablespoon dill pickle relish or olives- roughly chopped
  • 1 cup canned artichokes quartered
  • 1 avocado sliced
  • 2 cups salad greens such as arugula or spring mix – loosely packed

Instructions

  • Prepare the dressing: In a bowl or large measuring cup, whisk mayonnaise, extra virgin olive oil, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, vinegar, garlic, and salt and pepper. Taste for seasoning and add more if needed. Set aside while preparing the salad.
  • Prepare the salad: Place the chickpeas, tuna, tomatoes, celery, scallions, bell pepper, cucumber, and tomatoes.
  • Add the dressing and toss to combine.

Video

Notes

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the recipe as written. If it is a part of your weekly meal prep lunches, divide it amongst small single-serve airtight containers and keep them in the fridge until ready to eat. With that being said, I usually do not keep tuna past the 3-day mark to avoid spoilage.
  • Storage: Leftover tuna and chickpea salad will keep in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid for 2-3 days. If you are making this salad using greens, keep in mind that greens such as butter lettuce, and spring mix will wilt quicker than more sturdy greens such as arugula or kale.

Nutrition

Calories: 267kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 869mg | Potassium: 315mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 49mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Chickpea Salad with Tuna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/feed/ 40
Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/ https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/#comments Tue, 18 Apr 2023 18:59:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66405 I love this recipe because it has light preparation, healthy ingredients, and tons of flavor. The best part, you ask? You don’t even need to use the stove or oven! With only a few minutes of prep, it deserves a spot on your weekly rotation on busy weekday mornings. And if you have a few extra minutes on the weekend, switch up your standard breakfast and try this avocado toast...

The post Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love this recipe because it has light preparation, healthy ingredients, and tons of flavor. The best part, you ask? You don’t even need to use the stove or oven! With only a few minutes of prep, it deserves a spot on your weekly rotation on busy weekday mornings. And if you have a few extra minutes on the weekend, switch up your standard breakfast and try this avocado toast with salmon and egg! 

If you are a salmon lover like I am, be sure to also check out my Salmon Nicose Salad, Baked Sockeye Salmon, or Salmon Coconut Soup to serve for lunch or dinner.

Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast cut in half on a plate with a knife on the side.

Ingredients 

This avocado toast with smoked salmon is great because you can make it your own by adding whatever toppings you like best. Here’s a short, simple list of ingredients that will make shopping a breeze:

Ingredients for the recipe are from the top view.
  • Bread: Feel free to choose your favorite bread. I like to use whole-grain bread, but if you make your own sourdough bread, go for it. If you want to make it extra special, treat yourself with buttery homemade Brioche. If you have dietary restrictions like gluten intolerance, try my Almond Flour Bread or any store-bought gluten-free bread you like. There are also easy-to-find keto-friendly options at the grocery store if you’re following a keto diet. Finally, you can ditch the bread and go for your favorite bagel.
  • Avocado: The store has many avocado choices, but I think Hass avocado is the most flavorful one out there. When buying avocados, be sure to pick one that is nice and ripe for easy mashing or slicing.
  • Fresh lemon juice: Lemon juice will give your toast the acid it needs to wake up your taste buds. Fresh lemon (and freshly squeezed lemon juice) is preferred. Alternatively, you can use fresh lime in this recipe.
  • Cucumber: Persian cucumbers sliced thinly are my favorite for this, but English will get the job done.  
  • Smoked salmon vs. lox: While lox and smoked salmon are different things, they can be used interchangeably in this smoked salmon and avocado toast recipe. Just make sure to get a brand that you like. And if you are wondering, my favorite one is Trader Joes’, Everything But The Bagel Seasoned Salmon.
  • Spices: I use kosher salt and black pepper in terms of spices. However, if I am serving this smoked salmon breakfast toast to adults, I sometimes sprinkle it with a pinch of red pepper flakes.

Optional Add-Ins

What I love most about this healthy avocado toast is that it is endlessly customizable. If you are short on time, follow the recipe as written for a 10-minute breakfast. But if you are looking for a next-level breakfast or brunch, jazz it up with one (or more) of the optional add-ins below: 

  • Soft cheese: A thin layer of cream cheese or goat cheese is a great addition to this avocado toast, but any soft cheese you have on hand would work.
  • Fresh herbs or Salad Greens: A handful of arugula, spring mix, or microgreens not only add color but also make it healthier. Alternatively, a small amount of fresh dill or parsley would make a nice addition.
  • Onions: My Pickled Red Onion recipe will give this dish a tangy bite to compliment your smoked salmon avocado toast. However, thinly sliced red onion or scallions would work nicely as well.
  • Garlic: Adding chopped garlic to your creamy avocado spread can add an extra pop of flavor. I usually opt out of garlic if I am making this on a work day, but if I am serving it to a crowd for brunch, then I add one for extra flavor.
  • Olive Oil + Flaky Salt: I usually finish this layered toast with a drizzle of good-quality olive oil and a pinch of flaky salt.
  • Spices: Who doesn’t love Everything But the Bagel seasoning? A little goes a long way!
  • Egg on top: If eggs are a staple for you’re morning breakfast, you’re welcome to top it off with scrambled eggs or a fried egg. However, if I have the time, my favorite one is smoked salmon avocado toast that’s topped off with a poached egg.
  • Sliced tomato: Like it is with any toast recipe, adding a few slices of tomato to the layers would be a nice addition to this open-faced sandwich.
  • Olives or Capers: Use one teaspoon of chopped capers or olives for a briny bite. 

How to Make Avocado Toast with Smoked Salmon

This avocado smoked salmon toast will make prep and cleanup faster than ever before. You don’t even need to cook anything. Here’s how I make it:

  1. Toast the bread: This is optional, but toasting the bread will give it a nice crispy bite. If you do, be sure to let it cool while you are working on the rest of the prep.
A collage of images showing how to make avocado lox toast.
  1. Mash or slice the avocado: Scoop your avocado into a medium size bowl and mash with a fork. Add your salt, pepper, a squeeze of lemon juice, and garlic (optional), and mix well. Give it a taste and add in if needed. Alternatively, you can slice your avocado thinly.
  2. Spread the avocado mixture: Add a layer of your mashed or sliced avocado to the bread.
  3. Top with cucumber: Arrange the sliced cucumber evenly on top.
  4. Add smoked salmon: Layer about 2 oz. of smoked salmon per person on your toast, along with the pickled red onion. 
A collage of photos showing how to assemble avocado salmon toast.
  1. Garnish: Make it your own with any of your favorite garnishes. I like microgreens and a drizzle of extra virgin olive oil. Sprinkle some Everything But the Bagel Seasoning for the finishing touch. 
  2. Serve: Once you’ve topped your toast with the desired garnishes, serve with a lemon wedge on the side.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This smoked salmon toast recipe is best when served right away. However, you can prepare some ingredients ahead of time to put together in just 5 minutes. Here’s what I recommend: 

  • Make Ahead: The most time-consuming part of this avocado toast with salmon recipe is preparing the avocado spread. However, it can be prepped in advance. So, go ahead and make it a day ahead and store it as I did in my go-to Guacamole Recipe. Here’s how to do it:
    • After making the guacamole, evenly spread it in an airtight container.
    • Cover the surface with a thin layer of water, lime, or lemon juice. We are doing this to prevent it from oxidizing.
    • Place a plastic wrap on top, and remove all the air bubbles before storing it in the refrigerator. You can also slice your cucumbers beforehand and store them in an airtight container for quick assembly. 
  • Storing: Enjoy this delicious avocado and salmon toast immediately for the best results. I’d be surprised if you have leftovers! But, if you do, then store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator and eat them by the next day.  
Smoked Salmon and Avocado Toast garnished with red onion and micro greens from the top view.

Expert Tips 

Even though this smoked salmon toast recipe is just as effortless as it is delicious, a few quick tips can take this dish to the next level. Here are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Add lemon juice to the avocado: The best way to prevent your avocado mash from turning brown is to squeeze it with fresh lemon juice. The addition of a small amount of acid also helps with flavor, so do not skip using it.
  • It is best when assembled on the day you plan to serve: As is the case with most seafood recipes, I recommend assembling your avocado smoked salmon toast on the day you plan to serve it. If you are planning to serve a crowd, follow the make-ahead tips above to make the last-minute assembly a breeze.
  • Toast the bread lightly. This is an optional step, but toasting the bread gives this dish the perfect warm crunch.
  • Multiply the recipe. The recipe below, as written, is for two servings, but you can multiply it as many times as you need.

FAQs

Is avocado and smoked salmon good for you?

Absolutely! All the elements of this recipe make for a healthy smoked salmon breakfast. Both salmon (packed with Omega 3 fatty acids) and avocado are considered some of the healthiest fats on the planet. When you are shopping for smoked salmon at the store, be sure to check the back and buy a brand that is made with clean ingredients and without any sugars.

Other Avocado Recipes You Might Like:

Can’t get enough of avocado goodness? You are not alone. Here at Foolproof Living, we are huge fans of this versatile fruit and have many other recipes. Below are a few that we think you might like:

If you try this Avocado Smoked Salmon Toast recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Smoked Salmon Avocado toast on a plate with a knife on the side.
Print

Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast Recipe

This smoked salmon avocado toast is a quick, easy, and healthy breakfast that not only tastes great but also looks delicious. Ready in 10 minutes,  it is simple enough for a morning on the go and elevated enough for a holiday brunch like Easter, Mother's Day, or even Christmas morning.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Low Lactose
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 240kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pieces toast multi-grain bread and sourdough bread would all work
  • 1 large avocado ripened
  • 1 ½ teaspoons lemon juice plus lemon wedges to serve with
  • 1 garlic clove minced – optional
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ Persian cucumber peeled and sliced thinly (or English cucumber would also work)
  • 4 oz. smoked salmon packaged
  • ½ cup micro greens or arugula
  • 1 tablespoon pickled red onions optional
  • A drizzle of extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Everything Bagel Seasoning optional

Instructions

  • If preferred, toast your bread and let it cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, in a small bowl, mash avocado using the back of a fork. Add lemon juice, minced garlic (if using), salt, and pepper. Stir well. Give it a taste and add more if necessary.
  • Spread each slice of toast with the avocado mixture.
  • Top each slice with the cucumber slices.
  • Place smoked salmon pieces and pickled onion (if using) on top.
  • Garnish with microgreens and a drizzle of olive oil. Finish it off with a sprinkle of Everything Bagel Seasoning.
  • Serve with a lemon wedge on the side.

Notes

  • Garlic: If I am making this avocado toast on a work day I omit using garlic, but if I am making it on the weekend, then I make sure to add it in. 
  • Multiply the recipe: Serving a crowd? No problem. Simply multiply the recipe as many times as you want. I usually serve 2 ounces of smoked salmon and ½ avocado per serving.
  • To Make Ahead: If you are serving this recipe to a crowd, feel free to mash the avocados in advance, but be sure to cover the surface with a thin layer of lemon juice followed by some plastic wrap to prevent oxidizing. Assemble the recipe right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: This avocado toast is best on the day it is served. However, you can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 1 day.

Nutrition

Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 1170mg | Potassium: 636mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 225IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/feed/ 2
Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/ https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/#comments Sun, 02 Apr 2023 19:16:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10022 The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements the earthy flavor of the fresh spinach. Plus, adding a frozen banana and almond milk makes this spinach banana smoothie a naturally sweet and healthy drink that is worthy of your weekly smoothie rotation.  If you enjoy smoothies like this Peanut Butter Spinach Smoothie, you might also like our Turmeric...

The post Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements the earthy flavor of the fresh spinach. Plus, adding a frozen banana and almond milk makes this spinach banana smoothie a naturally sweet and healthy drink that is worthy of your weekly smoothie rotation. 

If you enjoy smoothies like this Peanut Butter Spinach Smoothie, you might also like our Turmeric Green Smoothie and Vegan Banana Smoothie, which are both packed with a variety of nutrients for a satisfying breakfast. And if you need more smoothie recipe inspiration, be sure to browse our collection of superfood smoothies.

Spinach peanut butter banana smoothie garnished with banana slices from the front view.

Ingredients

The ingredient list of this peanut butter banana spinach smoothie is short and sweet, with plenty of substitutions and optional add-ins to make it even more nutritious. Below is everything you need to know to make this healthy green smoothie your own:

Ingredients for green monster smoothie on a marble backdrop.
  • Frozen banana: I usually freeze ripe bananas when they start changing their colors. If all you have is a fresh banana (and want your smoothie to be super cold), then just add in a cup of ice cubes.
  • Natural Peanut Butter: I prefer unsalted and unsweetened creamy peanut butter to avoid added sugars and excessive sodium. However, you can also use other nut butter options like almond butter or cashew butter. And if you have nut allergies, you can substitute peanut butter with a seed butter of your choice.
  • Non-Dairy Milk: I prefer dairy free unsweetened almond milk (or vanilla almond milk), but any kind of milk would work here. Soy milk, oat milk, and coconut milk would all work. 
  • Fresh Spinach Leaves: I recommend using prewashed and rinsed baby spinach for ease of use. While I prefer fresh spinach for its milder flavor, you can make it with frozen spinach as well.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins: 

  • Yogurt: I sometimes add in a few tablespoons of whole milk yogurt for probiotics. Both plain Greek yogurt and vanilla yogurt would work here.
  • Superfoods: If you stock your pantry with superfoods such as chia seeds, ground flax seeds (aka flaxseed meal), and hemp seeds, you can add them in. Additionally, you can add in a few tablespoons of your favorite protein powder and powdered collagen for an extra boost.
  • Other leafy greens: Use other leafy greens like kale (or blanched kale) and spring mix instead of raw spinach. Kale peanut butter smoothie is just as delicious but tastes rather earthy. You can also use swiss chard and collard greens, but I would recommend blanching them first to get rid of some of their bitterness.
  • Sweeteners: If you like your smoothie more on the sweeter side, adding a few tablespoons of maple syrup, a few pitted dates or some honey (non-vegan option) gives is a nice sweetness.
  • Spices: A pinch of cinnamon or nutmeg is an easy way to give in a nice kick of flavor.

How To Make Peanut Butter Banana Spinach Smoothie?

The best part of this spinach breakfast smoothie recipe is that it takes just a few minutes to make. Simply:

A collage of photos showing how to make spinach banana peanut butter smoothie recipe.
  1. Blend: Put spinach leaves, peanut butter, milk of your choice, and frozen banana (and all the optional add-ins) into a blender and blend until creamy and smooth. 
  2. Serve: Pour into a few glasses (or mason jars) and serve right away.

How To Make Ahead and Store Spinach Banana Smoothie?

Whether you make green smoothies like this for breakfast or enjoy them as a post-workout snack, with just a few minutes of advance prep, you can have them in minutes. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: Portion out all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a Ziplock bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Expert Tips:

  • Adjust the consistency: If you prefer your spinach banana peanut butter smoothie to have a thicker consistency add more frozen bananas along with a handful of ice cubes. And if you want it to have a thinner consistency, simply add more milk to the blender.
  • Use a high powered blender: If you make green monster smoothies like this one on the regular, I highly recommend investing in a high-speed blender. While you can make a good smoothie in any blender, a high-powered one makes it so much easier, especially when blending frozen fruit and leafy greens.
  • Chill your glass: I love serving this in the warmer summer months by the pool as an afternoon snack in a cold glass as an alternative to ice cream. I pour it into chilled glasses and serve it with a few slices of bananas and then let everyone know that I have a delicious green spinach milkshake! It disappears in minutes!
A person pouring smoothie with spinach and banana in a glass.

FAQs:

Why is spinach good in smoothies?

Adding a handful of spinach into your smoothie is a great idea because spinach is a low calorie, nutrient dense food that is packed with fiber, vitamins, and minerals. It also has a mild taste that does not take over the whole smoothie and blends well with the rest of the ingredients.

Are smoothies good for losing weight?

They can be as long as they are consumed in smaller portions and without extra added sugars.

Is peanut butter good for protein smoothies?

Yes, because peanut butter is a great source of plant-based protein, with 8 grams of protein per 2 tablespoons (source.) Adding a few tablespoons of peanut butter is an easy way to get a portion of your daily protein in.

Other Smoothie Recipes You Might Like:

It is no secret that green smoothies like this Spinach Banana Smoothie have a long list of benefits and incorporating them in your daily diet (especially as a substitute for your sweet cravings), will help you feel energized and full. If you agree, here are a few other smoothie recipes you might like:

If you try this healthy peanut butter green smoothie recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Peanut butter and spinach smoothie in a glass garnished with banana slices.
Print

Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie Recipe

Treat yourself to a refreshing Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie, crafted with creamy peanut butter, vibrant fresh spinach and a frozen ripe banana. This naturally sweetened green smoothie is ready in 5 minutes and great as a healthy breakfast or post work-out fuel.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 257kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups baby spinach leaves
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any other regular or plant based milk
  • 1 large banana frozen*
  • 3 tablespoons peanut butter creamy and unsalted natural peanut butter
  • 1 tablespoon ground flaxseeds optional – plus more as garnish

Instructions

  • Place all the ingredients into a blender. Blend in high speed until smooth.
  • Pour into glasses and sprinkle with ground flaxseeds (and/or chia seeds.) Serve right away.

Notes

  • Banana: If you do not have a frozen banana, you can use a ripe one and add 1 cup of ice cubes into the blender.
  • Optional sweeteners: If you want your peanut butter smoothie to be sweeter, you can add in a few tablespoons of maple syrup, honey or a few pitted dates and blend until smooth.
  • Consistency: For a thicker smoothie, use an additional half a banana and for a thinner one, use more almond milk.
  • To Make Ahead: Portion all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a plastic bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 354mg | Potassium: 541mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 2851IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 353mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/feed/ 8
Overnight Oats with Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-oats-with-yogurt/ https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-oats-with-yogurt/#comments Fri, 13 Jan 2023 16:50:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63759 I love to make a big batch of healthy overnight oats with Greek yogurt at the beginning of the week, especially when I know I have busy weekdays ahead. It’s convenient, filling, yummy, and prevents me from skipping the most important meal of the day!  If you’re looking to incorporate similar recipes into your breakfast routine, you have to try this Overnight Steel Cut Oats Recipe, my Almond Milk Oatmeal,...

The post Overnight Oats with Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

I love to make a big batch of healthy overnight oats with Greek yogurt at the beginning of the week, especially when I know I have busy weekdays ahead. It’s convenient, filling, yummy, and prevents me from skipping the most important meal of the day! 

If you’re looking to incorporate similar recipes into your breakfast routine, you have to try this Overnight Steel Cut Oats Recipe, my Almond Milk Oatmeal, and Muesli Overnight Oats

Oatmeal combined with yogurt in a bowl with fruit from the top view.

Ingredients

This simple yogurt and oats recipe requires four basic ingredients that you likely already have on hand or can easily pick up at the grocery store. To amp up the flavor, add as many additional ingredients or toppings as you’d like. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for a greek yogurt and oatmeal recipe in bowls from the top view.
  • To make creamy overnight oats with yogurt, gather Greek Vanilla Yogurt, old-fashioned rolled oats, honey (or maple syrup), cinnamon, and water.
  • As optional toppings, use fresh fruit (such as fresh berries), chopped nuts or nut butter (such as almond butter, peanut butter, or sunflower seed butter), and even homemade granola

Ingredient Substitutions

This easy overnight oats with yogurt recipe is very forgiving when it comes to substitutions. Feel free to customize it to your liking to accommodate the ingredients you have on hand or your dietary restrictions or preferences. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Yogurt: While plain Greek yogurt gives this oatmeal with yogurt recipe a creamy texture and a perfect consistency, feel free to use plain yogurt or your favorite yogurt instead. I love to make vanilla yogurt at home, so I can control the sweetness, but you can also purchase vanilla yogurt from your local store. You can even make overnight oats with strawberry yogurt or your favorite fruit-flavored yogurts. If you wish to make the recipe vegan and dairy-free, simply substitute your favorite vegan yogurt. Just remember that vegan yogurt is typically thinner in consistency than regular yogurt, so your yogurt with oats recipe may not be super creamy if you use vegan yogurt (but it’ll still taste great). 
  • Oats: In my opinion, amongst all types, the best oats for yogurt overnight oats are old-fashioned rolled oats. My personal favorite is the organic brand One Degree (affiliate link), which offers old-fashioned oats and gluten-free oats. You can also use quick oats to make instant oatmeal with Greek yogurt. Not sure about how rolled oats are different than quick oats? Check out our comprehensive guide on quick oats vs. rolled oats. Or, to really pack in some extra superfoods, substitute equal parts of Homemade Muesli for the oats. 
  • Water vs. milk: Some cold oatmeal cereal recipes use milk, but I thought water would suffice since we’re also using yogurt. If you want to use milk to make this refrigerator oatmeal recipe extra rich and creamy, you can use cow’s milk or non-dairy milk, such as almond milk, coconut milk, or even cashew milk
  • Sweetener: While I love the flavor and sweetness of honey, you can use whatever type of sweetener you prefer or have on hand. I recommend maple syrup, coconut sugar, or brown sugar, as they all pair well with this overnight yogurt oatmeal. 
  • Spices: If ground cinnamon just isn’t enough, you can amp up the flavor with all your favorite “sweet” spices. Ground nutmeg, cardamom, ginger, and cloves would all pair beautifully with your oatmeal and yogurt breakfast. 

Optional Toppings and Add-Ins

You can easily customize this recipe’s flavor profile and sweetness by adding your toppings of choice. Feel free to get creative, but here are some of my favorites: 

  • Fruit: Fresh fruit is a classic breakfast topping, and Greek yogurt with strawberries and oats pairs so well. I also love to top mine with a ripe mashed banana, raspberries, or blueberries. You can always use thawed frozen fruit if berries or your favorite fruits aren’t in season. 
  • Additional sweeteners: If you have leftover Cranberry Maple Sauce sitting around from holiday baking, use it to sweeten up this recipe! Other fruit sauces and jams, like Blueberry Sauce or Homemade Applesauce, are also great natural sweeteners to flavor your oats with Greek yogurt. 
  • Nuts: To add some crunch to your simple overnight oats with yogurt, use chopped nuts, such as almonds, cashews, pecans, or walnuts. For a high-protein breakfast that’s the perfect pre or post-workout fuel, add a tablespoon or two of nut butter, such as peanut butter or almond butter. To make your Greek yogurt with oats recipe extra decadent, try topping it off with chocolate chips (which pair great with peanut butter). 
  • Granola: You can also top your oat and yogurt breakfast with my Chunky Granola Recipe or this Quinoa Crunch for additional texture, flavor, and a boost of nutrients. 
  • Superfoods: If you’re looking for a great way to incorporate an extra dose of health benefits into your daily diet, add a pinch of superfoods, such as chia seeds, hemp seeds, or ground flax seeds, into your yummy breakfast. 

How to Make Overnight Oats with Yogurt

In only five minutes, you can whip up this basic vanilla overnight oats recipe with yogurt to have it ready to go first thing in the morning. If you’d like to make your own vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt to use in this recipe, follow the first two steps below. If you purchased vanilla yogurt from the store, you can skip to step three. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Make the vanilla yogurt: Place plain, whole milk yogurt (regular or Greek), honey, and vanilla extract in a bowl. Whisk to combine. 
  2. Taste and adjust: Give it a taste and add more honey or vanilla if needed. 
A person showing how to make overnight oats with yogurt from the top view.
  1. Combine the ingredients: Add the vanilla yogurt, honey, and water to a large mixing bowl. Whisk until well combined. 
  2. Stir in the oats: Add in the oats and ground cinnamon (if using) and give it a stir until the mixture is well combined. 
A person showing how to make a recipe with oatmeal and yogurt.
  1. Rest: Cover the bowl with a lid or plastic wrap and place it in the fridge for at least 6 hours. 
  2. Stir: In the morning, take the vanilla yogurt overnight oats out of the fridge and give them a good stir to reincorporate the ingredients. 
  3. Serve or store: If you’re ready to serve, place your desired amount of oats in a bowl and garnish with your toppings of choice and a drizzle of honey. If you wish to store your Greek yogurt and oats recipe, divide it into jars and store it in the fridge. 

How to Serve Overnight Yogurt Oats?

It’s no secret that starting your day with Greek yogurt is an excellent habit because of its many health benefits, such as its high calcium and protein content. Once your overnight oatmeal with yogurt is ready in the morning, you can enjoy it as-is or store it in jars as part of your weekly meal prep. Here are some tips:

  • Make breakfast in a jar with yogurt: For a truly grab-and-go, single-serving breakfast, make overnight oats in a mason jar! Mix up a big batch of this recipe (multiply the recipe as many times as you’d like), let it sit overnight, and divide it into 16 oz mason jars (or another one of your favorite containers) in the morning. To make things even easier, you can add your favorite toppings, such as fruit, into each 16-ounce jar. You can also layer the oats with granola, as you would in my Yogurt Parfait recipe. However, I recommend adding the granola to the jars right before you’re ready to serve, as granola tends to get soggy as it sits.
  • Serve it in a bowl: For a quick way to serve your easy breakfast recipe, whip up a batch of Greek oats and add your desired amount to a bowl in the morning. Don’t forget to add the toppings!
A bowl of oats topped with fruit and nuts from the side view.

How to Store

This overnight oats yogurt recipe is super meal prep friendly, especially if you store the recipe in mason jars. If you store it in an airtight container, such as a mason jar, in the fridge, it will stay fresh for up to four days.

FAQs

Can you put uncooked oats in yogurt?

Yes, you can! Overnight oats are a no-cook raw oats and yogurt recipe. There’s no need to cook the oats beforehand, as adding yogurt to oatmeal and letting it sit overnight allows the oats to soak up the liquid and become soft and easy to digest.

How long do overnight oats with yougurt need to sit?

Raw oats in yogurt need to sit for at least six hours in order to fully soak up the liquid and become soft. For best results, giving them an overnight soak is preferable.

Can I heat up overnight oats with yogurt?

I don’t recommend heating it up, as overnight oat recipes taste better cold. However, if you prefer to serve it warm, the best way to do so is to microwave it in 30-second intervals, making sure to stir after each interval until it reaches your desired temperature.

How long do overnight oatmeal with yogurt last?

Overnight oats with vanilla yogurt will last for up to four days if stored in an airtight jar or container in the fridge.

Can you freeze overnight oats with yogurt?

Yes, technically, you can freeze refrigerator oatmeal with yogurt. However, I don’t recommend freezing this recipe, as the taste and texture are best when refrigerated. Instead of freezing, I recommend making smaller, individual servings if you think you cannot consume an entire recipe within about four days.

Can I make this recipe using steel cut oats?

I don’t recommend substituting steel-cut oats, as I found that they don’t soften up as well as regular oats. If you want to make overnight steel-cut oats with yogurt, you can make my Overnight Steel Cut Oats recipe and add in vanilla yogurt once the oats are cooked.

Other Breakfast Porridge Recipes

Make-ahead breakfasts like this refrigerator yogurt oatmeal are a perfect option for busy mornings, as they’re quick, filling, nutritious, and tasty. If you’re looking for more easy, healthy breakfast ideas, browse the links below for inspiration: 

If you try this Overnight Oats in Yogurt recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Refrigerator oats with yogurt in a bowl with fruit from the top view.
Print

Overnight Oats with Yogurt Recipe

This Overnight Oats with Yogurt recipe is a quick, nutritious, and high-protein breakfast that's easy to add to your weekly meal plan. Simply combine the ingredients, let them soak overnight, and enjoy in the morning! Plus, this basic recipe pairs perfectly with a variety of different toppings, making it easily customizable to suit your preferences.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 5 minutes
Servings 2
Calories 203kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Vanilla Yogurt or Greek Vanilla Yogurt
  • 2 tablespoons honey or maple syrup more to taste
  • 1 cup water or milk of your choice
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
  • 1 ½ cups old-fashioned rolled oats

Optional Toppings:

  • ½ cup fresh fruit such as fresh berries
  • A handful of nuts or a few tablespoons of nut butter
  • Granola

Instructions

  • Combine the ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, whisk together vanilla yogurt, honey, and water until well combined.
  • Stir in the oats: Stir in the rolled oats and ground cinnamon (if using) and mix until fully incorporated.
  • Cover and rest: Cover with plastic wrap or a tight-fitting lid and place in the refrigerator for at least 6 hours or overnight.
  • Stir: In the morning, give it a quick stir.
  • Garnish and serve: Divide the overnight yogurt oats into bowls (or jars) and, if preferred, garnish them with your favorite toppings and a drizzle of honey.

Video

Notes

  • Yogurt: You can make your own vanilla yogurt or buy any of your favorite yogurt brands from the grocery store to make this recipe. You can also use your favorite fruit flavored yogurt in this recipe. 
  • Oats: You can make this recipe with instant oats, but I do not recommend using steel-cut oats as they do not soften properly even after a whole night in the fridge.
  • Store: Store in an airtight container or jar in the fridge for up to four days.
  • Meal prep: If you are making the refrigerator oatmeal as a part of your weekly meal prep, you can easily multiply this recipe. As a general rule, my go-to overnight oats ratio with yogurt and water is 1 ½ cups rolled oats, 1 cup yogurt, and 1 cup water (or any milk of your choice.)
  • Calorie info: Calorie information below does not include the optional toppings.

Nutrition

Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 91mg | Potassium: 334mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 41g | Vitamin A: 233IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 222mg | Iron: 0.4mg

The post Overnight Oats with Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-oats-with-yogurt/feed/ 4
How To Make Muesli https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/#comments Tue, 03 Jan 2023 15:10:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63563 Few breakfasts are as filling, nutritious, or versatile as this homemade muesli recipe. Every bite will satisfy your tastebuds, whether you prepare it with almond milk, like my Almond Milk Oatmeal, or top it with fresh fruit, like my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. And if you love the health-conscious ingredients in this easy muesli recipe, you’ll adore other oatmeal dishes, including my Vegan Baked Oatmeal. Muesli Ingredients Below, you will find...

The post How To Make Muesli appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Few breakfasts are as filling, nutritious, or versatile as this homemade muesli recipe. Every bite will satisfy your tastebuds, whether you prepare it with almond milk, like my Almond Milk Oatmeal, or top it with fresh fruit, like my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. And if you love the health-conscious ingredients in this easy muesli recipe, you’ll adore other oatmeal dishes, including my Vegan Baked Oatmeal.

A homemade cereal in a jar with a spoon from the top view.

What is Muesli?

Muesli is a healthy breakfast dish made from a rolled oats base mixed in with other ingredients, such as nuts, fruits, and seeds, and served right away with milk (or juice) or soaked overnight.

This nutritious dish—sometimes mistyped as “museli,” “meusli,” “muselix,” and “muslie”—was created by Swiss physician Maximilian Bircher-Benner in the 20th century to serve as a healthy breakfast for hospital patients as a part of their treatment. (source – Wikipedia Muesli article)

The original Bircher muesli recipe was a bit different than what it is today. It was made by using raw oats, grated apples, and chopped nuts mixed with water, lemon juice, and sweetened condensed milk.

Needless to say, it took off after its creation, and muesli breakfasts spread quickly throughout Switzerland. The recipe became so widespread in the country that many still refer to it as “Swiss muesli” or “Swiss-style muesli.”

Despite its European origins, muesli has also become a favorite breakfast food in the U.S., with successful brands like Alpen Muesli and Bob’s Red Mills appearing in health food stores across the country.

Muesli Ingredients

Below, you will find the formula I follow to make this muesli recipe along with recommendations on brands I like and buy all the time. However, if you are living outside the US (or in an area where you do not have access to these specific ingredients), please know that you can substitute pretty much every single ingredient in this recipe, which is listed under the formula.

Some of the links in this section are affiliate links, which means if you make a purchase using a link, I will get a commission at no cost to you.

Ingredients for a homemade cereal in bowls from the top view.

With that being said, these ingredients and brands are just a suggestion, and I suggest you take this basic muesli recipe and change it up according to your taste buds. My only recommendation is that you read the labels while you are shopping for these ingredients. 

When I am at the store, I make sure to buy products that are unsweetened, unsalted, and organic as much as possible. I prefer organic ingredients because USDA organic requirements prohibit the use of pesticides in farming, and I prefer that my muesli breakfast bowl in the morning has none of that in it. 

This recipe results in 16 cups of mixed muesli (approx. 16 servings), though you can halve or multiply the recipe as necessary. Please refer to the formula sheet below for ingredients and their amounts.

IngredientAmount
Quick Cooking Rolled Oats3 cups
Other Grain Cereals5 cups
Dried Fruit3 cups
Superfoods1 cup
Seeds and Nuts2 1/2 cups

Quick Cooking Rolled Oats VS. Old Fashioned Rolled Oats

You can use either quick-cooking or old-fashioned oats for muesli. I prefer using quick oats because they don’t require any extra cooking to soften them. Add in milk or yogurt, and they’re ready to eat!

If you are not sure about how they are different, be sure to check out this comprehensive article on rolled oats vs. old-fashioned oats.

However, if you prefer to use old-fashioned oats—a thicker cut than quick-cooking oats—I recommend roasting them in the oven before eating. Simply spread the rolled oats on a large baking sheet alongside nuts and seeds (if desired) at 350 degrees F. for 10-12 minutes. Just make sure to give it a toss halfway through the process.

Other Grain Cereals

Adding breakfast muesli cereals to your mixture is an excellent way to give your recipe a delectable crunch. Some of my favorite brands include Brown Rice Crisps, Rice Puffs, Kamut Khorasan Wheat Puffs (not gluten-free), Bran Flakes (not gluten-free), and Quinoa Flakes—all of which should be available in the health section of your local grocery store. Of course, you can order them online as well. Be sure to use a gluten-free cereal brand if you want to keep this recipe gluten-free.

Dried Fruit

To give your muesli mixture an irresistible sweetness, you can add any dried fruit that’s unsweetened and doesn’t contain sulfur (marked as “unsulfured”). Some of my favorite dry fruits include dried apples, golden raisins, dried apricot, goji berries, and dried mango. 

If I am making this DIY muesli during the holidays, I like using dried cranberries. However, be aware that most dried cranberries are sweetened with sugar as they are pretty bitter without it. That being said, you can find use orange juice-sweetened cranberries at health food stores like Whole Foods, Sprouts, and Trader Joe’s.

Superfoods

If you’re wondering how to make muesli extra nutritious, superfoods are just what your recipe needs. Heart-healthy hemp seeds and antioxidant-packed chia seeds are two of my favorite health-conscious add-ins. 

You could also add ground flax seeds to your muesli to increase its omega-3 fatty acids. However, don’t add them to the cereal mixture until just before you eat it, as they must be refrigerated until use.

Seeds and Nuts

Want to add more protein to your vegan muesli? Any unsalted raw seeds or nuts will work. My go-to additions to this muesli cereal recipe include pumpkin seeds, sliced or slivered almonds, sunflower seeds, pecans, and walnuts.

Other Optional Add-Ins & Topping Suggestions

Give your muesli a healthy crunch by filling it with unsweetened coconut flakes. Or, add ½ cup of wheat germ for a power food with tons of healthy fats. Sesame seeds, fresh berries, apricots, and bananas also add a bright taste to your muesli breakfast. 

I also enjoy adding ground warm spices for additional flavor, stirring in a pinch of ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, ground cloves, ground ginger, or ground cardamom. Just remember that a small amount goes a long way!

How to Prepare Muesli at Home?

A series of images showing how to combine ingredients to make muesli.

This healthy muesli recipe is one of the simplest breakfast dishes in my recipe book. Simply place all of the ingredients in a large bowl or glass jar, mix to combine, top it off with a lid, and serve as desired. That’s it!

How to Serve?

There are several ways to serve this DIY muesli recipe. From homemade muesli cereal to fruity almond milk oatmeal, these tasty suggestions will have you craving a muesli breakfast daily.

  • Serve it as cereal with milk: Prepare your muesli as a breakfast cereal by mixing it with an equal amount of cold milk (I recommend one cup for every cup of muesli). You can use cow or plant-based milk, such as oat or almond milk (which you can even make at home using my effortless recipes for Almond Butter Milk or DIY Almond Milk!). Then, top off your cereal muesli with fresh fruit (strawberries and blueberries are my faves) for extra juicy and sweet flavors.
  • With yogurt: Give your muesli an irresistibly creamy texture by soaking it overnight in plain Greek yogurt. If you don’t want your muesli quite as soft, you could make a yogurt bowl by topping off your mixture with Homemade Vanilla Yogurt or your favorite store-bought brand. Or, make your muesli part of your favorite yogurt parfait with recipes like my fresh and flavorful Greek Yogurt Parfait. Alternatively, you can use this muesli to make my Overnight Oats with Yogurt by simply using this muesli mixture instead of rolled oats.
  • With juice: Enjoy your muesli in European style by serving it with fruit juice, such as orange juice.
  • Make oatmeal: To make muesli oatmeal, mix 1 cup of water or milk for every ½ cup of muesli. Then, bring the mixture to a quick boil on the stovetop or in the microwave, give it a quick stir, and serve. This simple oatmeal comes together in just 5-10 minutes. If you need further instructions, check out my Almond Milk Oatmeal recipe.
  • With fruit on top or on the side: Top it off with a handful of fruit, or better yet, make a batch of my Fruit Breakfast Salad and serve it on the side.
  • Optional sweeteners: If you have a sweet tooth, in my opinion, the best muesli recipe is one that has delicious natural sweeteners, like Pureed Blueberries, Unsweetened Applesauce, or Cranberry Maple Sauce. Alternatively, a drizzle of honey is yet another way of adding some sweetness to your morning bowl.
Two photos showing a close-up of a homemade cereal and the cereal in a jar.

How to Store Homemade Muesli?

You can store your muesli mix in an airtight container or airtight jar at room temperature for up to a month. It may seem like the muesli ingredients should last longer according to their expiration dates. However, their longevity decreases when repeatedly exposed to air, such as when you open their storage container to get a helping of muesli.

I use this one-gallon glass jar to store my muesli mixture. If you want to keep your muesli for longer than a month, place the cereal in smaller containers and remove as much air as possible.

Expert Tips

Learning to make muesli at home is one of my favorite beginner-level recipes. With these pro suggestions, your dream breakfast will come together in seconds.

  • Use a large bowl to mix: I highly recommend using a large bowl to combine your ingredients, as this recipe results in 16 cups of muesli, and you need enough space to distribute your ingredients evenly. When I made muesli on Instagram, I mixed all the ingredients in a large, 1-gallon glass jar, and as you can see, it is best to do it in a big bowl and then transfer it to the container.
  • Use organic and gluten-free certified ingredients: Reduce your gluten intake, cut unhealthy chemicals from your diet, and support all-natural farms by using organic and gluten-free ingredients in this muesli dish.
  • Halve or multiply the recipe as you please: You can prepare as many or as few servings of this breakfast dish as you’d like. Refer to the formula to increase or decrease your ingredients accordingly.
  • Get creative: There are countless different ways to customize this easy homemade muesli recipe, and trying out new combinations is the best way to vary your diet without the hassle of everyday prep time. Whether you try this dish using an overnight oats-style, mix in some peanut butter, or top it with additional fresh fruits, don’t be afraid to have fun with it!
  • Eat smaller portions for weight loss: If you’re trying to shed some pounds, I recommend consuming it in smaller portions (perhaps, ½ cup per serving.) Though it is made using healthy and nutritious ingredients, consuming muesli in smaller portions is ideal for weight loss.
Fruit muesli in a bowl with milk and a spoon from the top view.

FAQs

Wondering how to cook muesli, what muesli’s nutritional information is, or how muesli differs from other breakfast staples? Here are all your homemade muesli questions answered:

Are the oats in muesli raw?

Yes, muesli contains raw rolled oats, one of the most popular oats for breakfast amongst all kinds of oats available for consumption. Depending on your recipe, you can make muesli using quick-cooking oats or old-fashioned rolled oats.

What’s the difference between muesli and granola?

Though the two share many ingredients, muesli and granola are different. Traditional muesli is a dry mix of uncooked ingredients. By contrast, granola is baked using a binder of oil or egg whites and often contains a sweetener, such as maple syrup, honey, or brown sugar.

Is muesli gluten-free?

Muesli can be gluten-free if you ensure that each component ingredient is also gluten-free (including gluten-free oats!).

Is homemade muesli healthy?

Muesli contains highly nutritious ingredients, such as fiber-rich oats, nutrient-dense superfoods, and heart-healthy grains. You can even add milk for extra calcium! Therefore, as long as you read your ingredients’ labels and know what you’re using, muesli can be a healthy way to start the day.

Other Breakfast Bowl Recipes You Might Also Like

When you make your own muesli, you’re bound to fall in love with tasty breakfast foods. Try these other fan-favorite breakfast bowl recipes, and you’ll start every morning energized and satisfied.

If you try this How to Make Muesli recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Muesli oats in a bowl with a spoon from the top view.
Print

How to Make Muesli Recipe

Once you learn How to Make Muesli at home, you'll never have to buy store-bought cereal again. Not only is homemade muesli a nutrient-dense and filling breakfast, but it's also meal-prep friendly for busy mornings. This helpful guide also features plenty of substitutions and serving suggestions to accommodate your preferences, the ingredients you have on hand, and dietary restrictions and allergies.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 16 cups
Calories 406kcal

Ingredients

Instructions

  • Combine ingredients: Place all ingredients in a large bowl (or a glass jar, like I did) and stir to combine.
  • Serve/store: Cover it tightly with a lid. Enjoy it with your favorite milk and fresh fruit.

Notes

  • When shopping for these ingredients, be sure to read the label. I recommend choosing ingredients that are made with no added sugar and are naturally gluten-free (if that is important to you) and organic, if possible.
  • The basic formula: The ratio that I follow for making muesli is 3 cups of Quick Cooking Rolled Oats, 5 cups of grain (or non-grain) cereals, 3 cups of dried fruit, and 1 cup of superfoods. You can find further information on substitutions within the blog post.
  • Serving amount and suggestion: This recipe yields 16 cups of mixed muesli (approx. 16 servings), though you can halve or multiply the recipe as necessary. 
  • Quick Cooking Oats vs. Old-Fashioned Rolled Oats: I use quick-cooking oats in my muesli because they require no cooking and are softened as soon as they are mixed in with the liquid. However, if you prefer using rolled oats, I recommend roasting them in a preheated 350-degree oven for 10-12 minutes, along with the seeds and nuts you are using. 
  • Calorie Information: Please know that the nutritional values below are approximate and may change depending on the brand you use.
  • Storage: Store it in an airtight container or jar at room temperature for up to a month. It may seem like the muesli ingredients should last longer according to their expiration dates. However, their longevity decreases when repeatedly exposed to air, such as when you open their storage container to get a helping of muesli. 
  • Longer storage: If you want it to last longer, you can store it in separate airtight containers (or jars) in smaller portions for up to 3 months. 
  • Serving suggestions:
    • Serve it with any of your favorite dairy or non-dairy milk (like you would serve store-bought cereal). 
    • Make it a warm bowl of oatmeal by cooking it with milk. My ratio is ½ cup muesli to 1 cup liquid (plant-based or regular milk or water).
    • Mix it with milk or yogurt (1 to 1 ratio) to make it overnight muesli.

Nutrition

Calories: 406kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 442mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 40IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 90mg | Iron: 5mg

The post How To Make Muesli appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/feed/ 4
Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/#respond Wed, 07 Dec 2022 16:43:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62683 I always keep a tub of Greek yogurt stocked in my fridge, but not only for breakfast! Greek yogurt makes the perfect thick, creamy, and healthy base for countless delicious dips and dressings. No wonder why my Yogurt Salad Dressing is one of the most popular recipes on the blog! If you like healthy dip recipes with Greek yogurt, you’ll love my Greek Yogurt Fruit Dip, Blue Cheese Dressing Without...

The post Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

I always keep a tub of Greek yogurt stocked in my fridge, but not only for breakfast! Greek yogurt makes the perfect thick, creamy, and healthy base for countless delicious dips and dressings. No wonder why my Yogurt Salad Dressing is one of the most popular recipes on the blog!

If you like healthy dip recipes with Greek yogurt, you’ll love my Greek Yogurt Fruit Dip, Blue Cheese Dressing Without Sour Cream, Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Turkish Aubergine Dip

A dip with a greek yogurt base served with veggies from the top view.

Ingredients

You don’t need a lot of fancy ingredients to make this homemade Greek yogurt ranch dip recipe. In fact, you likely already have the ingredients stocked in your fridge and spice cabinet. We’re using a combination of garlic and onion powder to achieve that classic ranch flavor, and adding a hint of lemon juice ramps up the tang. 

Ingredients for homemade greek yogurt ranch in bowls from the top view.

To make this Greek yogurt dip, you’ll need plain Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt, lemon juice, and freshly chopped chives (or chopped green onion). 

Ingredient Substitutions

If you don’t have all the ingredients, don’t run to the store just yet. This yogurt veggie dip is very forgiving when it comes to substitutions, so feel free to swap similar ingredients to make it your own. Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Yogurt: I prefer to use low-fat or non-fat Greek yogurt to make a guilt-free and low calorie dip for veggies. You can also make a plain yogurt dip by swapping the Greek yogurt for low-fat or non-fat plain yogurt, but keep in mind that it will have a thinner (but just as tasty) consistency. I sometimes use plain yogurt in my Yogurt Dill Sauce for a lower-calorie version, which turns out great. 
  • Ranch seasoning: Our homemade ranch seasoning with Greek yogurt combines garlic powder, onion powder, and salt. You can stick to this recipe to keep it super basic or throw in some dried herbs (or fresh herbs) to amp up the flavor. I recommend adding ¼ teaspoon each of dried chives, dried dill, and dried parsley per cup of ranch Greek yogurt dip. 
  • 2-ingredient option: While the homemade ranch seasoning is a healthy, preservative-free, and low-sodium alternative to traditional ranch seasoning, you can still use a premade seasoning mix, such as a Hidden Valley ranch packet, if you’re in a pinch. To make a Hidden Valley ranch dip with Greek yogurt, I recommend using 2 teaspoons of seasoning per cup of yogurt. 
  • Chives: Chives add a mild, onion-like flavor that complements this healthy ranch dip, but they can be hard to find at the grocery store. If you can’t find fresh chives, you can use freshly chopped green onions or fresh dill instead.
  • Add a drizzle of olive oil: For a special presentation, add a drizzle of olive oil to top off your healthy veggie dip. 

How to Make Ranch Dip with Greek Yogurt

You’ll never need to buy ranch dressing from the store once you learn how quick and easy it is to whip it up at home. Plus, this low fat veggie dip is healthy, inexpensive, and (in my opinion) tastier than any store-bought dip. To make this Greek yogurt dip, simply: 

A person making ranch yogurt dip in a bowl from the top view.
  1. Add ingredients to a bowl: In a small bowl, add Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and lemon juice. 
  2. Combine and serve: Use a whisk to mix the ingredients until smooth and fully combined. Garnish your easy Greek yogurt dip with freshly chopped chives or green onions, and serve. 

How to Serve

You can serve this homemade ranch dip with Greek yogurt anywhere you’d normally serve ranch dip. It’s the perfect accompaniment to a colorful veggie tray for a healthy snack, but it’s just as delicious when paired with fun, handheld party foods. Feel free to get creative, but here are some serving suggestions: 

  • Serve it with your favorite veggies: Ranch dip and fresh veggies? A match made in heaven! Whip up a large bowl of this vegetable dip as a healthy dip for carrots, cucumbers, celery sticks, and peppers. This recipe also makes the perfect Greek yogurt chip dip for all your favorite potato chips.
  • Make it a part of your cheese board: Serve it as a part of your meat and cheese board, along with pita bread or crackers.
  • Pair it with party foods: From chicken wings to burgers, this low-calorie ranch dip is the ideal accompaniment to all your favorite Game Day Foods. If you’re looking for recipe ideas, these Slow Roasted Chicken Wings are always a hit at parties, and this Spinach Cheese Quesadilla is a true crowd-pleaser. You also can’t go wrong with serving it as a dipping sauce for fries (especially if you have kids). 
A person dipping a cucumber into a veggie dip from the side view.

How to Store?

If you have leftover ranch yogurt dip or wish to make it ahead of time, you can easily store it in an airtight glass or plastic container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. 

Just make sure to give it a stir before serving, as the ingredients tend to separate as they sit. If your yogurt dip for vegetables appears too watery after stirring, you can add a tablespoon or two of Greek yogurt to return it to a creamy consistency.

FAQs

What is the difference between yogurt and Greek yogurt?

The main difference between regular yogurt and Greek yogurt is its consistency. Greek yogurt is strained to remove the liquid remains of milk (also known as whey), which gives it a thick consistency. Regular yogurt contains whey and has a thinner consistency.

Can I substitute yogurt for sour cream in ranch dressing?

Yes, you can. Yogurt is a great substitute for sour cream in Greek yogurt-based dips because it provides a similar creaminess but is lower in calories and total fat. You can make a delicious, homemade Greek ranch dip by combining Greek yogurt with a half teaspoon of onion powder, a tablespoon of garlic powder, and a little sea salt and lemon juice.

How can I turn this Greek yogurt dip into a salad dressing?

To turn it into a homemade Greek yogurt ranch dressing, you can add 2 tablespoons of olive oil and 2 tablespoons of lemon juice. If need be, you can thin it out (to make it pourable) by whisking in a few tablespoons of water. Be sure to taste it for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Other Greek Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

Greek yogurt is a staple ingredient in many of my recipes because it’s healthy, delicious, and versatile. From sweet to savory recipes, Greek yogurt does it all! If you’re a yogurt fanatic like me, or if you’re trying to finish off that tub of yogurt in your fridge, you need to try these easy recipes:

If you try this Veggie Dip with Greek Yogurt recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A dip with yogurt and spices in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip Recipe

This Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip is made with a few simple, healthy ingredients for a "skinny" version of the classic, store-bought ranch dressing. Serve this creamy, zesty dip with veggies for a healthy snack, or bring it to your next Game Day party as a dip for chips, wings, or any of your favorite party foods.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 205kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Plain Greek Yogurt*
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon chives or chopped green onion

Instructions

  • Add ingredients to a bowl: Place Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt and lemon juice in a bowl.
  • Combine: Whisk until fully combined. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Serve: Transfer into a bowl and garnish with chives (or scallions). Serve.

Notes

  • Yogurt: This healthy Greek yogurt ranch recipe would work with any type of plain Greek yogurt, including full-fat, low-fat, or non-fat varieties. You can also use plain yogurt, but be aware that it will have a thinner consistency. 
  • Storage: You can store leftovers of this yogurt dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Be sure to stir it before serving. If it is too thin, you can stir in a tablespoon of Greek yogurt to thicken it.
  • Make it a salad dressing: You can turn this dip into a yogurt ranch salad dressing by adding 2 tablespoons of olive oil and 2 (additional) tablespoons of lemon juice.  If need be, you can thin it out (to make it pourable) by whisking in a few tablespoons of water. Be sure to taste it for seasoning and adjust as necessary.

Nutrition

Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 1261mg | Potassium: 124mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 142IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 277mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/feed/ 0
Kale Brussel Sprout Salad https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/#comments Tue, 20 Sep 2022 22:23:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15238 Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw. You can serve restaurant-quality eats for any weeknight dinner, holiday meal, or quick lunch with this crowd-pleasing dish. Inspired by the classic brussel sprout and kale salad recipe featured by popular sites like Bon Appetit, Whole Foods, NY Times, and Epicurious, my recipe will delight your tastebuds whether you’re a...

The post Kale Brussel Sprout Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.

You can serve restaurant-quality eats for any weeknight dinner, holiday meal, or quick lunch with this crowd-pleasing dish. Inspired by the classic brussel sprout and kale salad recipe featured by popular sites like Bon Appetit, Whole Foods, NY Times, and Epicurious, my recipe will delight your tastebuds whether you’re a beginner or an expert chef.

A kale Brussel sprout salad in a bowl with spoons from the top view.

Ingredients

This kale Brussel sprouts salad comes together in three sets of basic ingredients:

ingredients for a kale salad with Brussels sprouts from the top view.
  • For the salad ingredients, you’ll need one large bunch of Tuscan kale, shaved Brussels sprouts, grated Parmesan cheese, and (if desired) dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds. 
  • To make the dressing, gather olive oil, fresh lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, minced shallot, salt, and black pepper. 
  • For the nuts, I suggest using sliced almonds, chopped walnuts, or chopped pecans.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

Take this shaved brussel sprout and kale salad to the next level with countless tasty additions. Add a pop of flavor with tangy fruit, creamy cheese, and savory meats. The options are endless!

  • Kale: Because of its mild flavor and popularity in grocery stores, lacinato kale is my go-to for this easy recipe. If you’d like to try other Types of Kale, curly kale has a sharp, peppery flavor that will work great in your kale Brussel salad.
  • Nuts: Rich in protein and packed with crunch, nuts are a must in this Brussels sprouts’ n’ kale salad. Any nut would work in this versatile recipe—even candied nuts like candied pecans! You could also swap out the nuts for seeds, like pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds, to accommodate nut allergies.
  • Vinegar: Balsamic vinegar or white wine vinegar work as substitutes if you don’t want to use apple cider vinegar. You can also make this recipe closer to the Cracker Barrel brussel sprout and kale salad recipe by serving it with my Dijon Maple Vinaigrette.
  • Shallot: Use red onions instead of shallots if you can’t get your hands on them.
  • Cheese: If you’re tired of using Parmesan in your salad recipes, there are dozens of other cheeses to try. Pecorino Romano will give your Brussels sprouts salad a sharp, salty edge, while earthy goat cheese, crumbly blue cheese, and tangy feta cheese would also work.
  • Optional fruit: Apple, raisins, and craisins make the perfect addition to this simple kale and Brussels sprouts salad. With such vibrant color in your salad bowl, you’ll have the ultimate dish to serve alongside your holiday dinner.
  • For meat lovers: Turn your veggie-packed side into a healthy meal by adding a nutritious protein. Top your salad with Turkey Bacon for a kick of crispy bacon flavor, or add Baked Chicken Breasts for a succulent addition.

How to Make this Recipe?

Kale brussel sprout cranberry salad is among my favorite easy salad recipes to whip up on busy weeknights and special occasions alike. You can even hone your veggie prep by checking out my foolproof guide on How to Cut Kale.

A person showing how to make a kale salad with dressing from the top view.
  1. Prepare the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water, and dry them in a salad spinner. Then, use a sharp knife to remove the kale stems and thinly chop the remaining leaves. Once chopped, place the kale in a large bowl.
  2. Shave the Brussels sprouts: Rinse the Brussel sprouts under cold water using a colander, dry them, and remove their outermost leaves. Then, place them in a food processor fitted with the shredding blade. Switch on the machine and feed the Brussels sprouts into the tube. Once shaved, transfer the Brussels sprouts from the food processor into the salad bowl with the kale. 
  3. Mix the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, salt, and black pepper in a small bowl.
  4. Drizzle the vegetables: Gently pour the dressing over the kale and Brussel sprouts. Toss the mixture such that each leaf has an even coating of the dressing. This even layer will help soften the kale, but if you want, you can also massage kale and sprouts gently to ensure they are fully mixed with the dressing. Set the vegetables aside and let them rest.
A person showing how to assemble a kale salad with toasted almonds from the top view.
  1. Toast the almonds: Place the almonds in a small skillet over medium heat. Toast the nuts for 4-5 minutes, frequently stirring, until they turn fragrant and lightly brown. 
  2. Add the toppings: Top the shaved brussel sprout salad with Parmesan cheese, toasted almonds, and cranberries if using. Toss the mixture until evenly combined, then serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This Lemony brussel sprout salad is as easy to make ahead and store as it is to prepare (hello, easy kale storage!). Here’s how I do it:

  • Make ahead: To make this kale Brussels sprouts salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Begin by washing, chopping, and shaving the kale and Brussel sprouts, and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Then, mix the dressing and store it in a separate airtight container, such as a mason jar, in the refrigerator. Toast the almonds and store them at room temperature. Lastly, shred the Parmesan cheese and store it in the fridge. Combine the ingredients just before serving.
  • Store: To store your salad with Brussel sprouts, place it in an airtight container in the fridge. If you have not yet added the dressing, the veggies will stay fresh for 3-4 days. However, if you have already added the dressing, your salad mixture will last up to two days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

What to Serve with this Salad

With so many tantalizing flavors, this Brussel sprout and kale recipe makes the ultimate side dish for dozens of tasty mains. Here are just a few delicious recipes to try with your new favorite salad:

  • Meat Dishes: My favorite way to serve this kale Brussels sprouts salad is with a savory, meaty main. Ground Turkey Meatloaf is a flavorful classic even picky eaters love, while Baked Chicken Parmesan and Chicken Fricassee will perfectly complement your light salad with rich and succulent flavor.
  • Vegetarian Dinners: Fill your plate with nutritious and eco-conscious foods by pairing your brussel sprout salad with tasty vegetarian recipes. Quinoa Chili and Mexican Quinoa will balance your kale salad with hearty spice, and Stuffed Acorn Squash is a festive, gluten-free option everyone can enjoy.
A salad with kale and Brussel sprouts in a bowl from the side view.

FAQs

Can brussel sprouts be eaten raw in a salad?

Absolutely! Just be sure to shred your raw brussel sprouts before adding them to your recipe.

Do you rinse off brussel sprouts before cooking?

Yes, I recommend rinsing your brussels sprouts under cold water before cooking with them. I also recommend removing each sprout’s dark, outermost leaves to ensure maximum freshness.

Similar Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Kale Brussels Sprout Salad recipe or any other salad recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of brussels sprouts and kale salad recipe from the top view
Print

Kale Brussels Sprout Salad Recipe

This nutrient-dense Kale Brussel Sprout Salad is packed with hearty greens, toasted almonds, cheese, and sweet cranberries, all tossed in a tangy homemade Dijon dressing. Enjoy it for a light meal or serve it as a fall-inspired side dish.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 438kcal

Ingredients

For The Salad:

  • 1 large bunches of Tuscan Kale or Curly Kale ~1 lb
  • 1 pound Brussels sprouts finely chopped – I used my food processor
  • 1 cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • ½ cup dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds optional

For The Dressing:

  • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ small shallot minced (about 2 tablespoons) or red onion
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Nuts:

  • 1 cup sliced or whole almonds or chopped walnuts or pecans

Instructions

  • Prep the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water. Dry in a salad spinner. Remove stems and chop thinly. Place it in a large salad bowl.
  • Shave Brussel sprouts*: Place Brussel sprouts in a food processor fitted with the shredding blade. Turn the machine on and feed brussels sprouts into the tube and let the machine do all the work for you. Transfer the now-shaved Brussels sprouts into the bowl with kale.
  • Make the dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, and salt and pepper in a small bowl.
  • Drizzle the vegetables with the dressing and give it a toss to make sure all the leaves are evenly coated with the dressing. Set aside and let it rest.
  • Place almonds in a small empty skillet over medium heat. Toast for 4-5 minutes, keeping a very close eye on and stirring frequently, until fragrant and lightly browned. Chop them up into large bite-size pieces.
  • To assemble, sprinkle the brussel sprout and kale salad with toasted almonds, parmesan cheese, and cranberries (or pomegranate arils), if using. Toss to combine and serve.

Video

Notes

  • When it comes to shredding brussels sprouts, you have two other options:
    • Use a sharp pairing knife and slice one by one as thinly as you can. This takes around 10-15 minutes for a pound of raw brussels sprouts.
    • Use a mandolin. This method produces evenly sliced Brussels spouts and takes about 8-10 minutes to shred a pound of brussels sprouts. If you need advice on a good mandoline, I just purchased this one (affiliate link), and I love it.
  • To make ahead: To make this salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Assemble it right before serving.
  • To Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for up to 2 days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

Nutrition

Calories: 438kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 535mg | Potassium: 537mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 901IU | Vitamin C: 70mg | Calcium: 253mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Kale Brussel Sprout Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/feed/ 26
Kale Waldorf Salad https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/#comments Thu, 15 Sep 2022 14:29:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6054 This kale Waldorf salad recipe is a balanced, texturally appealing, delicious recipe that can be taken one step further with baked turkey bacon or even some chicken breasts. And once you master massaged kale, it will become your favorite salad you’ll want to make over and over again. Why Should You Try This Recipe? This kale Waldorf salad was inspired by Whole Foods and my chicken Waldorf salad recipe. I...

The post Kale Waldorf Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This kale Waldorf salad recipe is a balanced, texturally appealing, delicious recipe that can be taken one step further with baked turkey bacon or even some chicken breasts. And once you master massaged kale, it will become your favorite salad you’ll want to make over and over again.

A kale Waldorf salad in a bowl with a wooden spoon from the top view.

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

This kale Waldorf salad was inspired by Whole Foods and my chicken Waldorf salad recipe. I know you will love it because:

  • Healthy and nutritious: Packed full of dark leafy greens, fruit, nuts, and healthy fats, it’s a hearty salad recipe to keep you full and satisfied.
  • Ready in less than 20 minutes: Most of the work is in the preparation of ingredients. Once that’s out of the way, all you have to do is massage, toss, and enjoy.
  • Super customizable: With plenty of options to swap out one ingredient for another, you can truly make this kale salad your own.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this Waldorf kale salad come in three parts – massaged kale, dressing and salad.

Ingredients for a kale salad in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: For the massaged kale, gather together kale, olive oil, and kosher salt.
  • Salad Dressing: For the salad dressing ingredients, you will need mayonnaise, plain yogurt, Dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, kosher salt, and black pepper.
  • Salad ingredients: Gather together an apple, red seedless grapes, celery, walnuts, and raisins.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Kale: While there are many types of kale, I love easy-to-find curly kale or Tuscan kale. Both are easy to cut and store ahead of time to save you a step in the kitchen. If you want to use baby kale, there is no need to massage it with the oil beforehand.
  • Mayonnaise: Use an avocado oil mayo or vegan mayo.
  • Yogurt: Feel free to use regular yogurt or Greek yogurt for extra protein. Just make sure it is plain and full-fat for the richest flavor.
  • Vinegar: Apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar both work. Lemon juice is also a great sub.
  • Apple: Any color apple you enjoy works beautifully, like Granny Smith, Gala or Pink Lady.
  • Grapes: Red, green or black seedless grapes would all be delicious.
  • Nuts: Swap out the walnuts for almonds or pecans, or use sunflower seeds or pumpkin seeds for a nut-free recipe.
  • Dried Fruit: Dried fruit like raisins, craisins, or even dried cherries add that extra pop of sweetness. A few tablespoons of raisins go a long way.

How to Make

This kale version takes the same approach as a classic Waldorf salad with a typical mayonnaise base. And it’s ready in a few easy steps. Here’s how to do it:

A person massaging kale and making a creamy dressing from the top view.
  1. Massage kale: Place prepped kale in a large bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and kosher salt. Using your fingertips, gently rub kale leaves for 2-3 minutes, turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened and turn a deeper shade of green.
  2. Make salad dressing: In a small bowl or jar, mix together mayonnaise, plain yogurt, vinegar, salt, and pepper until it reaches a creamy consistency.
A collage of images showing how to make a kale salad from the top view.
  1. Assemble salad: Into the bowl with the massaged kale, add apple cubes, grapes, celery stalks, walnuts, and raisins. Drizzle with the salad dressing and toss. Serve immediately in your favorite serving dish.

Serving Suggestions

Massaged kale Waldorf salad is best served right away for the ultimate crunch and texture notes. I love to serve it as:

How to Store

This kale salad with apples and walnuts will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. After the 3-day mark, the fruit and vegetables will become mushy.

A kale salad with nuts and fruit in a bowl with spoons from the side view.

Expert Tips

  • Prep ingredients ahead of time. The grapes, celery and walnuts can all be prepped ahead of time. Store the grapes and celery in the fridge and the walnuts on the kitchen counter.
  • Massage kale with fingertips. This breaks down kale’s tough fibers and infuses the leaves with olive oil.
  • Start with half the dressing, toss, then determine if you would like more dressing. The salad dressing will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Change Up The Dressing: While I am a big fan of the classic mayo-yogurt-based dressing of Waldorf Salad, I sometimes change the dressing for a different flavor profile. Other dressings like my Creamy Avocado Dressing and Green Cashew Sauce would also complement this superfood-packed salad recipe.
  • Would you rather make this with homemade mayonnaise? If so, check out this helpful How To Make Mayo tutorial post from The Endless Meal.

FAQs

What is a Waldorf salad ingredient?

Traditional waldorf salad is made with apples, grapes, celery and walnuts, then tossed with a mayo-based dressing.

What is the meaning of Waldorf salad?

Waldorf salad started off as a simple apple-celery-mayo combination that debuted at the Waldorf Astoria Hotel in NYC, from where it got its name.

Should you blanch kale for a salad?

No, it is not necessary to blanch kale for salad. But massaging kale with your hands takes it to another level.

How long will massaged kale salad keep?

Massaged kale salad will keep for up to 3 days in a sealed container in the refrigerator.

Can you eat kale raw in a salad?

Yes, raw kale can be eaten in salad, but it is much more enjoyable to eat when first massaged with your hands.

Other Salad Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this Kale Waldorf Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.


a bowl of kale apple salad from the top view.
Print

Kale Waldorf Salad Recipe

This quick and easy Kale Waldorf Salad is wholesome, colorful, crunchy, and the perfect balance of sweet and savory with the most delicious tangy dressing. Throw it together for a light lunch or top with your favorite protein source for a healthy dinner.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 453kcal

Ingredients

For Massaging Kale:

  • 1 bunch lacinato kale washed, rinsed, and cut or curly kale
  • 2 teaspoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Salad Dressing:

  • cup mayonnaise or vegan mayo
  • ½ cup plain yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 1 apple cut into small cubes (I kept the skin on)
  • 1 cup seedless red grapes halved
  • 1/2 cup celery stalks, cut into small pieces 2 medium-size
  • 1 cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • ½ cup dried raisins or cranberries

Instructions

  • Place rinsed and cut kale in a large bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and kosher salt. Using clean hands, gently rub kale leaves for 2-3 minutes, turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened.
  • Make the salad dressing by mixing together mayonnaise, plain yogurt, vinegar, salt and pepper in a small bowl or jar.
  • To assemble the salad: Add apple cubes, grapes, celery stalks, walnuts, and raisins into the bowl with massaged kale. Drizzle it with the salad dressing.
  • Give it a toss to make sure everything is combined. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Leftovers can be kept for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. After the 3-day mark, the fruit and vegetables will become mushy.

Nutrition

Calories: 453kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 736mg | Potassium: 394mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 1567IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 117mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Kale Waldorf Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/feed/ 10
Peach Mango Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/peach-mango-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/peach-mango-smoothie/#comments Tue, 30 Aug 2022 17:58:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14529 It is no secret that smoothies are the ideal summer breakfast/snack with a long list of benefits, especially if they are made without any additional sugars, just like this peach mango smoothie recipe.  Over the years, I have shared so many Superfood Smoothie Recipes and have no plans of slowing down. If you are a fan as well, be sure to check out Cantaloupe Smoothie and Mango Turmeric Smoothie, both...

The post Peach Mango Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is no secret that smoothies are the ideal summer breakfast/snack with a long list of benefits, especially if they are made without any additional sugars, just like this peach mango smoothie recipe. 

Over the years, I have shared so many Superfood Smoothie Recipes and have no plans of slowing down. If you are a fan as well, be sure to check out Cantaloupe Smoothie and Mango Turmeric Smoothie, both of which are perfect for warmer months.

A person holding glasses of peach mango drink from the top view.

Ingredients

To make this peach mango drink, you will need fresh mango, peach slices, fresh orange juice, ice cubes, and your favorite yogurt. 

Ingredients for a mango peach smoothie in bowls from the top view.

Substitutions & Possible Add-Ins

  • Frozen Fruit: If fresh peaches and mangos are not in season, you can always make this mango and peach smoothie with frozen peaches and mangos. If you’re going to use frozen fruit, make sure you use less ice. Using ice and frozen fruit results in a really thick smoothie, almost like a peach mango puree. Of course, if you’d rather have a smoothie with a thicker consistency, you can always make a smoothie bowl.
  • Yogurt: Greek yogurt is a key ingredient to give this smoothie the creamy texture and tangy taste that pairs so well with sweet tropical fruits. The good thing is that you can use any type of yogurt. I have also made this smoothie using my vanilla yogurt many times and it turned out great. For a low-fat option, use skim milk yogurt; for a vegan smoothie, use vanilla almond milk yogurt or soy milk yogurt. If you want to enhance the peach flavors, you can even add in a coconut milk-based peach yogurt. And if peach and mango smoothie with yogurt is not your thing, add a handful of unsalted cashews to achieve a similar consistency.
  • Add a banana instead of sugar: While I think that ripe peaches and mangos make this smoothie sweet enough, if you want to add a bit more sweetness, I recommend adding a ripe banana. A refreshing peach mango banana smoothie is ideal, especially if you are serving it to kids as a poolside snack.
  • Add in some protein and more superfoods: As it is with any smoothie recipe, you can add in a tablespoon of hemp seeds, chia seeds, ground flaxseed, or even your favorite protein powder for an added nutritional boost. 
  • Play around with adding other fruit: Add a touch of tropical flavor to your summer fruit smoothies by adding pineapple, strawberries or any of your other favorite fruits in season.
  • Make it a juice instead: Want to make it a peach mango juice recipe? While it is healthier to eat fruit as a whole (or in pureed form like it is in this recipe), you can strain it through a colander to turn it into a juice instead.
  • Add greens: If you’re a fan of green smoothies, add a handful of spinach or kale to make sure you’re getting your daily vegetable intake. 
  • More flavor: Adding a dash of vanilla extract or maple syrup to your mango peach yogurt smoothie is a quick and easy way to elevate the overall flavor of the drink.

How to Make This Recipe

Making this tropical mango peach smoothie cannot be easier. Here are the steps:

A blender with ingredients for a smoothie with mango and peach from the top view.
  1. Blend ingredients: Combine mango chunks, peaches, orange juice, yogurt, and ice cubes into a blender. Pulse your ingredients a few times before blending them at high speed until it has a smooth consistency. 
  2. Serve: Pour your smoothie into your favorite glass. I like to garnish it with hemp seeds on top before serving, but it’s optional. 

How to Store

Store your drink in a cup with a lid (like a mason jar) for easy storage. It should be good for up to two days. Note that the longer it stays in the fridge, the more liquid it will become. Make sure you shake it up before serving it.

Peach Mango Milkshake in a glass from the front view.

FAQs

What fruits blend well with peaches?

Peaches blend well with oranges, strawberries, apricots, and pineapples.

How many calories are in a peach mango smoothie?

This smoothie recipe has 278 calories per serving. Please review the recipe card below for more nutritional information.

What is a good fruit combination with mango?

You can add various kinds of fresh fruit to your mango puree smoothie recipe to make it even more flavorful. Different fruits such as strawberries and raspberries are great for summer months, whereas a ripe banana is a great option for all-year-round.

Other Smoothie Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you liked this mango peach smoothie recipe, here are a few other delicious reader-favorite smoothie recipes you might enjoy:

If you try this Peach-Mango Smoothie recipe or any of our other smoothie recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

peach mango smoothie garnished with hemp seeds in a glass.
Print

Peach Mango Smoothie Recipe

This 5-ingredient Peach Mango Smoothie is the perfect easy breakfast or afternoon snack for a refreshing boost of nutrients! Make this tropical smoothie in only 5 minutes with fresh or frozen fruit.
Course Smoothie
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 278kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup mango cut into large chunks from 1 large ripe mango
  • 1 cup peach cut into large chunks for 2 small or 1 large ripe peach
  • ¾ cup orange juice or pineapple juice
  • ¼ cup Greek yogurt or any other one of your favorite yogurt
  • 1 cup ice

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients in a blender and blend until smooth. Serve right away.

Notes

  • Fruit: If fresh fruit is not available, you can use frozen mango and frozen peach instead. If you use frozen fruit, I recommend adding half the amount of ice.
  • Yogurt: You can use any type of yogurt you like here, homemade vanilla yogurt or even your favorite brand of vegan yogurt would also work.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 278kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 53mg | Potassium: 908mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 53g | Vitamin A: 2661IU | Vitamin C: 159mg | Calcium: 107mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Peach Mango Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peach-mango-smoothie/feed/ 6
Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/ https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/#comments Fri, 12 Aug 2022 01:04:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57692 Serve it with fresh berries and crunchy granola for a healthy breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up, or add it to your favorite recipes that call for vanilla yogurt. Better yet, make our Overnight Oats Recipe with Yogurt for a quick breakfast for busy mornings. Yogurt is such a perfect complement to so many foods, so trust us when we say the yogurt recipes don’t stop here. If you’re like us...

The post Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Serve it with fresh berries and crunchy granola for a healthy breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up, or add it to your favorite recipes that call for vanilla yogurt. Better yet, make our Overnight Oats Recipe with Yogurt for a quick breakfast for busy mornings.

Yogurt is such a perfect complement to so many foods, so trust us when we say the yogurt recipes don’t stop here. If you’re like us and love the classic combo of yogurt and fruit, you’ll love this Frozen Yogurt Bark & my go-to Yogurt Dip for Fruit

vanilla yogurt in a bowl with strawberries on the side from the top view

Recipe Ingredients

This ultra quick and easy homemade vanilla yogurt recipe requires only 3 staple ingredients that you probably already have on hand or can quickly grab from the grocery store. You’ll need plain whole milk Greek yogurt, vanilla extract, and honey. 

ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view

Substitutions

The beauty of this easy recipe is that it’s totally customizable based on your preferences. Once you make vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt, that’s just a jumping-off point! Feel free to substitute or make additions to suit your sweet tooth or dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions:

  • Yogurt: While I personally love that creamy greek yogurt taste and texture, you can use whatever type of yogurt you prefer for this recipe! Regular yogurt, whole milk yogurt, or skim milk yogurt would all beautifully pair with vanilla and honey. You can even use plant-based yogurt if you’re vegan!
  • Other sweeteners: To make sweetened Greek yogurt, feel free to play around with added sugar based on your preference. Here at FPL headquarters, we prefer flavoring plain yogurt with natural sweeteners, like maple syrup and raw honey, but you can use confectioners’ sugar (aka powdered sugar) in its place for extra sweetness. To make a keto version of this recipe, sub in low-carb sweeteners, like monk fruit sugar or erythritol. We also recommend that you be careful when adding artificial sweeteners, like aspartame, sucralose, xylitol, etc., to unsweetened yogurt, as it can highly impact the flavor. 
  • Vanilla: Adding a dash of pure vanilla extract to plain yogurt is usually what I prefer, but you’re also free to use vanilla bean paste for a 1:1 substitute (meaning you can substitute one for equal amounts of the other). You can also use imitation vanilla extract, which tends to be more affordable. Or, if you’d rather, you can use half of a vanilla bean (vanilla beans have a potent flavor, so half of a bean is all you need). 
  • Honey syrup: As another sweetener option for this recipe, you can use my Honey Syrup recipe (a combination of honey and water) for honey vanilla greek yogurt. If you choose to use honey syrup, use double the amount of honey that the recipe calls for.   
  • Ground cinnamon: This is an optional addition, but adding a sprinkle of ground cinnamon to your plain vanilla yogurt really complements the flavors. 

How to Turn Plain Yogurt into Vanilla Yogurt

You can whip up this delicious recipe in no time! Simply:

person showing how to make vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt in a photo collage
  1. Combine the ingredients: Add the yogurt, honey, and vanilla extract to a bowl. Whisk until smooth and well combined. 
  2. Taste and adjust: Give it a taste and add more vanilla extract or honey, if desired. 

How to Store

If you have leftovers of this honey and Greek yogurt recipe, you can store them in the fridge or freezer to enjoy later. Here are some tips:

  • Storage: You can store your homemade honey vanilla yogurt in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze your vanilla-flavored yogurt for up to 2 months to preserve the best taste and texture. 
  • Thaw: To serve the vanilla honey greek yogurt from frozen, first thaw your container of yogurt in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). The yogurt may appear separated once thawed, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products. To revive the thawed yogurt, give it a stir to incorporate the ingredients or add in a small amount of yogurt if it’s watery. If it’s still not quite smooth, try blending it in a food processor before serving. Make sure not to refreeze once thawed! 

How to Use Vanilla Yogurt in Recipes?

Not only can you enjoy this flavorful vanilla greek yogurt recipe by itself as a breakfast or snack, but you can also use it in any recipe that calls for vanilla yogurt! Here are some vanilla yogurt recipe ideas:

  • Make yogurt parfaits: Name a better combo than creamy vanilla yogurt, fresh fruit, and crunchy granola. For one of my favorite vanilla yogurt recipes, try making my Yogurt Parfait recipe!
  • Try it in a smoothie: Vanilla yogurt is the perfect addition to any smoothie because it gives it that coveted thick, creamy texture and adds in just the right amount of sweetness. Try adding it to my Strawberry Banana Yogurt Smoothie or Cantaloupe Shake recipe for an ultra-tasty and refreshing smoothie. 
  • Pair it with fruit: Whether you’re making a fruit salad for a brunch crowd, bringing a fruit platter to your next gathering, or setting out a big fruit bowl for dessert, this easy recipe pairs perfectly with all your favorite seasonal fruit. 
  • Top it off with granola: Something about the crunchy texture and salty-sweet flavor of granola goes so well with yogurt. Simply top a bowl of yogurt with my Chunky Granola and call it breakfast!
  • Turn it into ice cream: Want to know how to make plain yogurt taste better? For a healthier yet delicious version of our favorite summer treat, try using this recipe to make Vanilla Frozen Yogurt!
plain vanilla yogurt with honey in a bowl with strawberries on the side from the side view

FAQs

Can you add vanilla extract to yogurt?

Yes, you can! Adding a dash of vanilla extract in plain yogurt really complements the tanginess of the yogurt and gives it a subtly sweet taste and flavor. Make it even better by adding a tablespoon of honey!

How much vanilla to add to plain yogurt?

When making plain yogurt vanilla-flavored, add half a teaspoon of vanilla extract for every cup of plain yogurt. Feel free to add more or less, depending on your personal preference.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

If you have an abundance of yogurt in your fridge that you’re dying to use, or if you’re just a yogurt fanatic like me, here are some other yogurt recipes you’ll love! 

If you try your hand at making this recipe, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

vanilla yogurt recipe in a bowl with strawberries on the side from top view
Print

Vanilla Yogurt Recipe

Learn how to turn plain yogurt into vanilla yogurt with this simple Vanilla Yogurt recipe! This refreshing, subtly sweet yogurt requires only 3 ingredients and takes 2 minutes to prepare. Enjoy it as a yummy breakfast with granola and berries or as a bedtime snack, or use it in any recipe that calls for vanilla yogurt!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 283kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup plain whole milk yogurt regular or Greek yogurt
  • 2 tablespoons hone
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Place yogurt, honey and vanilla extract in a bowl. Whisk until well combined.
  • Give it a taste and add more if necessary.

Notes

  • Storage: Store yogurt in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze yogurt for up to 2 months to preserve the best taste and texture. 
  • Thaw: Thaw frozen yogurt in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). If the yogurt has separated while thawing, stir to reincorporate the ingredients. Add a few more tablespoons of yogurt if it’s too watery, or blend for a few seconds in a food processor. Make sure not to refreeze once thawed.

Nutrition

Calories: 283kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 115mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 243IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 299mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/feed/ 6
Mexican Pickled Onions https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/#comments Tue, 09 Aug 2022 15:02:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7571 This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad to quesadillas to Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even use Mexican onions for tacos, giving you dozens of Mexican party food ideas. Take your Flank Steak Tacos, Brisket Tacos, and Black Bean Quinoa Tacos to the next level with one easy recipe.  Love red onions as a...

The post Mexican Pickled Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad to quesadillas to Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even use Mexican onions for tacos, giving you dozens of Mexican party food ideas. Take your Flank Steak Tacos, Brisket Tacos, and Black Bean Quinoa Tacos to the next level with one easy recipe. 

Love red onions as a condiment? Also, check out our Roasted Red Onions recipe!

Mexican pickled red onions in a jar with a fork from the top view

Ingredients

For this Mexican pickled onion recipe, you’ll need one large red onion, boiling hot water, fresh lime juice, apple cider vinegar, and kosher salt.

ingredients for the recipe

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

When it comes to add-ins, these red pickled onions make Mexican cuisine an adventure. Choose a few of your favorite ingredients from this tasty list for a flavor experience perfectly suited to your taste buds.

optional add-in ingredients for pickled purple onions
  • Add some spice: Turn up the heat at your Mexican potluck by making a batch of quick pickled red onions with jalapenos. Just be sure to slice your jalapeno peppers thinly before adding them to the pickling jar. Or, add a pinch of red pepper flakes to the mix for another spicy solution. 
  • Make it sweeter: Mexican pickled onions are known for their sharp, tangy flavor. Now you can balance this robust condiment with a touch of sweetness by adding just a teaspoon of honey, maple syrup, or granulated sugar. 
  • Add seasoning: Want to make this Mexican pickled red onion recipe even more flavorful? Then, additional seasoning is just what you need! Thinly sliced garlic clove and allspice berries will give your onions a potent edge, while cumin seeds and whole black peppercorns are perfect for a rich and earthy taste. You can even add bay leaves or dried oregano (or Mexican oregano, if you can get your hands on it) for bold herby notes.
  • White onions: Not a fan of red onions? No problem! Though I love red onions for their brilliant color and sweet taste, white or yellow onions will also work in this easy recipe.
  • Vinegar: Though I use apple cider vinegar in my Mexican red onions, red wine vinegar or distilled white vinegar will also work.
  • Lemon juice: If you don’t want to make your Mexican pickled red onions with lime juice, fresh lemon juice works as a tart and tasty substitute.

How to Make Pickled Red Onions for Tacos

Mexican-style pickled red onions are a cinch to make and even better to eat. One small batch of this pickled red onion recipe, and you’ll want it for all your Mexican meals.

person making Spanish pickled onions
  1. Prep the onions: Place the sliced red onion in a colander, set the colander in a bowl, and set aside. Pour two cups of boiling water atop the sliced onions and gently press with a spoon. 
  2. Soak: Be sure to submerge all of the onion slices in the water. Let them soak for 45 seconds and drain.
  3. Add ingredients to the jar: Transfer the onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Then, pour the fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions, and add the salt. Using a fork, make sure to push them down so that they are submerged in the liquid as much as possible.
  4. Add additional ingredients: If you’re using any optional add-ins, put them into the jar.
person shaking a jar of marinated red onions for tacos
  1. Shake the ingredients: Close the lid over the jar and give it a good shake.
  2. Refrigerate the jar: Place the closed jar in the fridge and let it sit for a minimum of two hours.
  3. Serve: Serve the pickled Mexican onions as a condiment or garnish with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes.

How to Store

To store leftover Mexican pickled red onions, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. However, keep in mind that the more things you add in, the higher the potential of spoilage.

How to Use These Lime Pickled Onions

These authentic Mexican pickled red onions (aka Escabeche Onions)  are a godsend when it comes to garnishing any of your meat or vegetable dishes. And guess what? They are not just for Mexican cooking! They can also be served with dishes from Cuban, Dominican, and even Spanish cuisine.

Needless to say, you can use this versatile condiment anywhere you use red onions, from tasty tacos to garden-fresh salads. Below are a few dishes from the archives to get you started:

Your Favorite Tacos & Quesadillas

These red pickled onions are mostly served for street tacos in Mexico, so it is a no-brainer to serve them with your favorite tacos in your home as well. 

For a savory, protein-filled meal, add your onions to Flank Steak Tacos or Brisket Tacos (hello, meat-lovers!). Use it as a topping for your Salmon Avocado Toast. You can also serve vegetarian or pescatarian dishes by adding your pickled purple onion to a Spinach Quesadilla, fish tacos, or Black Bean Quinoa Tacos.

Chilis & Grain Bowls 

Who can resist a bold and hearty bowl of authentic Mexican chili? Not me! You can add authentic Mexican pickled onions to rich and savory recipes, like Quinoa Chili, Chocolate Chili, and my fan-favorite Mexican Quinoa Bowl. Pink onions are also a great condiment in vegan recipes and surely a perfect match for my Vegan Chili and Burrito Bowl.

Salads

This quick recipe makes a delicious addition to dozens of your favorite Mexican dishes, from spicy Mexican Corn Salad to fresh Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even add this simple recipe to dishes beyond Mexican food, like my creamy, crowd-pleasing Potato Salad with Capers.

a jar of Qdoba pickled red onions recipe from the side view

Expert Tips

You don’t have to live south of the border to learn how to make pickled onions Mexican style. These tasty tips will have you preparing these delicious marinated onions any day of the week.

  • Use the freshest onions you can get your hands on: When making this lime pickled red onions recipe, make sure your onions are super fresh. Not only will they taste fresher, but they will also have a brighter color and more intense flavor.
  • Slice your onions thinly: Even thin onion slices make the best pickled onions. For best results, use a sharp chef’s knife, or a mandoline (affiliate link), if you have one.
  • Do not skip the 45-second soaking: I learned this trick from Rick Bayless’ cookbook, Mexican Kitchen (affiliate link). While it might seem like an extra step, soaking raw onions for a short amount of time helps with softening their flavor and pungent taste. 
  • Pickled purple onions lose volume as they sit: Don’t be worried if your onion slices seem to overflow in their jar, especially at the beginning. They lose volume as they marinate in the acid, so feel free to push them down until they fit. If your onions still don’t fit, feel free to split them into two jars instead.
  • Use a glass container with a tight-fitting lid: Glass containers with tight lids—such as a pint-sized jar such as a mason jar (affiliate link) with a wide mouth or a large jar such as this Weck Canning Jar (affiliate link) —are your best options.
  • Use the pickle juice in salad dressings: Don’t throw away the pickle brine, as the leftover tangy juice makes for a great addition to any of your salad dressings.

FAQs

How long do pickled red onions last?

Mexican pickled red onion will last 2 weeks when stored in an airtight container in the fridge.

How to make pickled onions very quickly?

 To make quick pickled onions for tacos, use lime juice—also referred to as “Mexican vinegar”—as your pickling base. When you make pickled onion in lime, the citrus juice will break down your onions in less time than other pickling ingredients.

Other Recipes You Can Make with Red Onions:

Wondering what else you can do with red onions? Here are a few of my favorite recipes to help you use them:

If you try this Mexican Pickled Onions recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

red onions pickled in lime juice in a jar with fork pulling out some
Print

Mexican Pickled Onions Recipe

These easy Mexican Pickled Onions add a punch of tangy flavor and a burst of bold color to all your favorite Mexican recipes. This 4-ingredient recipe is super quick to make and adds the perfect finishing touch to tacos, salads, chilis, and more!
Course Garnish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 96kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large red onion sliced thinly (approximately 1 ½ cup sliced onion)
  • 2 cups boiling hot water
  • ¾ cup fresh lime juice*
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar red wine vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add Ins:

  • 1 garlic clove sliced thinly (⅛ inch thick slices)
  • ½ small jalapeno slice thinly – remove seeds if you like
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin seeds
  • ¼ whole black peppercorns
  • 1 teaspoon honey maple syrup or granulated sugar
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ¼ teaspoon oregano Mexican oregano if you can get your hands on
  • ½ teaspoon all spice berries
  • Pinch of red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Place red onion slices in a colander set in a bowl. Pour 2 cups of boiling water over the onion. Gently press with a spoon to make sure that the onions are fully submerged in water. Let it sit for 45 seconds.
  • Transfer the now-drained onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Pour fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions. Add in the salt.
  • If you are using any of the optional add-ins, go ahead and add them in.
  • Put the lid on and shake until everything is fully combined.
  • Place it in the fridge and let it sit for at least 2 hours.
  • Serve with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes as garnish.

Video

Notes

  • Lime juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice here, but in a pinch, you can also use store-bought lime juice.
  • Storage: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. 
  • They lose volume as they sit in lime juice and vinegar mixture: When you are first placing them in the jar it might feel like you have a lot, but keep in mind that as they sit in the acidic brine juice, they lose some of their volume.
  • Weck Jars or Pint Size Mason Jars are ideal: I use Weck jars for pickling (as you see in the photos), but pint-sized Mason Jars are also ideal. Just make sure that they have a large mouth and a tight-fitting lid.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 2359mg | Potassium: 395mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Mexican Pickled Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/feed/ 14
Yogurt Dill Sauceย  https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/#comments Mon, 25 Jul 2022 14:48:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=56832 Trying to finish off that open tub of yogurt in your fridge? Try my other easy recipes with yogurt, such as my Yogurt Fruit Dip, Yogurt Ranch Dip, and Yogurt Tahini Sauce! Why Make This Recipe This irresistible homemade dill sauce packs a flavorful punch, especially for how simple and easy it is to make. If you need more convincing, here are some other reasons why you have to give...

The post Yogurt Dill Sauceย  appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Trying to finish off that open tub of yogurt in your fridge? Try my other easy recipes with yogurt, such as my Yogurt Fruit Dip, Yogurt Ranch Dip, and Yogurt Tahini Sauce!

A bowl of dill yogurt sauce with a whisk in the bowl from the top view

Why Make This Recipe

This irresistible homemade dill sauce packs a flavorful punch, especially for how simple and easy it is to make. If you need more convincing, here are some other reasons why you have to give this recipe a try:

  • You only need 5 ingredients: Few ingredients means less prep time and cleanup and more time enjoying this easy yogurt dill sauce. The best part? The ingredients in this recipe are probably already in your fridge!
  • Healthy, light, and creamy: Not only is this creamy sauce incredibly delicious, but it’s a great addition to your collection of healthy recipes! Yogurt makes this an especially healthy sauce because of its high protein content and digestive support. 
  • It rivals store-bought brands: We all love the authentic sauces from our favorite Mediterranean restaurants (the cult-favorite Cava yogurt dill dressing is especially popular), but why buy when you can get the same results at home? You’ll also save money and avoid some of the added sugar and preservatives that are present in a lot of commercial sauces. 

Ingredients

This easy dill sauce recipe requires only a handful of flavorful, simple ingredients. You’ll need whole milk (full fat) plain yogurt (I use Greek yogurt), freshly squeezed lemon juice, olive oil, minced garlic, fresh dill, and kosher salt. 

Greek yogurt dill sauce ingredients

Substitutions

  • Yogurt: While I personally love the rich, creamy taste that full fat yogurt provides, it’s higher in total fat when compared to other yogurts. You can swap it for nonfat plain Greek yogurt or regular nonfat yogurt for a lower calorie version of this lemon dill yogurt sauce. Or, for an extra creamy yogurt dill dip, try it with Icelandic yogurt! 
  • Garlic: If you don’t have a fresh clove of garlic on hand, you can use garlic powder instead. Just keep in mind that garlic powder yields a milder flavor than a garlic clove.
  • Dill: Fresh dill really takes this dill yogurt dip to the next level and yields a stronger flavor, so try to buy fresh dill if you can. If not, you can substitute with dried dill for a more mild dill flavor. 
  • Parsley: If you’re not a fan of dill, try adding in some fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley (Italian parsley), instead!
  • Lemon: Fresh lemon juice gives this recipe a tangy, acidic kick. Red wine vinegar provides a similar flavor if you don’t have lemons on hand.

How to Make Greek Dill Sauce

This simple yogurt dill sauce literally comes together in the blink of an eye. Simply:

the ingredients for garlic dill yogurt sauce in a bowl from the top view
  1. Combine the ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together all ingredients until smooth and fully combined. 
person mixing the ingredients
  1. Season to taste: Give it a taste and add more fresh dill or another half teaspoon of salt or black pepper, if necessary. 

How to Serve It

The sky’s the limit when it comes to serving this garlic dill yogurt sauce! Feel free to get creative, but here are some of my favorite serving suggestions:

  • Drizzle over seafood: The bright, tangy flavor of this simple lemon dill sauce pairs beautifully with a variety of seafood dishes. I love to use Greek yogurt dill sauce for salmon, and it’s especially good drizzled over Slow Baked Salmon. You can also make this a lemon yogurt sauce for fish by serving it with my Breaded Fish or my Grilled Shrimp Skewers
  • Pair with chicken or beef: No Mediterranean-inspired meal is complete without this Greek yogurt lemon dill sauce! Try it as a dill sauce for gyros or a dill Greek yogurt dip paired with my Chicken Pita Wraps, Greek Yogurt Marinated Chicken, Chicken Shish Tawook, or Kofte (Turkish meatballs). It’s also a great way to make these Greek Turkey Burgers extra mouthwatering! Try making a Greek yogurt cucumber dill dip, otherwise known as Tzatziki sauce, if you want to go authentic Mediterranean. 
  • Make it a veggie dip: Looking for ways to make healthy foods a little bit more appealing? Serve this recipe as a Greek yogurt veggie dip dill sauce with roasted vegetables, such as my Baked Asparagus, Garlic Butter Green Beans, Air Fried Green Beans, or Baked Eggplant Slices. One of my favorite ways to serve Greek yogurt dill dip is with Falafel!
  • Spoon it over mains and soups: Who says you can’t put sauce on soups? This dill and Greek yogurt sauce is the perfect topping for my Cream of Zucchini Soup or Chilled Cucumber Soup. Or, you can add a creamy, tangy flair to your favorite vegetarian main course, such as this Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw

If you can’t get enough of this Greek dill sauce and find yourself making it in large batches (I know I would), you can always store it to enjoy later! Here are some tips:

  • Storage: You can store this dill and yogurt sauce refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days. The next time you’re ready to serve, give it a quick whisk to combine any ingredients that may have separated. If it’s too watery, add in a few tablespoons of yogurt to thicken it up. Taste for seasoning and add more dill or salt if necessary. 
  • Freeze: Freeze the yogurt dill lemon sauce for up to a month. 
  • Thaw: To serve the sauce from frozen, refrigerate it until thawed (preferably overnight). You’ll likely find that your thawed sauce has separated a bit, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products, so give it a stir before serving. You can also revive your dill dip with yogurt if it’s too watery (add a few more tablespoons of yogurt). If it’s still not quite smooth, try blending it in a food processor before serving. 

Variations

Since this dill sauce with Greek yogurt is so simple, there’s plenty of room to customize it to your liking. Here are some suggestions:

  • Make it vegan: If you’re one of my vegan friends, I got you covered! To make a vegan yogurt dill sauce, simply use vegan yogurt. Plain coconut or almond milk yogurt make a great plant-based substitution.
  • Amp up the flavor and richness: For an extra rich and creamy variation of this Greek dill dip, add in a tablespoon of mayo to turn it into a lemon dill mayonnaise sauce! This version actually tastes more like ranch dressing. If you’re looking for other yogurt-based dressings, try my Yogurt Salad Dressing or my Poppy Seed Greek Yogurt Dressing.

FAQs

How is yogurt dill sauce different than tzatziki sauce?

The difference between a recipe for dill sauce and one for tzatziki sauce comes down to just one vegetable! Cucumber is a star ingredient in creamy Greek tzatziki sauce, but it’s absent in yogurt dill sauce. Traditional tzatziki sauce requires a little more work because you have to slice the cucumber and remove excess water, so yogurt dill sauce is a more simple recipe. 

Can you freeze creamy dill yogurt sauce?

Yes, you can freeze dill yogurt sauce! Just make sure to thaw it in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). The sauce will likely separate while thawing, so give it a stir before serving or add in a few more tablespoons of yogurt.

Is yogurt dill dressing healthy?

Yogurt garlic dill dressing has several health benefits! Just one cup of yogurt provides about 50% of your daily value of calcium, and it’s also high in protein, B vitamins, and probiotics that support gut health. Yogurt also provides healthy fats that are known to benefit heart health.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

If you’re a fan of this Greek yogurt and dill dip, you’ll probably love my other yogurt recipes! 

If you try this Yogurt Dill Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Yogurt dill sauce in a bowl with a whisk in the bowl from the top view
Print

Yogurt Dill Sauce Recipe

A quick & easy Yogurt Dill Sauce that is perfect for all your Greek and Mediterranean dishes. Takes 5 minutes to make, this yogurt sauce makes a great drizzle for fish (especially salmon), falafel, and gyro recipe. It can also be served as a dip with vegetables or meze platters.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 413kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Whole Milk full fat plain yogurt, I use Greek Yogurt
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh dill or more to taste
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • 1/8 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more if you like.

Notes

  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days. The next time you’re ready to serve, give it a quick whisk to combine any ingredients that may have separated. If it’s too watery, add in a few tablespoons of yogurt to thicken it up. Taste for seasoning and add more dill or salt if necessary. 
  • Freeze: Freeze the yogurt dill lemon sauce for up to a month. 
  • Thaw: To serve the sauce from frozen, refrigerate it until thawed (preferably overnight). You’ll likely find that your thawed sauce has separated a bit, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products, so give it a stir before serving. You can also revive your dill dip with yogurt if it’s too watery.

Nutrition

Calories: 413kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 1258mg | Potassium: 450mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 462IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 313mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Yogurt Dill Sauceย  appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/feed/ 2
Greek Yogurt Parfait https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/ https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/#comments Wed, 06 Jul 2022 00:34:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15540 Need more ideas to make your mornings easier? Overnight Oats with Steel Cut Oats, Overnight Muesli with Yogurt, Yogurt Overnight Oats, and Chia Seed Oatmeal are all great options to make the most important meal of the day not only quick and easy but filling and nutritious.  Why Should You Make This Recipe?  Nothing beats fresh fruit, thick creamy yogurt, and crunchy granola. This layered fruit and yogurt parfait recipe...

The post Greek Yogurt Parfait appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Need more ideas to make your mornings easier? Overnight Oats with Steel Cut Oats, Overnight Muesli with Yogurt, Yogurt Overnight Oats, and Chia Seed Oatmeal are all great options to make the most important meal of the day not only quick and easy but filling and nutritious. 

fruit and yogurt parfait garnished with mint from the front view

Why Should You Make This Recipe? 

Nothing beats fresh fruit, thick creamy yogurt, and crunchy granola. This layered fruit and yogurt parfait recipe will rival any Starbucks or Chick fil A yogurt parfait and save you money too. 

Need more convincing? Here are a few other reasons to give it a try:

  • Made with 3 ingredients. Fresh fruit, crunchy granola, and Greek yogurt are all you need for this easy healthy breakfast parfait that you can make in minutes.
  • It stores well so you can make ahead for a grab-and-go breakfast.
  • Easy to customize with whatever you have on hand. If you don’t have fresh fruit, use frozen fruit. Got a bit of a sweet craving? Add honey or maple syrup. The options are endless for this healthy Greek yogurt parfait recipe.

Ingredients 

Since this greek yogurt parfait only has 3 ingredients (not counting the optional sweetener), I recommend using the best ingredients you can find.

ingredients for yogurt parfait recipe from the top view
  • Greek Yogurt: I prefer whole milk plain yogurt for its thicker consistency and no added sugar, but any of your favorite types of yogurt will work as well. Vanilla Greek yogurt (I make mine at home), honey yogurt, and even vegan choices such as coconut or almond milk yogurt would work well in this recipe.
  • Berries/Fruit: I used a combination of fresh strawberries and blueberries, but any of your favorite fruit combinations (including my Breakfast Fruit Salad) would work. No fresh fruit? Use frozen fruit! Frozen berries work perfectly in this recipe.
  • Granola: I might be biased but I think the best granola for yogurt parfait is homemade granola as and it can be made with less sugar (than most store-bought brands). However, in a crunch, you can use storebought. If you are in need of a good granola recipe, feel free to check out my Chunky Granola. Or, if you are after high protein yogurt breakfast, try my Quinoa Crunch for added plant-based protein.

Substitutions and Optional Additions 

The best part about a DIY parfait is making it your own. Here are a few great choices to get you started. 

  • Sweetener: Add a natural sweetener like a drizzle of honey, maple syrup, or agave to your homemade parfait. Or, try incorporating my Honey Syrup, Blueberry Puree, or fresh raspberry sauce to flavor the yogurt. 
  • Protein Powder: Add a scoop of your favorite whey or plant-based protein powder for a high-protein snack. 
  • Superfoods: Incorporate ½ teaspoon of chia seeds or hemp seeds per serving to make it even more nutritious.
  • Nut Butters: Add a tablespoon of almond butter or peanut butter for healthy fats and protein. Though I recommend checking the labels for added sugars.
  • Nuts & Seeds: Want to cut down on carbs? Switch out the granola for a handful of nuts and seeds. However, if you prefer a low-calorie yogurt parfait with no added sugar omit the granola and the nuts.
  • Chocolate Chips: If you can’t deny your sweet tooth and want to splurge, chocolate chips may just satisfy your craving.

How To Make A Parfait With Greek Yogurt

Making this yogurt and fruit parfait cannot be easier. Follow these steps for a quick breakfast that is not only delicious but also visually impressive:

person whisking yogurt with honey in a bowl
  1. Add the sweetener (optional): If using, whisk together your choice of sweetener with your favorite yogurt until it is completely whipped and creamy.
  2. Build the yogurt parfait layers: Spoon half of the yogurt at the bottom of a bowl, tall glasses, or mason jars. Layer with half of the fruit and half of the granola. Carefully spoon the remaining yogurt mixture into the glass and add the rest of the fruit and granola to the top. 
photos showing how to layer parfait with berries and granola
  1. Garnish: If you prefer, finish it with a drizzle of honey (or maple syrup), more fresh fruit, and granola on top. Serve immediately or store in the refrigerator for later.

How To Make Ahead And Store 

Got some leftovers or want to make it ahead? No problem! Follow the tips below to enjoy these healthy yogurt parfaits for days:

Make-Ahead Instructions:

Making this layered parfait recipe as a part of your weekly meal plan is a breeze, but there are a few things to keep in mind:

  1. Serve granola on the side: I recommend leaving the granola out when layering the parfait because as it sits it will lose its crunchy texture and become soggy. Let’s face it, no one likes soggy granola. Instead, serve it on the side and add the granola into the parfait right before serving.
  2. Use mason jars: I think 8 oz. mason jars – affiliate link – (mostly used for canning) are ideal for the perfectly portioned and grab-and-go homemade yogurt parfait. Simply layer yogurt and fruit, tighten it with the lid and store it in the fridge.

Make-ahead yogurt parfait should keep fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days.

To Store Leftovers:

If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) and keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. Be sure to serve them with extra fruit and granola on the side.

person drizzling strawberry blueberry granola parfait with honey

Expert Tips 

Here are a few quick tips for the best yogurt fruit granola parfait that you can make over and over again.

  • Whisk yogurt: It might sound like an extra step, but taking a few minutes to whisk the yogurt in a bowl makes it even more creamy and easy to layer. 
  • Make it your own: The thing I love about this simple recipe is that it is so easy to change it up with whatever you have on hand. Use these measurements as a place to start and make it your own with different fruit, yogurt, and granola.
  • When serving for breakfast or brunch: If I am serving this for friends, I make sure to take my time in layering, use colorful fresh fruit and always garnish it with fresh mint. People go crazy as soon as they see pretty parfaits layered with colorful fruit in jars.

FAQs

What is the difference between yogurt and parfait?

Yogurt is a thick milk-based product that is sold plain or with other flavorings such as fruit and sweetener. A parfait, on the other hand, is a layered dessert typically consisting of yogurt, fresh or frozen fruit and berries, ice cream, and whipped topping. 

What is in a yogurt parfait?

Most Yogurt parfait recipes are made with plain or flavored yogurt, fresh fruit (mostly berries), and granola made with ground oats, nuts, and seeds.

What is the best yogurt for a parfait?

The best yogurt for parfait is plain Greek yogurt as it has a thick and creamy consistency that is ideal for a yogurt parfait recipe. Plus, it is made without the addition of sugar making this breakfast a healthy option. However, you can use any type of yogurt (including plant-based options) to make this easy breakfast recipe.

Is yogurt parfait healthy?

It is no secret that Greek Yogurt and fresh fruit are good for you and are recommended as a part of a healthy diet. However, it is best to be conservative when adding granola to the parfait as it is usually made with added sugars.

How many calories in a yogurt parfait?

One serving of this Greek Yogurt Parfait recipe is 298 calories.

Other Easy Breakfast Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you are a fan of Chic Fil A’s Yogurt Parfait or Pioneer Women’s Yogurt Parfait with honey, I hope you give my version a try. I know those are favored by many people but my version here is just as easy and delicious.

And if you have leftover yogurt, try your hand at making my Frozen Yogurt Bark as well. It’s a healthy dessert that is a great alternative to ice cream.

If you try this Fruit and Yogurt Parfait recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Print

Greek Yogurt Parfait Recipe

This Fruit and Yogurt Parfait recipe is made by layering yogurt with granola and fruit. It is quick and easy to put together. It also stores well so it is a great breakfast recipe to make it a part of your weekly meal prep.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 servings
Calories 298kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup optional – more as a drizzle
  • ¾ cup plain Greek yogurt
  • ¼ cup berries or any other fruit cut into small 1-inch chunks
  • ¼ cup homemade granola or store bought granola

Instructions

  • If using a sweetener, mix it with greek yogurt in a small bowl until fully combined.
  • To layer the yogurt parfait, place half of the yogurt at the bottom of a mason jar or a bowl. Top it off with half of the fruit and half of the granola. Cover them with the rest of the yogurt and top it off with the rest of the fruit and granola.
  • If preferred, finish it off with a drizzle of honey. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • This recipe can be multiplied as many times as you want.
  • Make Ahead: If you are making these granola parfaits as a part of your meal plan I would recommend against using the granola as a part of the layers. Instead, just layer them with fruit and yogurt and serve the granola on the side to add in later to prevent it from getting soggy. I also recommend using 8 oz. mason jars as they are not only ideal in size but also great for serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 298kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 78mg | Potassium: 185mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 122IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 225mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Greek Yogurt Parfait appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/feed/ 4
Fresh Peach Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/#comments Fri, 24 Jun 2022 15:47:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9726 Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or pick your favorite from my collection of fun Mexican Party Food ideas. Ingredients With a few simple, fresh ingredients, you can enjoy this easy peach salsa recipe as an appetizer or a great topping year-round.  To make this easy homemade fresh fruit salsa recipe gather your fresh peaches, cherry tomatoes,...

The post Fresh Peach Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or pick your favorite from my collection of fun Mexican Party Food ideas.

Fresh peach salsa with tomatoes in a large bowl from the top view

Ingredients

With a few simple, fresh ingredients, you can enjoy this easy peach salsa recipe as an appetizer or a great topping year-round. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view

To make this easy homemade fresh fruit salsa recipe gather your fresh peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeño pepper, red onion, fresh lime juice, salt, and black pepper. It is optional, but you can also add fresh cilantro and a little chili powder to finish it off.

Substitutions & Possible Additions

  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work for this Mexican peach salsa. When buying peaches, I recommend picking ones that are not overly ripe, as the ripe ones tend to be too juicy. You do want some of the juices, but it should be just enough to compliment the dressing instead of overpowering it.
  • Tomatoes: I used cherry tomatoes, but you can try Roma tomatoes or other heirloom varieties, such as San Marzano or Brandywine are also delicious.
  • Onions: Use white (such as Vidalia onions) or green onions as a substitute for red onions. 
  • Garlic Cloves: A clove of garlic finely minced can add a burst of flavor and can be added in the end.
  • Nuts & Seeds: Add in a handful of walnuts or pepitas for a bit of a crunch.

How To Make

This delicious homemade fresh peach salsa recipe comes together in 15 minutes and mixes the freshest ingredients for a mouthwatering addition to any meal. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make peach salsa
  1. Prep ingredients: Place fresh ripe peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno pepper, and red onion in a large bowl.
  2. Add seasonings: Sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper, and pour lime juice over the assembled ingredients. 
  3. Toss and garnish: Lightly mix ingredients together. If you choose, you can add chili powder and cilantro as your garnish.
  4. Serve: You can serve immediately. However, if you have the time, let your peach jalapeno salsa sit for 15 to 30 minutes to let the flavors to blend.

How To Store

If you didn’t finish this delicious peach salsa in one sitting (is that even possible?), you have options for preserving that fantastic flavor.

  • Storage: For the best results, you can store your homemade peach salsa in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this salsa recipe.

What to Serve with Peach Salsa

This homemade salsa recipe is perfect when you want to add a Mexican flavor to chicken, pork, or fish recipes. But guess what? It is so versatile that you can pretty much use it anywhere you use regular tomato salsa, which is probably why some even call it, peach pico de gallo.

Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • With your favorite tortilla chips: A great appetizer! Chips and salsa, how can you go wrong?
  • Makes a great topping: Vegetable-filled Burrito Bowls or Baked Chicken Breasts smothered in this fruity and spicy peach salsa recipe. Need I say more?
  • Peach salsa for fish: This recipe is a great accompaniment for grilled fish like this  Grilled Mahi Mahi. It would also be delicious on Grilled Shrimp or  Breaded Fish
  • Tacos: Of course! Fresh salsa is terrific on tacos, and this salsa recipe with peaches pairs amazingly well with tacos, especially fish tacos. For an elevated taco experience, try it on; Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, and a vegan-friendly Black Bean Quinoa Taco.

Variations

There are many ways to customize this peach and tomato salsa recipe to suit your tastebuds.

  • Turn up the heat: For a spicier peach salsa, leave the seeds in the jalapeno peppers. If you are a brave soul with an affinity for super spicy salsa, then swap jalapenos with habanero peppers.
  • Cool it down: If heat isn’t your thing, you can adjust your spice level. Use fewer hot peppers, or omit the hot peppers altogether for a mild fruity salsa still loaded with flavor.
  • Without tomatoes: If you’re not a fan of your peach salsa with tomatoes, you can simply leave them out. It will be sweeter but still delicious.
  • Cilantro: If peach cilantro salsa is not your thing, simply leave the cilantro out and make it without. It will be just as delicious.
peach salsa served on a tortilla chip from the front

Expert Tips

Here are a few foolproof tips that will ensure each bite is nothing short of sweet and juicy peach perfection.

  • Added Salt: If you are serving this fresh fruit salsa with tortilla chips, I recommend adjusting the amount of salt you use to prevent it from being overly salty.
  • Bite-Size: I suggest finely diced peaches (½-inch cubes) to achieve a better blend of flavors, but if you prefer a chunkier salsa, you can chop the pieces a little larger.
  • Marinate: If time permits, let it sit in the fridge for 15-20 minutes to allow the flavors to marinate and blend. 

FAQs

Can you freeze fresh peach salsa?

It is not recommended that you freeze fresh peach salsa. The freezing process will alter the texture and consistency of your salsa. For optimal flavor, you should eat this salsa with peaches and tomatoes fresh.

Can you can fresh peach salsa? 

Most canned peach salsa recipes are made by cooking peaches and tomatoes before preserving them in a jar. Since this recipe is made with fresh peaches and tomatoes, it would not be ideal for canning.

Other Delicious Peach Recipes You Might Like

Do you have an abundance of just-picked peaches? Need more ideas about what you can do with these sweet juicy gems? I have listed a few more recipes to satisfy your cravings during the peach season and all year round.

Person stirring a bowl of Fresh Peach and Walnut Salsa

If you try this Fresh Peach Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

peach salsa in a bowl from the top view
Print

Fresh Peach Salsa Recipe

This Fresh Peach Salsa recipe is made in 15 minutes with juicy peaches, tomatoes, jalapeno peppers, and red onion. Serve it as a condiment over grilled fish or chicken, fish tacos or by itself with tortilla chips on the side.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 81kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 peaches cut into small pieces (½ inch cubes) – approximately 2 cups – pick firm but ripe peaches
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 small red bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ red onion chopped
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup lime juice
  • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro optional
  • ¼ teaspoon chili powder optional

Instructions

  • Place peaches, tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno, red onion, salt and pepper in a large bowl.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and give it a toss.
  • Garnish with cilantro and chili powder, if using.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Serve it with your favorite tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • This recipe yields approximately 3 cups of fresh peach salsa.
  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work in this recipe.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 81kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.05g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 318mg | Potassium: 325mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 889IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Fresh Peach Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/feed/ 16
Mahi Mahi Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/mahi-mahi-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/mahi-mahi-marinade/#comments Thu, 23 Jun 2022 00:44:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54400 The best part, you ask? This quick marinade recipe can be used for grilled, baked, and pan-seared mahi mahi (aka dolphin fish). If you are a fan of quick Seafood Dinners, this simple marinade is a great back-pocket recipe that I know you will go back to often. Marinade Ingredients To make this easy mahi mahi marinade recipe, you’ll need olive oil, minced garlic, lime zest, fresh lime juice, honey,...

The post Mahi Mahi Marinade appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The best part, you ask? This quick marinade recipe can be used for grilled, baked, and pan-seared mahi mahi (aka dolphin fish). If you are a fan of quick Seafood Dinners, this simple marinade is a great back-pocket recipe that I know you will go back to often.

person placing mahi mahi in marinade

Marinade Ingredients

To make this easy mahi mahi marinade recipe, you’ll need olive oil, minced garlic, lime zest, fresh lime juice, honey, paprika, kosher salt, black pepper, and of course, mahi mahi fillets.

ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a white marble counter

Other Seasoning Options

  • Lemon juice: If you’re not a fan of marinating fish in lime juice, freshly squeezed lemon juice and lemon zest are easy substitutions. This simple substitute offers a lemon pepper flavor that perfectly balances the sweet mahi mahi taste (just like my Grilled Shrimp Kabobs!).
  • Cajun seasoning: Give your mild fish a smoky kick by using cajun seasoning for grilled mahi mahi. Onion powder, garlic powder, and black pepper will add delicious flavor to your mild white fish.
  • Asian flavors – Soy Ginger: For an umami-rich Asian-inspired marinade, use 2 tablespoons of soy sauce (in place of salt), sesame oil (instead of olive oil), and add a teaspoon of minced fresh ginger into the marinade.
  • Mexican-themed marinade: Want to make mahi mahi tacos? Simply use chili powder instead of paprika to give your marinade a little spice. Then, add some fresh cilantro to your mahi mahi grill marinade. Finally, put some peach salsa or mango salsa on top of the fillets, and voila! A delicious dinner.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh ingredients are the key to making a good mahi mahi marinade. Add some fresh parsley or mint to your lime marinade, and you’ll never wonder how to season mahi mahi again.

How to Marinate Mahi Mahi

Wondering what to marinate mahi mahi in? Whether you’re baking, pan-frying or grilling mahi mahi, this easy recipe will take your dish to the next level. 

a collage of images showing how to make the recipe
  1. Mix marinade ingredients: In a bowl large enough to fit your fish fillets, whisk together the olive oil, garlic, lime zest, lime juice, honey, paprika, salt, and pepper. Reserve two tablespoons of the marinade and set it aside.
  2. Dry the fillets: Use paper towels to dry both sides of the fillets thoroughly.
person marinading dolphin fish in a collage of images
  1. Marinate the mahi mahi: Place the dried fillets in the marinade bowl and toss to coat. Then, cover the bowl with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 20-30 minutes.
  2. Cook the fillets: Once the fillets are ready to cook, remove them from the marinade and cook them using your preferred method. When you finish cooking the marinated mahi mahi, drizzle the fillets with the reserved marinade and serve.

Make-Ahead Instructions

It’s a cinch to make this marinade recipe ahead of time. 

Simply whisk together the ingredients and store the mixture in an airtight jar in the fridge. Then, marinate your dolphin fish fillets 30 minutes before you’d like to cook the fish.

Expert Tips

This healthy recipe for mahi mahi marinade is easy, quick and delicious. However, if you want to make the best marinade for mahi mahi fish, follow these expert tips:

  • Frozen mahi mahi: If you use frozen fish, be sure to thaw your fillets before you start marinating them. I recommend letting the fish fillets thaw in the fridge overnight.
  • Dry thoroughly: The best way to get the most flavor into your fish is by drying them first. Be sure to thoroughly dry each piece of fish with a paper towel before adding them to your prepared marinade.
  • Baste it: Sometimes, if the fillets are too large, they may not fit in one layer while marinating, even if it is in a large bowl. If this is the case, I suggest basting them a few times to ensure each piece has a generous layer of marinade.
Grilled mahi mahi with herbs on the side

FAQs

Whether you want to know how to cook mahi mahi on the grill or how long to marinate your tender fish, I have you covered! These FAQs have all you need to make a delicious fish recipe that is guaranteed to impress.

How long to marinate mahi mahi?

I recommend marinating your mahi mahi for 20-30 minutes. Any longer, and the lime juice’s acid may begin to cook your fish.

Should you rinse mahi mahi before marinating?

 Yes, you can rinse your fillets if you want to. Just be sure to rinse them in cold water to keep your fresh fish safe.

Can I use this mahi mahi marinade if I am baking, grilling, or pan-frying mahi mahi?

Yes! This marinade will work for dozens of great recipes. You can cook mahi mahi directly on the grill (or in a piece of foil), bake your fillets into fish tacos, cook them on cedar planks, and more.

Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mahi Mahi Marinade recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mahi Mahi marinade in an oval bowl. A person basting fish
Print

Mahi Mahi Marinade Recipe

The one and only Mahi Mahi Marinade recipe you need to make the most flavorful baked, pan seared or grilled mahi mahi recipe. Made with a few simple ingredients, this quick recipe is just what you need to take an otherwise humble fish to the next level.
Course Dinner, Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 158kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ¼ cup lime juice
  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 4 6-8 oz mahi mahi fillets

Instructions

  • Place olive oil, garlic, lime zest, lime juice, honey, paprika, kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl big enough to accommodate mahi mahi fillets. Give it a whisk until fully combined.
  • Reserve two tablespoons of the marinade and set it aside.
  • Thoroughly dry the fillets on both sides using paper towels.
  • Add the now-dried fillets to the bowl and toss to coat. Cover it with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 20-30 minutes.
  • When ready to cook (or grill), remove from the marinade and cook using your preferred method. Once cooked, drizzle it with the reserved marinade.

Notes

  • This recipe makes about 2/3 cups of marinade which should be good for marinating four 6-8 oz of mahi mahi fillets. If you are using more fish, you can easily multiply the recipe.
  • Make-ahead Instructions: Mix all the marinade ingredients in a mason jar, give it a shake, and store in the refrigerator. Thirty minutes before you are ready to cook or grill your Mahi Mahi, dry them thoroughly and place them in a large shallow plate. Pour marinade over making sure that the fish fillets are thoroughly coated with the marinade.

Nutrition

Calories: 158kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 583mg | Potassium: 36mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 48IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 7mg | Iron: 0.2mg

The post Mahi Mahi Marinade appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mahi-mahi-marinade/feed/ 4
Mango Avocado Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 18 Jun 2022 19:52:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54258 Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa...

The post Mango Avocado Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa Salad for a more savory option. 

And if you have some leftover mangoes, try our Pineapple Mango Salsa.

Avocado Mango Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Ingredients

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make this mango salad with avocado. A few well-loved, familiar pantry items make up the dressing, and a handful of fresh produce from your local farmer’s market or grocery store comprise the salad. 

avocado mango dressing ingredients
  • For the chili lime dressing, you’ll need extra-virgin olive oil, lime zest, fresh lime juice, garlic, ground cumin, chili powder, kosher salt, and maple syrup (or honey).
mango salad ingredients
  • To make the recipe for mango salad, gather ripe avocados and ripe mangoes, thinly sliced red onion, jalapeño, and fresh cilantro. 

Substitutions and Possible Additions

  • Dressing: If a spicy mango avocado salad isn’t your thing, try this Balsamic Lemon Dressing for a tangy, balsamic vinegar-based salad addition with fresh lemon juice.
  • Fresh herbs: I know that Mango Salad with cilantro might not be everybody’s cup of tea. If that is you, feel free to swap it with fresh parsley or mint to pack an aromatic punch. 
  • Onions: If you don’t have red onion on hand, green onions are a perfect substitute!
  • Peppers: Not a fan of jalapenos? Use a small red bell pepper or 
  • Nuts & Seeds: For a salty crunch that beautifully balances the sweetness of the mango, try adding a handful of pumpkin seeds or chopped walnuts. 
  • Other produce: Create endless salad varieties with any fresh summer produce you have on hand. Turn this recipe into a Mango Avocado Tomato Salad by tossing in a cup of cherry tomatoes, or throw in a cup of diced English cucumber for some extra crunch. 
  • Salad greens: Make a green salad with mango and avocado by adding in some spring mix, butter lettuce, or your favorite leafy greens. 
  • Add in some protein: Looking for a good protein source to make this salad more filling? Try adding a few grilled or baked chicken breasts for a delicious copycat version of the fan-favorite Cheesecake Factory salad with mango and avocado. Or if you have the grill on, top it off with grilled shrimp on top.

How to Make Mango Salad 

With a little bit of chopping and a gentle toss of the ingredients, this delicious avo mango salad comes together in the blink of an eye and is sure to impress at any summer gathering. Simply:

person showing how to make mango avocado salad
  1. Make the dressing: Add all ingredients into a mason jar. Screw on the lid tightly and shake until thoroughly combined. 
  2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your cubed avocado, chunks of fresh mango, sliced red onion, chopped jalapeño (optional), and freshly chopped cilantro. 
  3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
  4. Season: Season to taste with salt and black pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

  • Dressing: To make this recipe come together quickly, you can make the dressing a day in advance. Simply combine all ingredients in a mason jar and place in the fridge. 
  • Prep: Avocado is difficult to prep ahead of time because it can quickly turn an unappealing brown color once cut. I recommend chopping up the ripe avocado and the rest of the ingredients as soon as you’re ready to assemble the salad. You can, however, prep the mango and jalapeño in advance, but be sure to store them in an airtight container in the fridge. 
  • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days. 

What to Serve it With

A salad this versatile, refreshing, and vibrant is sure to brighten up your favorite summer main dish. Here are some serving suggestions:

Salad with mango and avocado in a bowl from the front view

Expert Tips

While this recipe for avocado and mango salad is super simple and easy, follow these helpful tips to achieve maximum results and flavor!

  • Use ripe fruit: Avocados and mangoes have the best texture and flavor when they’re ripe. Also, it is best if you cut them in bite-sized pieces.
  • Ensure your prepped fruit is similar in size: Make sure every bite of your salad is consistent by cutting your mango and avocado into equal-sized cubes or chunks. 
  • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining.

FAQs

How do you know if a mango is ripe?

To tell whether a mango is ripe, use your thumb to gently apply pressure to the skin. If it feels soft or gives slightly, it’s ready! If you’re not quite sure, locate the fruit’s stem and give it a whiff. If it gives off a sweet, fruity aroma, it’s ripe. 

Is mango skin edible?

Mango skin is edible, and studies show that the skin contains a variety of health and nutritional benefits. However, keep in mind that eating mango skin may cause allergic reactions or lead to the ingestion of pesticides or harmful chemicals. The skin is also generally bitter and tough to chew.

Why Should You Make this Salad?

I know you’ll love this mango and avocado salad as much as I do! Here’s why:

  • Quick, easy, and nutrient-dense: Healthy has never been easier! Throw this simple salad together in 15 minutes for your daily dose of essential fatty acids and vitamin-C
  • The ideal accompaniment to grilled favorites: This is a perfect salad to pair with fish tacos, grilled seafood, meats, and other main dishes. Or, serve it as a mango salsa with your favorite tortilla chip! 
  • Bursting with refreshing summer flavor: This fresh summer salad is the perfect way to cool off on a hot summer day. 

Other Fruit Salads You Might Also Like

If you loved this avocado mango salad, here are some other fruity salad recipes you need to try!

If you try this delicious Mango Avocado Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

mango salad with avocado in a bowl from the top view
Print

Mango Avocado Salad Recipe

This Mango Avocado Salad recipe is made with fresh mango, ripe avocados, and chili lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect side dish for the grilling season.
Course Salad
Cuisine Mexican/Southwestern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 358kcal

Ingredients

For The Chili Lime Vinaigrette:

  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon of lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon maple syrup/honey

For The Salad:

  • 2 ripe avocados cut into cubes
  • 2 ripe mangos cut into 1-inch chunks
  • ½ cup red onion thinly sliced – from a small red onion
  • 1 small jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped (optional)
  • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro

Instructions

  • Make the dressing by combining everything in a mason jar. Close the lid tightly and give it a shake until all ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
  • Place the cubed avocados, mango chunks, red onion slices, jalapeno, and cilantro in a salad bowl.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a toss to combine.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

Video

Notes

  • The finished salad is about 4 cups with 1 cup per serving.
  • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days.
  • Cut them in similar bite-size chunks: For best results, cut avocado and mango cubes in similar sizes.
  • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining. 

Nutrition

Calories: 358kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 452mg | Potassium: 743mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1528IU | Vitamin C: 59mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Mango Avocado Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
Avocado Peach Salad https://foolproofliving.com/peach-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/peach-avocado-salad/#comments Mon, 06 Jun 2022 20:48:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14574 I think we can all agree that having a few summer salad recipes in your back pocket will make your life easier, especially when it comes to putting dinner on the table when it is 90 degrees outside. They are fresh, vibrant, crunchy, and colorful – and usually require only one bowl. While I adore Avocado Kale Salad, Quinoa Avocado Salad, Mango Avocado Salad, and Watermelon Avocado Salad, this is...

The post Avocado Peach Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

I think we can all agree that having a few summer salad recipes in your back pocket will make your life easier, especially when it comes to putting dinner on the table when it is 90 degrees outside. They are fresh, vibrant, crunchy, and colorful – and usually require only one bowl. While I adore Avocado Kale Salad, Quinoa Avocado Salad, Mango Avocado Salad, and Watermelon Avocado Salad, this is by far my favorite.

avocado peach salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side from top view

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

This peach and avocado salad is the dictionary definition of a simple summer salad. I know you will love it because:

  • Packed full of fresh summer produce: Yellow peaches, Persian cucumber, and creamy avocado – does anything get better than that? It’s also gluten-free, vegan, vegetarian and nut free!
  • Easy, homemade, Mediterranean-inspired dressing: The flavors of cumin and coriander really sparkle in this peach salad recipe and they compliment the sweet fruit so well.
  • Super customizable: Stick to the original recipe or amp it up with a few ingredient add-ins.

Ingredients

The ingredient list for this peach avocado salad is nothing more than a mix of pantry and fresh, flavorful produce. Venture out to your favorite farmer’s market for this one.

ingredients for the recipe in small portions on a marble backdrop

Gather together pumpkin seeds, ground coriander, ground cumin, extra virgin olive oil, serrano chile, fresh cilantro, fresh parsley, fresh lemon juice, kosher salt, yellow ripe peaches, Persian cucumbers, ripe avocado and sesame seeds.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Chile: Use a jalapeno or fresno chiles if serranos are hard to find.
  • Fresh Herbs: Add an extra sprinkle of chopped fresh mint or basil.
  • Acid / Vinegar: Swap out the lemon juice for lime juice or balsamic vinegar (either white or dark) instead. Alternatively, use my lemon balsamic vinaigrette or chili-lime vinaigrette as a spicy kick.
  • Fresh Peaches: I love sweet yellow juicy peaches, but you could also try white peaches, donut peaches, or other stone fruit like nectarines.
  • Cucumber: English cucumber is the next best thing to Persian cucumbers. It is a personal preference whether or not to peel and remove the seeds.
  • Seeds / Nuts: Replace the pumpkin seeds with thinly sliced almonds (or toasted almonds), walnuts, pine nuts, or pistachios instead.
  • Spice: A final sprinkle of black pepper would be a great way to amp up the spice, too.

How to Make

The avocado peach salad recipe comes together in a few easy steps. Simply:

person toasting pumpkin seeds and making the dressing
  1. Toast pepitas and sesame seeds: Place pumpkin seeds and sesame seeds in a non-stick skillet. Set over medium heat and toast, stirring frequently, until lightly golden, about 5-7 minutes. Do not leave the sight of it as they can burn easily. Pour onto a plate to cool.
  2. Make the dressing: In a large bowl, add the ground coriander, ground cumin, olive oil, Serrano chile, cilantro, parsley, lemon juice, and salt. Gently whisk until combined.
person assembling and tossing peach salad
  1. Coat the fruit and vegetables: To the bowl with the dressing, add the peach slices, cucumbers and avocado. Gently toss to ensure all pieces are coated.
  2. Sprinkle with seeds and serve: Finish with the toasted pumpkin seeds and sesame seeds. Taste and season with salt and pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

Serving Suggestions

This avocado and peach salad can be served in a number of different fashions. You could try:

  • Appetizer: Serve it as the salad course for dinner. All that juicy produce will certainly wet your appetite.
  • Side Dish: Make it a light and bright side dish to main meals like Cornish Hens, Whole Roasted Chicken, Chicken Rice Pilaf or a simple Lemon Herb Quinoa
  • Potluck / Dinner Party: This makes the perfect summer salad and a gorgeous accompaniment to bring to your next potluck or dinner party with friends.
  • Picnic / BBQ: Keep it chilled right up until it’s time to eat or serve the bowl on top of a larger bowl of ice at any outdoor engagement like a picnic or BBQ. This summer peach salad would be perfect when served with grilled shrimp skewers, shrimp kabobs shrimp tacos, or guacamole burgers.

Variations

Feel free to get fun and creative with this avocado salad with peaches. Add ½ – 1 cup of any of the following:

  • Top it off with cheese: This summer peach salad would be perfect with the addition of crumbled goat cheese, feta cheese cubes, sliced fresh mozzarella, or better yet hand torn burrata. My personal favorite is peach and goat cheese salad as it tastes very similar to my Warm Pear Salad recipe.
  • Add in some green leafy vegetables: Turn it into a green salad by adding arugula, baby spinach, butter lettuce, or even grilled lettuce.
  • Add some onion: If you can’t imagine a salad without onions, feel free to add some sliced red onion for extra flavor.
  • Grilled peaches: If the grill is on and you have the time, why not grill some peaches for the dreamy grill marks and caramelized flavors. Grilled Peach Salad with all the other fresh and crunchy ingredients is an easy way to take it up a notch.

How to Store

  • Storage: The fresh peach salad will keep for up to 1 day covered tightly with plastic wrap in the fridge. After that, I find the avocado starts to turn slightly brown and bitter – and you lose too much of the crunch from the cucumbers. Wake up the leftovers with an extra squeeze of lemon.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this salad as it will lose most of its tangy flavors and texture.

Expert Tips

  • Toss minimally and gently. If you toss this nectarine avocado salad too much, the avocado will melt into the salad and you will lose some of the texture.
  • Serve immediately. This salad is best enjoyed the moment it is made. I like to keep all the produce in the fridge right up until I’m ready to prepare so the ingredients stay crisp and chilled.
  • Chill the salad bowl. For even more insurance, chill your serving bowl in the fridge if you have some extra time. 
peach avocado salad in a bowl from the top view

FAQs

How long will avocado last in a salad?

Avocado will last in a salad refrigerated for only 1-2 days, after too much time, the avocado breaks down and turns slightly brown and bitter.

How to keep avocado in a salad from turning brown?

Directly cover the dressed salad with a layer of plastic wrap, then wrap it once more with another layer of plastic wrap. This keeps the air from oxidizing the avocado and turning it brown.

Other Summer Salads You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this Avocado Peach Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe has been adapted from Bon Appetit’s Peach and Cucumber Salad Recipe with minor changes.

avocado peach salad in a bowl from the top view
Print

Avocado Peach Salad Recipe

This Avocado Peach Salad recipe is the perfect vegan summer salad featuring fresh peaches, along with ripe avocados, toasted pumpkin and sesame seeds. Packed with sweet, savory and crunchy flavors, this easy salad recipe is all you need for your summer get-togethers.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 308kcal

Ingredients

For The Toasted Seeds:

  • 1/3 cup raw pumpkin seeds (unsalted)
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds

Salad Dressing Ingredients:

  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 serrano chile seeds removed and chopped – or jalapeno
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped – omit it if you are not a fan
  • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Salad:

  • 4 medium size yellow peaches ripened & sliced with the skin on
  • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced thinly
  • 1 ripe avocado cut into small cubes

Instructions

  • Toast the seeds: Place pumpkin seeds and sesame seeds in a non-stick skillet. Toast in medium heat, stirring frequently, until golden brown, 5-7 minutes. Do not leave sight of it as it can burn easily. Set aside to cool.
  • Make the salad dressing: In a large salad bowl, mix together ground coriander, ground cumin, olive oil, Serrano chile, cilantro, parsley, lemon juice, and salt.
  • Assemble salad: Add the sliced peaches, cucumbers, and avocado to the same bowl. Gently toss to ensure that peaches, cucumbers and avocados are coated with the dressing and herbs.
  • Sprinkle with pumpkin and sesame seeds. Give it a toss.
  • Taste and season with more salt, if necessary. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Pick ripe fruit: I find that this salad works best with peaches that are ripened. Though you do not want them to be too ripened that it’s mushy.
  • Storage: This peach avocado salad will keep for up to 1 day covered tightly with plastic wrap in the fridge. After that, I find the avocado starts to turn slightly brown and bitter – and you lose too much of the crunch from the cucumbers. Wake up the leftovers with an extra squeeze of lemon.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 308kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 639mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 879IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Avocado Peach Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peach-avocado-salad/feed/ 1
Cantaloupe Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/citrusy-cantaloupe-smoothie-bowl-with-pepitas/ https://foolproofliving.com/citrusy-cantaloupe-smoothie-bowl-with-pepitas/#comments Tue, 31 May 2022 15:38:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10192 Why Should You Try This Smoothie Recipe? This simple melon shake is as nutritious as it is refreshing, and you won’t believe how easy it is to make. With so much to love, this cantaloupe smoothie recipe will be your new go-to treat perfect for a hot summer day. No sugar is added to this naturally sweet cantaloupe yogurt smoothie, making it a refreshing (and healthy!) treat to have first...

The post Cantaloupe Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Should You Try This Smoothie Recipe?

This simple melon shake is as nutritious as it is refreshing, and you won’t believe how easy it is to make. With so much to love, this cantaloupe smoothie recipe will be your new go-to treat perfect for a hot summer day.

Frozen cantaloupe smoothie in a glass from close up
  • No sugar is added to this naturally sweet cantaloupe yogurt smoothie, making it a refreshing (and healthy!) treat to have first thing in the morning or even for dessert.
  • You can make this cantaloupe shake recipe for nearly any special diet. Anyone who follows a vegan, gluten-free, or even dairy-free diet can enjoy this tasty drink—alongside my Mango Tumeric Smoothie or any one of my other Turmeric Smoothies, of course.
  • Needing only 5 ingredients and less than 10 minutes, this beginner-friendly drink is one of the most effortless cantaloupe smoothie ideas out there.

Ingredients

To make this cantaloupe shake, gather cubed cantaloupe, unsweetened plain yogurt, orange juice, and ice. Because the high water content of melon can lead to a watery texture, you’ll also need a half-cup of another fruit, such as mango.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view

Substitutions & Additions

Putting cantaloupe in a smoothie is the best way to make a healthy drink without a lengthy shopping list. Make your frozen melon smoothie countless ways with these simple substitutions.

  • Freeze cantaloupe: To make a frozen cantaloupe smoothie, freeze your fresh cantaloupe pieces before blending. Note, however, that you may have to pulse your smoothie for extra time to break up the frozen bits. 
  • Second fruit: Almost any sweet fruit will work alongside your cantaloupe, including strawberry, pineapple, banana, and mango. You can also freeze this second fruit if you have time or add extra ice cubes for a refreshing chill.
  • Juice: Adding juice is one of my favorite ways to add sweetness to my summer smoothie. However, though I use orange juice (I squeeze it myself instead of using orange juice from concentrate) in my smoothie routine, pineapple juice would also work.
  • Milk instead of juice: If you prefer to make your cantaloupe smoothie with milk, any kind will do. For instance, you can make cantaloupe smoothie recipes with almond milk, cashew milk, or even coconut milk. Just note that you may have to add a little honey, honey syrup, or simple syrup to make your smoothie a bit sweeter if you prefer.
  • Yogurt: I use plain Greek yogurt in my smoothie recipe, but you could also use a dairy-free alternative instead. Like the almond milk yogurt I use in my Vegan Banana Smoothie, vegan yogurt makes a great, diet-friendly substitution.
  • Additional Sweetener: I think this orange cantaloupe smoothie recipe is adequately sweet as written, but if you want it sweeter you can add in a few tablespoons of honey syrup or as it blends.
  • Add protein (optional): To make this healthy smoothie recipe even more nutritious, try adding extra proteins. Simply add a teaspoon of ground flax seeds, chia seeds, hemp seeds, collagen peptides, nut butter, or your favorite protein powder.

How to Make a Cantaloupe Smoothie

Smoothie recipes with melon are a great way to satisfy your sweet tooth without breaking a sweat. This cool, fruity treat will be the easiest drink you make all summer.

two images showing how to make smoothie with cantaloupe
  1. Blend ingredients: Place the ingredients into a blender, preferably with fruit on the bottom and ice at the top. Pulse the ingredients a few times, then blend on high until smooth. If you do not own a blender, you can use a food processor for blending as well.
  2. Serve: Pour the mixture into a glass and, if desired, garnish with cantaloupe. Drink immediately.

Variations

Make dozens of smoothie recipes with cantaloupe with these yummy variations. Whether you’re craving a sweet cantaloupe berry smoothie or a creamy banana variation, we’ve got you covered!

  • Frozen cantaloupe smoothie: Want to give your melon smoothie extra chill? Freeze your cantaloupe cubes for 4-8 hours before blending.
  • Cantaloupe banana smoothie: If you’re looking for a healthy breakfast that’s equal parts sweet and creamy, a banana smoothie is just what you need. Simply swap out your mango for a half-cup of sliced banana.
  • Strawberry cantaloupe smoothie: Give your recipe a tart, summer-fresh flavor with a match made in heaven: cantaloupe and strawberries! No one can resist the fresh fruit of this easy recipe.
  • Watermelon cantaloupe smoothie: No one can resist a refreshing smoothie recipe with double the ripe melon. For this delicious recipe, I recommend adding a full cup of cubed watermelon to keep your smoothie from becoming too watery.

How to Store

Smoothie recipes with melon are a godsend when it comes to easy storage. Simply place your smoothie mixture in a bottle with a tight-fitting lid, like a mason jar. Drink within 2 days, being sure to shake the smoothie before pouring.

Please note that your smoothie will likely get watery as it sits in the fridge. To keep your cantaloupe smoothie’s creamy texture, I recommend enjoying your beverage on the day it’s made.

person pouring smoothie into a glass

FAQs

No guesswork is necessary when making this recipe for a melon smoothie. Whether you have questions about substitutions or nutrition information, this handy guide is just what you need.

Can you put cantaloupe in a smoothie?

 Yes, you can use cantaloupe in a smoothie! Adding melon to smoothies is the perfect way to make a naturally sweet, creamy, and healthy treat.

How to make a cantaloupe smoothie with milk?

If you don’t want to add juice to your smoothie, you can use milk instead. Any milk will work, but you may have to add extra sweetness with ingredients like honey or Honey Simple Syrup if you like your smoothies on the sweeter side.

Can cantaloupe be frozen for smoothies?

Absolutely! Simply cut your cantaloupe into 1-inch cubes, arrange them on a sheet pan, and put them in the freezer for 4-8 hours. Then, blend your ingredients.

Is cantaloupe smoothie good for you?

Using natural, nutrient-packed ingredients, this cantaloupe smoothie with yogurt is a tasty and healthy way to get extra vitamins. Just one serving of cantaloupe fills your daily need for vitamin c and vitamin A.

Similar Smoothie Recipes You Might Like:

It is no secret that drinking a smoothie a day has its benefits. If you are new to making your own smoothies you are in for a treat because I have so many recipes for you. Below are a few recipes to get you started.

If you try this Cantaloupe Smoothie recipe or any other smoothie recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cantaloupe smoothies in two glasses from the front view
Print

Cantaloupe Smoothie Recipe

This Cantaloupe Smoothie recipe is an easy, quick and healthy breakfast or snack you can make in minutes. Made without any sugar, this melon smoothie is incredibly refreshing perfect for a hot summer day.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 197kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup cantaloupe cut into 1 to 2-inch cubes
  • ½ cup mango strawberry, or banana, cut into small pieces*
  • ¼ cup unsweetened plain yogurt or vanilla yogurt or vegan yogurt
  • ½ cup orange juice or pineapple juice
  • 1 cup ice

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients in a blender. Blend on high until smooth.
  • Pour into a glass and garnish with cantaloupe if desired. Enjoy immediately.

Notes

  • This recipe can easily be multiplied.
  • I think it goes without saying that the riper the fruit the sweeter your smoothie will be. So, if you prefer it on the sweeter side be sure to pick a ripe cantaloupe white you are at the grocery store.
  • You can use frozen cantaloupe if you want. However, if you do so, I would recommend using 1/2 cup of ice.
  • Storage: Simply place your smoothie mixture in a bottle with a tight-fitting lid, like a mason jar. Drink within 2 days, being sure to shake the smoothie before pouring. Please note that your smoothie will likely get watery as it sits in the fridge. To keep your cantaloupe smoothie’s creamy texture, I recommend enjoying your beverage on the day it’s made.

Nutrition

Serving: 1person | Calories: 197kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 90mg | Potassium: 733mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 37g | Vitamin A: 6612IU | Vitamin C: 110mg | Calcium: 118mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cantaloupe Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/citrusy-cantaloupe-smoothie-bowl-with-pepitas/feed/ 8
Pesto Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/#comments Mon, 23 May 2022 23:18:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=52273 Why Should You Make This Recipe? Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of. This vinaigrette is easy, fresh, and pairs well with dozens of delicious dishes.  This 5-minute pesto vinaigrette recipe is a great way to use fresh basil, especially if you’re growing your own fresh herbs. Who can resist natural ingredients? Elevate any dish with ease when you top it with this...

The post Pesto Vinaigrette appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Should You Make This Recipe?

Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of. This vinaigrette is easy, fresh, and pairs well with dozens of delicious dishes. 

  • This 5-minute pesto vinaigrette recipe is a great way to use fresh basil, especially if you’re growing your own fresh herbs. Who can resist natural ingredients?
  • Elevate any dish with ease when you top it with this herby and robust dressing. Whether you use pesto sauce for salad (or pasta salad!), to drizzle on pizza, or even to top grilled meat, your tastebuds will thank you.
Basil Pesto Salad dressing in a jar

Ingredients

For this pesto dressing recipe, gather fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, minced garlic, white wine vinegar, fresh lemon juice, parmesan cheese, kosher salt, black pepper, and extra virgin olive oil.

Ingredients for the recipe portioned from the top view

Substitutions & Variations

  • Nuts: Don’t have any pine nuts on hand? No problem! Swap out your pine nuts for almonds or even walnuts for an easy substitution.
  • Vinegar: Give your pesto vinaigrette sweeter, sharper, or more robust undertones by swapping out which vinegar you use. Simply substitute your white wine vinegar with an equal amount of red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar for a delectable Pesto Balsamic Dressing.
  • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought pesto, white wine vinegar, and parmesan cheese. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
  • Copycat Sweetgreen Pesto recipe: If you have ever dined at one of the Sweetgreen restaurant locations, you probably already know about their pesto dressing. It seems like Sweetgreen’s Pesto Vinaigrette recipe is very similar to mine except that they use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of dijon mustard to your basic lemon pesto dressing.
  • Make it vegan: To make a vegan version of this delicious recipe, all you need to do is use vegan parmesan. For a homemade substitution, I suggest using this recipe for vegan parmesan.

How to Make Pesto Dressing

Wondering how to make pesto vinaigrette? This 5-minute recipe for classic basil pesto dressing is as easy as it is fresh, and it comes together in just three steps.

a collage of photos showing how to make pesto vinaigrette
  1. Chop/Pulse the ingredients in a food processor: Place all the ingredients except the olive oil (i.e., fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper) into a food processor. Pulse the mixture 4-5 times for a rough chop.
  2. Add the olive oil: Turn on the food processor and, while it runs, drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop the machine 1-2 times while mixing to scrape the bowl’s sides. Continue running your food processor until the salad dressing is creamy (approx. 45 seconds).
  3. Season and serve: Taste your pesto salad sauce and add any additional seasoning. Give the mixture one more pulse, and then serve.

How to Store

This pesto salad dressing recipe is a delicious addition to any meal. With these simple storage tips, you can keep your leftover vinaigrette fresh for days.

  • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the fridge. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
  • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

Recipe Ideas to Use

Basil pesto vinaigrette is a delicious dressing that goes with just about anything. This topping adds a sumptuous flavor to countless dishes, from leafy green salads to hearty mains.

pasta salad in bowl using this basil salad dressing

FAQs

Pesto vinaigrette dressing is easy enough for even beginner chefs to prepare. Still, you can become an expert saucier in no time with these helpful FAQs!

How to turn pesto into salad dressing?

For an easy pesto vinaigrette salad dressing, mix ½ cup of leftover pesto, ¼ cup of white wine vinegar, and ¼ cup of parmesan cheese. It’s that easy!

What is in Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette?

Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette is made with apple cider vinegar, fresh basil, garlic, dijon mustard, parmesan cheese, pine nuts, and salt and pepper.

What is pesto dressing made of?

This basil pesto salad dressing recipe consists of fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, minced garlic, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, and olive oil.

Other Homemade Salad Dressing You Might Like:

If you try this Pesto Vinaigrette recipe or any other one of my homemade salad dressing recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Pesto Vinaigrette in a spoon
Print

Pesto Vinaigrette Recipe

Learn how to make pesto vinaigrette recipe to use in salads, sandwiches, and more. Made with everyday ingredients, this basil salad dressing is easy and quick to make.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 254kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups of fresh basil leaves loosely packed
  • cup pine nuts or sliced almonds
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons of lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons shredded parmesan cheese
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Place fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper into the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 4-5 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Turn the machine on and while it is running drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop and scrape once or twice and continue running the machine until the salad dressing is creamy, 45 seconds or so.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Give it one more pulse and serve.

Notes

  • This recipe yields 2/3 cup pesto salad dressing.
  • This is one of those recipes that you want to taste as you go. I listed 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt, but please give it a taste before serving to make sure that it is properly seasoned to your taste.
  • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought pesto. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
  • Pesto Vinaigrette Sweetgreen Recipe: For a version similar to Sweetgreen’s pesto vinaigrette recipe, use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of dijon mustard.
  • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the fridge. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
  • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

Nutrition

Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 336mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 501IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Pesto Vinaigrette appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/feed/ 2
How To Salt Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-salt-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-salt-eggplant/#comments Wed, 27 Apr 2022 21:02:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=50910 Why Salt Eggplant If you’re new to preparing eggplant for cooking, you might be wondering, “Is salting eggplant necessary?” The short answer is no. Because thanks to the advancements made in eggplant farming, most of the time, salting eggplant is not necessary. For most recipes, I simply slice up the veggie and get cooking! However, if we go back in time and look back at when people first began to...

The post How To Salt Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Salt Eggplant

If you’re new to preparing eggplant for cooking, you might be wondering, “Is salting eggplant necessary?” The short answer is no. Because thanks to the advancements made in eggplant farming, most of the time, salting eggplant is not necessary. For most recipes, I simply slice up the veggie and get cooking!

However, if we go back in time and look back at when people first began to cook eggplants, the vegetable had a bitter taste. They came up with this salting process to help get the bitterness out of the eggplant before cooking it, thereby making it more palatable.

person salting eggplant slices on a sheet pan

Since then, however, farmers have bred out much of eggplants’ signature bitterness. As Deborah Madison says in her cookbook New Vegetarian Cooking for Everyone (affiliate link):

“Eggplant that’s freshly picked, harvested before it’s full of seeds, and eaten within a few days is naturally sweet and doesn’t need salting.” 

Deborah Madison

In other words, fresh, young eggplants bought at the grocery store or farmer’s market likely don’t need to be salted. Even so, there are other times when salting eggplant may still be a good idea:

  • Salting eliminates bitter flavors that come from storing your eggplants too long or using older eggplants. Today’s eggplants may be sweeter, but they still have some bitter liquid inside, especially if they are not fresh.
  • Fried eggplant is crispier and more savory when it’s been pre-salted. When preparing eggplant for frying, the salting process ensures the vegetable absorbs less oil. As a result, taking the time to salt eggplant prior to frying yields perfectly seasoned fried eggplant with a silkier texture.
  • Salted eggplants are seasoned from the inside out. Translation: Their interiors will have the same savory, rich flavor as their exteriors. It is an easy way to make eggplant taste good.

In short: Do you need to salt eggplant before cooking? Not always. But it can’t hurt! 

Ingredients

To purge eggplant, you will need globe eggplants and salt.

Though I am using a globe eggplant—the thicker, more spherical kind of eggplant most often found in the U.S.—you can use this technique to salt other types of eggplant (such as Japanese eggplant).

How to Purge Eggplants

Preparing aubergine is a cinch when you have these two methods on hand. Whether you prefer sweating eggplant or prefer brining it, you’ll find all you need right here.

Method 1: Sweating Eggplants

The first method of salting eggplant—“sweating”—requires zero added liquid. Instead, a generous layer of salt does all the work. Now you can learn how to sweat eggplant in just five easy steps.

person washing, drying and slicing brinjal
  1. Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water and dry it with a kitchen towel. Then, slice off the stem and cut the eggplant as desired (both cubes and slices will work).
person showing how to tenderize aubergine by purging in a collage of images
  1. Sprinkle eggplant with salt: Generously sprinkle your slices with salt, being sure to cover both sides of the eggplant. I recommend using 1 to 2 teaspoons of kosher salt per eggplant depending on the size.

PRO TIP: The key to putting salt on eggplant is to coat the entire surface of the eggplant with a generous amount of salt. A minimum of one teaspoon of kosher salt is necessary for every medium-sized eggplant to draw out bitterness and add sufficient flavor. Furthermore, adding a good amount of salt will help tenderize the eggplant and keep its shape.

  1. Let the eggplant sit: Place the seasoned eggplant over a colander for 30 minutes to an hour. Once beads of moisture start to appear, rinse your eggplant slices under cold water and remove excess salt.
  2. Dry the eggplant: Layer a baking sheet with a couple of sheets of paper towels and arrange the drained eggplant slices on top. Then, take another sheet of paper towel and gently press each piece, removing as much excess moisture as possible. Repeat these steps with all remaining slices of eggplant.

Method 2: Brining Eggplants

Soaking eggplant in salt water—also known as “brining”—is another easy way to prepare eggplant. Make a bowl of salt water, add your eggplant slices, and let time work its magic in this simple process.

person showing how to salt eggplant using brining method in several photos
  1. Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water. Then, dry it with a kitchen towel and slice off its stem. Next, cut the eggplant as needed (either cubes or slices will work). 
  2. Make the saltwater bath: Fill a large bowl with cool water and stir in a tablespoon of kosher salt.
  3. Soak the eggplant: Place the vegetable pieces in the brine, submerging each slice of eggplant in the water. If necessary, you may place a small plate on top to ensure no pieces float to the surface. Let the eggplant soak in the salt water for 30 minutes to an hour.
  4. Drain the brine: Drain the eggplants and rinse them with cold water.
  5. Dry the salted eggplant: Line a baking sheet with paper towels, and place your drained slices on top in a single layer. Then, use a clean kitchen towel or paper towels to press down on the pieces, drying out the eggplant with gentle pressure.

How to Store

If you’re looking for easy meal prep, these expert storage tips are for you! Not a single bite of your brined eggplant will go to waste when you have this neat guide at your disposal.

  • Storage: Once you have prepared eggplant in brine or sweated your slices, store them in an airtight container. Your eggplant will remain fresh for 1-2 days.
  • To freeze: To freeze your prepared eggplant, place it in a plastic bag and squeeze out as much air as possible before sealing. The eggplant can remain in the freezer for up to a month. Let the eggplant thaw in the refrigerator for 24-48 hours before using.

FAQs

Want to know more about preparing eggplant for baking? Whether you’re curious about how to press eggplant or how to remove bitterness from eggplant, here are my answers to some of the most frequently asked questions.

How long should eggplant sweat?

Eggplants should sweat between 30 minutes and an hour. To check the doneness of your eggplant, look for little droplets of moisture on the vegetable’s surface.

How to remove water from eggplant?

To dry eggplant, all you need to do is blot your slices with paper towels (or a clean kitchen cloth). You may also line a cookie sheet with paper towels and arrange your eggplant pieces on top to remove excess water.

Do you rinse eggplant after salting?

Most people prefer to rinse their eggplant after salting it, but you’ll be fine without this extra step. Instead, you can simply blot excess salt with a paper towel or bypass this step entirely for a super well-seasoned eggplant.

Should you peel eggplant before cooking?

Whether you peel eggplant before cooking is a personal choice. The skin of an eggplant is edible and nutrient-rich. So, if removing the skin is not your thing that is totally fine.

Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

Now that you know how to salt and prepare eggplant for cooking, here are a few recipes you can use eggplant along with a few different ways of cooking it:

If you try any of these methods for salting eggplant, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment about your experience below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person salting eggplant from front view
Print

How To Salt Eggplant Recipe

Learn how to salt eggplant to remove its bitterness using two simple methods. Purging eggplant might be the easiest way to make it taste better. So, next time you are cooking an eggplant dish follow these steps to prepare your eggplant for a perfectly seasoned and bitter free recipe.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 1 eggplant
Calories 115kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 eggplant*
  • Kosher Salt

Instructions

Method 1: Sweating Eggplants

  • Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water and dry it with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Then, slice off the stem and cut the eggplant as desired.
  • Sprinkle eggplant with salt: Generously sprinkle eggplant slices* with one to two teaspoons of salt, being sure to cover season them on both sides.
  • All the eggplant slices sweat: Place the seasoned eggplant in a colander for 30 minutes to an hour. Once little droplets of moisture start to appear, rinse your eggplant slices under cold water to remove excess salt.
  • Pat-Dry the eggplant: Layer a baking sheet with a couple of sheets of paper towels and arrange the drained eggplant slices on top. Using another sheet of paper towel, gently press each piece to remove as much excess moisture as possible. Repeat these steps with all remaining slices of eggplant.

Method 2: Brining Eggplants (aka Soaking Eggplant in a Salt Water Bath)

  • Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water. Then, dry it with a kitchen towel and slice off its stem. Next, slice the eggplant as needed (either cubes or steaks/slices will work).
  • Make the salt water bath: Fill a large bowl with cold tap water and stir in a tablespoon of kosher salt.
  • Soak the eggplant: Place the eggplant slice in the brine, submerging each slice of eggplant in the water. If needed, place a small plate on top to ensure no pieces float to the surface. Let them soak for 30 minutes to an hour.
  • Drain and rinse them with cold water.
  • Dry brined eggplant slices: Line a sheet pan with a few sheets of paper towels, and place your drained slices on top in a single layer. Then, use a few paper towels to press down on the pieces, drying out the eggplant with gentle pressure.

Notes

  • I use widely available globe eggplants. However, you can salt other types of eggplants using this method.
  • *As you are salting the eggplant, make sure to coat the whole surface with salt. I use a teaspoon of kosher salt for a medium-sized globe eggplant. However, you can use more or less depending on the size of your eggplant.

Nutrition

Calories: 115kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 1049mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Salt Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-salt-eggplant/feed/ 8
Kale Avocado Salad https://foolproofliving.com/kale-and-avocado-salad-with-sweet-sour-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-and-avocado-salad-with-sweet-sour-dressing/#comments Wed, 23 Mar 2022 15:50:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=511 I am all about a healthy green salad. But there are times when I want to celebrate an ingredient – and that ingredient today is kale, which probably explains why I have so many kale recipes on my website. A few of the reader favorites are my Quinoa Kale Salad, Brussel sprouts kale salad, Kale and Apple Slaw, and this Kale Zucchini recipe. But I think this kale and avocado...

The post Kale Avocado Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I am all about a healthy green salad. But there are times when I want to celebrate an ingredient – and that ingredient today is kale, which probably explains why I have so many kale recipes on my website. A few of the reader favorites are my Quinoa Kale Salad, Brussel sprouts kale salad, Kale and Apple Slaw, and this Kale Zucchini recipe.

But I think this kale and avocado salad recipe is at the top of my list. Packed with dark leafy greens, healthy fats, and fresh lemon juice, it hits the spot every time. Trust me when I say, this salad will turn any kale-hater into a kale lover!

Kale and Avocado Salad in a bowl with utensils on the side.

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

Kale salad with avocado lemon dressing is a cinch to make. I know you will love it because:

  • Healthy salad and dietary friendly: This salad is wholesome, nutritious, gluten-free, vegan, vegetarian and low-carb.
  • Massaged kale is easier to eat and store: Once you learn how to massage kale, you’ll never go back to eating it raw (unless you prefer to!). It’s much easier to eat and lasts for days. Plus, avocado massaged kale tastes much better than its versions massaged with oil.
  • Easy to customize: This kale avocado lemon salad recipe is easy to make your own with a few simple ingredient swaps.

Ingredients

The kale avocado lemon salad ingredients come in two parts – the dressing and the salad.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view
  • For the dressing, you will need a ripe avocado, lemon juice, extra-virgin olive oil, garlic, kosher salt, and black pepper.
  • For the salad, gather together one bunch of kale and pine nuts.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Dressing: Replace the mashed avocado dressing – take good use of your food processor with avocado salad dressing (this version makes a deliciously creamy kale avocado salad) or lighten it up with a simple lemon salad dressing.
  • Citrus Juice or Vinegar: Experiment with acidic citrus juices (i.e. lime juice) or use apple cider vinegar instead.
  • Garlic: Use ⅛ teaspoon garlic powder instead of fresh garlic.
  • Kale: I used curly kale that was easy to find at my local grocery store. Red kale or Tuscan kale (also known as dinosaur kale) would work, too.
  • Nuts: Toasty pine nuts add a subtle crunch, but you can use sliced almonds or chopped walnuts. Pumpkin seeds, sunflower seeds, or hemp seeds would be a great nut-free alternative.

How to Massage Kale with Avocado Lemon Dressing

Clean hands are your best tool for this avocado-massaged kale salad recipe. Grab your biggest salad bowl and immerse yourself in plenty of greens.

a collage of photos showing how to make kale and avocado salad
  1. Mash the avocado: Place avocado, lemon juice, olive oil, garlic, salt, and black pepper in a large bowl. Using the back of a fork, mash the avocado and mix it with the rest of the ingredients. 
  2. Massage kale: Place kale in a large bowl and using clean hands, massage the kale with the avocado lemon dressing until leaves are covered with the dressing and softened. Give it a taste for seasoning and add if necessary. Set aside to rest.
  3. Toast nuts: Place your choice of nuts in an empty skillet and toast over medium heat, stirring frequently, until lightly browned. This happens really quickly so be sure to keep a close eye on them.
  4. Finish and serve: Sprinkle the kale and avocado salad with the now-toasted nuts (while they are still warm). Give it a big toss and serve immediately.

How to Store

This avocado and lemon salad will keep well in the fridge. After a few days, the kale starts to lose some of its vibrancy and the avocado takes on a bitter taste.

  • Make-Ahead: The avocado kale salad can be made 2 hours in advance and can be stored in the fridge until you are ready to serve it.
  • Storage: Thanks to the sturdy leaves of curly kale, this salad keeps well for upto three days as long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge.
  • Meal Prep: Make a batch, divide it in meal prep containers, and serve it for the next 3 days. 

How to Serve

This bruised kale salad recipe can be served in a number of ways. Some of my favorites include:

massaged kale salad with avocado in a bowl from the top view

Expert Tips

  • Remove the thick stems from kale. Simply hold the end of the kale leaf in one hand, then using your other hand, run your fingers in the opposite direction along the stem, removing the leaves as you go.
  • Cut the leaves into thin ribbons. Smaller pieces are easier to massage and eat than larger ones. Plus, they hold more of that creamy avocado dressing.
  • Use your hands. Clean hands work the best when destemming kale and massaging the leaves. A knife and tongs just don’t give you the same results.
  • Massage kale for at least 2 minutes. Raw kale leaves will start to break down and darken in color after about 2 minutes, but you can massage the leaves for as long as 3-4 minutes.
  • Lessen the time of the massaging process if looking to make ahead. The kale will get mushy in the fridge after a couple of days if massaged for too long. Stick to the 2-3 minute mark if planning to make ahead.
  • I do not recommend baby kale. A baby kale salad recipe will not give you the same results. Stick with sturdy, dark green, mature tender kale leaves.
  • Toast the nuts. I know it is an extra step but don’t skip on toasting the nuts. Believe me, toasted pine nuts taste much better.
  • A serving of this Kale Avocado Salad is 234 calories.

Other Salad Recipes You Might Also Enjoy:

If you are a fan of healthy green salads, you are at the right place. Below are a few recipes you might also like:

If you try this Massaged Kale Avocado Salad recipe or any of our other salad recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Kale and Avocado Salad in a bowl
Print

Kale Avocado Salad Recipe

This Kale and Avocado Salad recipe is made by massaging kale with ripe avocados and flavoring it with tangy lemon. Sprinkled with a handful of toasted pine nuts, it is a nutritious green salad perfect for any day of the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 234kcal

Ingredients

For The Avocado Lemon Dressing

  • 1 ripe avocado plus more as garnish
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad

  • 1 bunch kale destemmed and chopped (5-6 cups of kale)
  • ½ cup pine nuts sliced almonds, or chopped walnuts

Instructions

  • Place avocado, lemon juice, olive oil, garlic, salt, and black pepper in a large salad bowl. Using the back of a fork mash the avocado and mix it with the rest of the ingredients.
  • Add the chopped kale into the bowl and using clean hands massage the kale with the avocado lemon dressing until leaves are covered with the dressing and softened. Give it a taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Set it aside to rest.
  • Place your choice of nuts in an empty skillet and toast over medium heat, stirring frequently, until lightly browned. This happens really quickly so be sure to keep a close eye on it.
  • Sprinkle the kale and avocado salad with the now-toasted nuts (while they are still warm). Give it a big toss. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Serve.

Notes

  • Cut the leaves into thin ribbons. Smaller pieces are easier to massage and eat than larger ones. Plus, they hold more of that creamy avocado dressing.
  • Use your hands. Clean hands work the best when destemming kale and massaging the leaves. A knife and tongs just don’t give you the same results.
  • Massage kale for at least 2 minutes. Raw kale leaves will start to break down and darken in color after about 2 minutes, but you can massage the leaves for as long as 3-4 minutes.
  • Storage: Thanks to the sturdy leaves of curly kale, the leftovers of this kale salad keep well for up to three days as long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 234kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 302mg | Potassium: 410mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1503IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Kale Avocado Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-and-avocado-salad-with-sweet-sour-dressing/feed/ 8
Spring Mix Salad https://foolproofliving.com/spring-mix-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/spring-mix-salad/#respond Tue, 22 Mar 2022 16:27:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49307 Why Make This Recipe? When it comes to easy side dishes, I think we can all agree that simple spring green salad recipes can’t be beaten. Effortless to make and easy to pair, this salad recipe is worthy of putting on the weekly rotation. You can whip up this recipe for spring mix salad in just 15 minutes. With zero cooking and all-fresh ingredients, this dish might be the easiest...

The post Spring Mix Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Why Make This Recipe?

When it comes to easy side dishes, I think we can all agree that simple spring green salad recipes can’t be beaten. Effortless to make and easy to pair, this salad recipe is worthy of putting on the weekly rotation.

  • You can whip up this recipe for spring mix salad in just 15 minutes. With zero cooking and all-fresh ingredients, this dish might be the easiest recipe you’ll ever make.
  • Spring salad mix recipes are some of the most customizable sides out there. You won’t believe how many add-ins, salad dressings, and mixes there are to try.
  • This easy salad goes with everything—from gooey pasta dishes to grilled shrimp kabobs—making it the perfect side salad. 
Spring Mix Salad in a bowl with serving spoons on the side

What is in this Recipe?

My spring mix salad ingredients are among the freshest and most nutritious of any spring blend salad out there. Simply gather red onion, spring mix, cherry tomatoes, cucumber, radish, sunflower seeds, and goat cheese.

Ingredients for the recipe portioned in bowls

For the Lemon Balsamic Dressing, you’ll need balsamic vinegar, fresh lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, black pepper, and extra virgin olive oil. 

Salad dressing ingredients from the top view

Ingredient Substitutions

  • Salad dressings: In my opinion, Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette Dressing is the best dressing for spring mix. However, if you want to change which spring mix salad dressing you use, Lemon Vinaigrette and Maple Dijon Vinaigrette are tasty options.
  • Cheese: Add an irresistible creaminess to your spring greens salad by topping it off with crumbled goat cheese, feta cheese, or even fresh mozzarella.
  • Seeds and nuts: Though I use sunflower seeds in my spring green mix salad, you can also use pumpkin seeds, walnuts, pecans, and sliced almonds to give it a satisfying crunch. You can even opt for candied walnuts, candied pecans, or toasted almonds for extra-sumptuous flavor.
  • Maple syrup or honey: Want to give your spring green mix salad a delicious hint of sweetness? Simply add a teaspoon of maple syrup or honey to your tangy vinaigrette.

How to Make It

In less than 15 minutes and only four steps, this baby spring mix salad recipe comes together like magic! Even beginner chefs can make this garden-fresh side like a pro.

a collage of images showing how to make the recipe
  1. Mix the dressing: Mix together the salad dressing ingredients in a small bowl.
  2. Soak the red onion: Fill a bowl with hot tap water and submerge your sliced red onion. Let the onion sit for a few minutes before draining.
  3. Assemble the salad: In a large bowl, add the spring mix, cherry tomatoes, cucumber slices, and red onion slices. Then, drizzle the mixture with dressing and toss to combine.
  4. Garnish: Top off your salad with sunflower seeds and crumbled goat cheese. Serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

My spring mix salad recipe makes meal prep a piece of cake. Prepare each component of this easy recipe ahead of time, and it’ll be ready to serve in mere minutes.

  • Make ahead: To make this recipe in advance, prepare the vinaigrette dressing and salad ingredients and store them in separate, airtight containers for up to 2 days. Then, assemble your fresh spring blend salad right before serving.
  • Storage: Once prepared, this salad will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 1 day. However, keep in mind that as it sits it will get soggy and the lettuce greens will wilt.
person tossing the salad in a bowl from top view

Variations

One of my favorite parts about this nutritious side is how versatile it is. From filling add-ins to veggie substitutes, there’s no “wrong” way to build this delicious spring salad mix recipe.

  • Summer spring mix salad: Put a summery spin on your spring mix salad greens by adding other fresh vegetables, like blanched peas, roasted shiitake mushrooms or asparagus. Baked, air-fried, and even sauteed asparagus will add mouthwatering flavor to this tasty salad.
  • Spring mix salad with fruit: Nothing tastes better with salad than tart, juicy fruit. Make this salad with blueberry and goat cheese similar to my Spinach Blueberry Salad.
  • Spring mix and baby spinach salad recipe: If the lettuce in your spring mix doesn’t include spinach, why not add some yourself? Make this nutritious recipe even healthier by mixing in a cup of fresh baby spinach for your own spinach and spring mix.
  • Make it a meal-worthy salad with adding a grain: For spring mix salad recipe ideas that work as a main dish, Quinoa Salads are the way to go! Simply add a cup of cooked quinoa, bulgur, wild rice, or even black rice to this combination salad to make it a complete meal.
  • Spring Mix Salad with Avocado: Make this spring mix salad recipe with feta extra luxurious by topping it off with creamy, nutritious avocado. While you are add it, if you have some, add in some fresh herbs in there too.

What to Serve it With

Spring mix salads make a vibrant pair with dozens of main courses. In fact, baby greens are the perfect side for nearly any chicken, beef, or seafood recipe! Find my favorite pairings below.

Expert Tips

Healthy spring mix salad recipes are a cinch to make when you have these tricks on hand. Now you can cut down on prep time and make this delicious salad like a five-star chef.

  • Soak the red onion: If the raw red onion is too strong for your taste, you’re not alone. Soaking your red onion slices in hot tap water before adding them to the salad will help reduce their pungency. However, you can skip this step if you are short on time.
  • Make the dressing ahead of time: Cut your cooking time in half by preparing your dressing in advance. Simply store your prepared dressing in an airtight container and assemble the salad right before eating.
  • Buy prewashed spring mix: Eliminate unnecessary prep time by purchasing a prewashed spring mix.

FAQs

No guesswork is necessary for this simple salad recipe. Whether you want to know if spring mix comes without spinach or how to keep your salad fresh, this FAQ section is for you.

What lettuce is in spring mix?

Though brands vary, the types of lettuce in spring mix generally include baby lettuce and spinach. Other spring mix greens may consist of romaine, oak leaf, chard, arugula, endive, and radicchio.

What is the purple lettuce in spring mix?

This purple lettuce is usually radicchio, red romaine lettuce, or red oak leaf lettuce.

Do I need to wash supermarket prewashed spring mix before using it?

No, you can consume prewashed spring mix right away. Washing prewashed lettuce can actually introduce new bacteria from your kitchen to the mix.

Is Spring Mix Salad healthy?

Yes! These leafy greens are both low-calorie and nutrient-dense. They even promote bone strength, reduce your risk of Alzheimer’s, and support a healthy heart.

How to keep Spring Mix Salad fresh?

For best results, toss in your dressing right before serving. The leaves in spring mix are so delicate that too much time in the dressing will turn them soggy.

Does spring mix have spinach?

Though many spring mixes contain spinach, some don’t. Therefore, I recommend checking your bag of spring mix to see if it comes without spinach.

Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

Below are a few of the most popular green salad recipes on the blog:

With so many spring mix salad ideas on the internet, I hope you give this quick, easy, and absolutely delicious recipe a try. If you end up making it please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Spring Mix Salad is placed in a bowl from top view
Print

Spring Mix Salad Recipe

This Spring Mix Salad recipe is an easy green salad made with spring mix. Flavored with homemade lemon balsamic dressing, this is a great side dish that you can serve with any meal.
Course Salad, Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 253kcal

Ingredients

Salad Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons freshly squeezed lemon juice
  • 1 clove garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

For The Salad

  • ½ red onion sliced thinly
  • 1 package spring mix 5oz.
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 1 medium-size cucumber peeled and sliced
  • 2 – 3 small radishes sliced
  • ½ cup sunflower seeds pumpkin seeds, walnuts, or sliced almonds
  • ½ cup crumbled goat cheese or crumbled feta cheese – omit for vegan

Instructions

  • Mix together the salad dressing ingredients in a bowl.
  • Place sliced red onion in a bowl with hot tap water and let it sit for a few minutes. Drain.
  • To assemble the salad, in a large bowl place spring mix, cherry tomatoes, cucumber slices, and red onion slices. Drizzle with the dressing and give it a gentle toss to make sure all the ingredients are coated with the dressing.
  • Top it off with the sunflower seeds and crumbled goat cheese. Serve.

Notes

  • Salad dressing: In this recipe, I used my lemon balsamic dressing. However, you can also use my Lemon Salad Dressing or Maple Dijon Vinaigrette.
  • Make-ahead instructions: To make this recipe in advance, prepare the vinaigrette dressing and salad ingredients and store them in separate, airtight containers for up to 2 days. Then, assemble your fresh spring blend salad right before serving.
  • Storage: Once prepared, this salad will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 1 day. However, keep in mind that as it sits it will get soggy and the lettuce greens will wilt.

Nutrition

Calories: 253kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 594mg | Potassium: 351mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 250IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Spring Mix Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/spring-mix-salad/feed/ 0
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Wed, 09 Mar 2022 19:33:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Why Should You Try This Recipe? If you’ve ever wondered how to make the kale apple slaw at Tropical Smoothie vegan, this 15-minute recipe is for you! Versatile and delicious, this side is an automatic fan favorite. Vegan, gluten-free, nutritious, and packed with colorful veggies, kale apple carrot slaw is one of the healthiest sides you can prepare. Every bite of kale is packed with antioxidants, Vitamin C, and Vitamin...

The post Kale Apple Slaw appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

If you’ve ever wondered how to make the kale apple slaw at Tropical Smoothie vegan, this 15-minute recipe is for you! Versatile and delicious, this side is an automatic fan favorite.

  • Vegan, gluten-free, nutritious, and packed with colorful veggies, kale apple carrot slaw is one of the healthiest sides you can prepare. Every bite of kale is packed with antioxidants, Vitamin C, and Vitamin K, making this recipe as healthy as my other yummy kale salads: Kale Avocado Salad, Apple Salad, Quinoa Kale Salad, Kale Harvest Salad, and more!
  • It is a great way to get more kale in your diet. Because kale is so durable, it won’t go limp in the vinegar-based dressing like soggy cabbage coleslaw.
  • No other copycat Tropical Smoothie kale apple slaw recipes are as tasty as this one. Lucious apples, crisp kale, and tart vinaigrette make an incomparable pair in this foolproof recipe.
  • Meal prep is a cinch with this kale and apple salad. Prepare it up to two days ahead for the perfect side dish for burgers, tacos, grilled shrimp, and more.
Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

Ingredients Notes

There are two sets of ingredients in this Kale Apple Slaw recipe; the vinaigrette and the slaw ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe are portioned and photographed from the top view

For the Maple Dijon Vinaigrette, you’ll need maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, extra-virgin olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper.

For the kale slaw, gather red onion, curly kale, carrots, red cabbage, fuji apple, and sunflower seeds.

Ingredient Additions & Variations

My recipe is just one tasty way to put together this easy dish. Switch up which basic ingredients you use to keep this apple slaw as fresh and creative as possible.

  • Maple syrup: I use maple syrup in this recipe to keep it vegan. However, you can also substitute maple syrup for orange juice as a natural sweetener. You can also use honey to make kale and cabbage salad with creamy honey mustard dressing.
  • Apple cider vinegar: Don’t have apple cider vinegar on hand? Don’t worry! Red wine vinegar works just as well for giving this recipe its irresistible bite.
  • Apple: Any apple, cubed or sliced, will work for this recipe. Fuji apples, pink lady apples, and even Granny Smith apples are tasty options.
  • Kale: For this nutritious salad, I use curly kale. However, lacinato kale —also known as dinosaur kale or Tuscan kale—will also work.
  • Nuts: Though I garnish this dish with sunflower seeds, any nuts or candied nuts would be a great addition. Delicious, filling, and protein-packed—who wouldn’t want to add nuts to this apple mixture?
  • Red cabbage: If you’re not a fan of red cabbage, you can use shredded Brussels sprouts instead for a healthy, robust addition. Even better, you can make this step extra easy when you learn how to shred Brussels sprouts like a pro.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

Learning how to make kale and apple slaw is a breeze for beginner and expert chefs alike. Simple, quick, and delicious, this 15-minute dish will become one of your new favorite recipes.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette
  1. Prepare the Maple Dijon salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture, and let them steep in the liquid while you prepare the rest of the ingredients.
Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos
  1. Prepare the salad: In a large bowl, add the kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle the veggies with the maple apple cider vinaigrette dressing and red onion. Then, use your hands to toss and lightly massage the salad ingredients until your kale leaves soften. Your dressing should be evenly distributed throughout the salad when finished.
tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl
  1. Serve: Top off your salad with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture once more and serve.

How to Serve

There are countless ways to serve this Tropical Smoothie Cafe kale & apple slaw. Whether you serve it as a stand-alone salad or alongside a meaty main, it’ll give any meal a healthy twist.

  • By itself: Serve this kale slaw as a big, healthy salad, and you’ll have mouths watering in no time. Simply add grain to make this meal extra filling. Anything from quinoa to bulgur wheat, black rice to wild rice, will work! And if you want to treat yourself, sprinkle it with a few tablespoons of shredded parmesan cheese at the end.
  • With shrimp: Kale slaw makes a great side dish for smoky and succulent grilled shrimp. Try this recipe alongside shrimp kabobs, and your tastebuds will thank you.
  • With tacos: The garden-fresh bite of this kale slaw is the perfect accompaniment for Flank Steak Tacos, Beef Brisket Tacos, and even Quinoa Black Bean Tacos.

How to Store

Few recipes make meal prep as easy as this kale apple salad. Now you can expertly plan menus and not let a single bite go to waste when you put together this flavorful dish.

  • Make ahead: You can prepare your Maple Dijon Vinaigrette up to 2 days in advance and store it in an airtight container or mason jar. Then, put together the rest of the apple salad recipe on the day you wish to eat it. Assembly only takes 5 minutes! 
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.
person tossing kale slaw from top view

Expert Tips

To make this Tropical Smoothie kale apple slaw recipe as delicious as the Cafe does, all you need are these pro tips! Find all you need to make this recipe as tasty as possible right here.

  • Steep the red onion: Letting your red onion soak in the vinaigrette will give them a great texture and make them less bitter. This step ensures that red onion gives your salad a robust flavor without being overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest. This process is also used in my Kale Avocado Salad to make it as succulent and flavorful as possible.

Other Kale Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

Think it can’t get better than this kale apple salad from the Tropical Smoothie Cafe? Think again! These other kale recipes are just as nutritious, delicious, and easy to make.

If you try this Kale Apple Slaw recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

Kale Apple Slaw recipe like you find at Tropical Smoothie Cafe made in 15 minutes! Vegan & gluten-free, it’s a great recipe to serve by itself for a healthy and nutritious meal or to serve as a side dish with tacos and meat dishes.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons real maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Notes

  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 401mg | Potassium: 752mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 15412IU | Vitamin C: 138mg | Calcium: 193mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Kale Apple Slaw appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Maple Dijon Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/maple-dijon-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/maple-dijon-dressing/#respond Wed, 09 Mar 2022 19:25:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49003 It is no secret that I am on a mission to help you never have to buy a salad dressing from the store again. Today’s recipe, Maple Dijon Salad Dressing, is the newest recipe to my collection of homemade salad dressing recipes. If you are new to making your own homemade vinaigrette recipes, be sure to also check out my Lemon Dijon Dressing, Lemon Salad Dressing, Yogurt Salad Dressing, and...

The post Maple Dijon Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

It is no secret that I am on a mission to help you never have to buy a salad dressing from the store again. Today’s recipe, Maple Dijon Salad Dressing, is the newest recipe to my collection of homemade salad dressing recipes.

If you are new to making your own homemade vinaigrette recipes, be sure to also check out my Lemon Dijon Dressing, Lemon Salad Dressing, Yogurt Salad Dressing, and Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette recipe

Spoon of Maple-Dijon Vinaigrette in a jar

Why Should You Make This Recipe?

This maple mustard dressing recipe is an easy recipe that takes less than 5 minutes to make. Below are a few other reasons why it is worth a try:

  • You know what goes in there: A great salad starts with a great dressing. Most store-bought dressings are made with low-quality ingredients, added sugar, and preservatives. When you make your own homemade salad dressing, you know everything that goes into it. Plus, it is such a simple dressing that you can make with basic pantry staples.
  • It stores well: Make a batch of this maple mustard vinaigrette as a part of your meal prep, keep it in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) in the fridge, and use it throughout the week. 
  • The perfect balance of sweet, savory, and tangy all at the same time: While most people consider this vinaigrette to be an all-purpose fall harvest salad dressing, I use it throughout the year, especially in some of my favorite salads that use fresh or dried fruit as an ingredient.

Recipe Ingredients

The ingredient list for this maple salad dressing consists of just a few simple ingredients that you probably already have in your pantry. 

ingredients for the recipe portioned in bowls from top view

So, go grab pure maple syrup, dijon mustard, fresh garlic, apple cider vinegar, extra virgin olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

Helpful Notes on Ingredients & Substitutions:

  • Maple Syrup: If you can get your hands on some delicious Vermont maple syrup, this is the best time to use it. 
  • Honey instead of maple syrup: If you are not a fan of maple flavor, you can use honey instead of maple syrup to turn this recipe into a honey dijon vinaigrette (just like I did in my Mixed Bean Salad recipe).
  • Dijon mustard: I am a fan of the tangy flavor of dijon mustard, but this maple vinaigrette would also be delicious with grainy mustard. 
  • Balsamic Vinegar or Red Wine Vinegar: If you can’t get your hands on apple cider vinegar, you can use red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar instead. The flavor profile might be slightly different, but it would still be delicious. 

How To Make This Recipe?

The process of making this maple dijon salad dressing could not be more straightforward. 

Two photos showing how to make the recipe

Simply place all ingredients in a bowl and give it a whisk until creamy. Alternatively, you can place everything in a mason jar, put the lid on and give it a vigorous shake.

How To Store?

The best way to store this maple dijon mustard dressing is to put it in a jar with a tight-fitting lid in the fridge for up to a week. 

Be sure to give it a good shake before using.

Ways To Use This Vinaigrette Dressing

As I mentioned earlier, this maple cider vinaigrette recipe is perfect to use in pretty much any green hearty salad recipe. Below are a few ways to help you get started:

Maple Vinaigrette in a glass bowl with vegetables around it

Expert Recipe Tips

  • Use a Mason Jar: I keep a few small mason jars on hand to store my homemade salad dressings. They are perfect for everyday use and store dressings well in the fridge.
  • Multiply the recipe: This maple mustard vinaigrette recipe can be multiplied if you want to make a big batch and use it in every one of your salads throughout the week.
  • Adjust the recipe according to your taste buds: The recipe below uses equal parts of maple syrup and apple cider vinegar. If you are after a more tangy dressing, you can use a little bit more vinegar. Start with an additional half tablespoon apple cider vinegar and adjust as necessary.
  • Make it a Maple Dijon Sauce: If you are more after a sauce consistency (perhaps for using it as a dipping sauce), I would recommend using double the amount of maple syrup and dijon mustard and using the half amount of olive oil with the rest of the ingredients being the same.

Other Homemade Salad Dressing Recipes You Might Like

I hope you add this Dijon Maple Vinaigrette Dressing to your favorite salad dressings collection and include it as a part of your weekly meal plan. Below are a few other recipes you might also like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to give it a star rating and/or leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Maple Dijon Salad dressing in a spoon over a jar
Print

Maple Dijon Dressing Recipe

Maple dijon salad dressing recipe made with just a few basic ingredients in 5 minutes. This is a great vinaigrette recipe to use in salads, grain bowls, and everything in between
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, minced garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and black pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar.
  • Give it a whisk (or a vigorous shake). Taste for seasoning and add in more if necessary.

Notes

  • This recipe makes a little less than 1/2 cup maple dijon salad dressing.
  • Store it in a jar with a tight-fitting lid in the fridge for up to a week.
  • Use it in green leafy salads, grain bowls, and more.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 335mg | Potassium: 38mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Maple Dijon Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/maple-dijon-dressing/feed/ 0
Healthy Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream https://foolproofliving.com/blue-cheese-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/blue-cheese-dip/#respond Sun, 06 Feb 2022 06:57:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2340 If you’re looking for a sweet dip recipe to end the night, make sure to include yogurt fruit dip alongside strawberry and pear slices as part of your Game Day spread. One of my favorite game day recipes is this slow-baked chicken wings recipe. While it is delicious by itself, it is better when served with a dip that I can serve with vegetables on the side. This is how...

The post Healthy Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

If you’re looking for a sweet dip recipe to end the night, make sure to include yogurt fruit dip alongside strawberry and pear slices as part of your Game Day spread.

One of my favorite game day recipes is this slow-baked chicken wings recipe. While it is delicious by itself, it is better when served with a dip that I can serve with vegetables on the side. This is how I ended up with this blue cheese dip recipe. It is your usual blue cheese dip but with a healthy twist! It’s creamy, tangy, crumbly, and savory, with just the right amount of heat and it does not include an ounce of sour cream. All the blue cheese lovers will go crazy for this one.

Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream served with vegetables on the side

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

I love any recipe that allows the ingredients to shine. I know you’ll love it because:

  • It requires only 8 simple ingredients – most of them already tucked inside your pantry and fridge.
  • Healthy and high quality ingredients make a dip that will out beat any grocery store bought brand.
  • One bowl and 5 minutes is all you need to have this easy dip recipe at the ready once party time comes along.
  • It’s easily customizable to suit your tastes and can be made in small batches or doubled or tripled depending on how many guests you have coming over.

Ingredients

The ingredient list for this creamy blue cheese dip requires no sour cream and no buttermilk. Gather together plain yogurt, vegan or regular mayo, garlic, lemon juice, Tabasco sauce, salt, black pepper, and blue cheese.

ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view

Ingredient Substitutions & Notes

  • Yogurt: I originally made this recipe with fat-free plain yogurt, but have come to realize the taste and quality of full-fat yogurt is worth a few extra calories. Greek yogurt would make for an extra thick consistency but any plain (unsweetened) yogurt would work.
  • Mayo: I prefer the taste of vegan mayo, but regular mayo works just as well. Light mayo doesn’t offer the same taste or consistency.
  • Garlic: Use a teaspoon garlic powder or even onion powder if you’re in a pinch.
  • Lemon Juice: Swap out the fresh lemon juice for fresh lime juice or apple cider vinegar.
  • Hot Sauce: Omit the hot sauce completely or swap it out for another favorite, such as Frank’s or Cholula.
  • Blue Cheese: Seek out a wedge of high-quality, crumbly blue cheese. A few different kinds of blue cheese include Gorgonzola, Maytag blue, Stilton, or Roquefort. Crumble it with your fingertips when you get home.

How to Make

I can assure you, this is the best blue cheese dressing recipe that will be ready before you can say, “party time.” And if you think you can not make a blue cheese dressing with no sour cream think again, because it is super easy:

Person showing how to make the recipe
  1. Prepare dip: Place yogurt, mayo, garlic, lemon juice, Tabasco sauce (if using), salt, and pepper in a medium bowl. Give it a big stir. Add the blue cheese. Taste for additional salt and adjust if necessary.
  2. Store: Transfer to a serving bowl, cover, and chill until you are ready to serve.
  3. Serve: Set out on a large platter alongside freshly cut vegetables, bread, chips, pretzels, or spicy buffalo wings.

Serving Suggestions

This creamy, cooling and easy blue cheese dipping sauce work wonders with spicy hot chicken wings, but some of my other recommendations include:

  • Freshly cut vegetables, like carrots, broccoli, celery sticks, tomatoes, and cauliflower or drizzle over a wedge salad
  • Bread cubes, like pumpernickel, whole wheat, sourdough, or rye
  • Chips, such as Kettle cooked, tortilla chips, or pita chips
  • Pretzels of any shape and size

How to Make Ahead and Store

  • Make Ahead Instructions: This veggie dip actually tastes better after chilling for a few hours in the fridge. Make it the night before or morning of, cover with plastic wrap, and store in the fridge.
  • Storage Instructions: To store leftover blue cheese dip, simply transfer to an airtight container and keep for up to 5 days.

Variations

A few additional ingredients can really make this blue cheese sauce one to call your own. Some of my favorites include:

  • Herbs: Add a few tablespoons of freshly minced herbs, such as fresh parsley, dill, or chives.
  • Bacon: Add up to ½ cup crumbled cooked bacon, reserving a few tablespoons for garnish.
  • Onions: Whip up a batch of caramelized onion, finely chop, and stir right in with the remaining ingredients for a fun onion and blue cheese dip recipe.
Healthy blue cheese dip served with vegetables on the side

Expert Tips

  • Use high quality ingredients. Since this recipe requires minimal ingredients, the type of blue cheese matters. Look for a northern Italy or imported blue cheese wedge for the best homemade dressing.
  • Opt for full-fat everything. I used to make this dip with non-fat yogurt, but have come to appreciate the added texture and creaminess of full-fat. Go for full-fat mayo as well.
  • Make at least a few hours or one day in advance. This allows for the ingredients to marry together, making the dip taste so much better.
  • Adjust the quantity of blue cheese. Feel free to add more or less blue cheese crumbles depending on how much you like it.
  • Make it a chunky or smooth dip. This makes a chunky blue cheese dip, with big chunks of cheese throughout. For a smoother consistency, mash the blue cheese with the back of a fork in a separate bowl before adding to the yogurt mixture or whiz it all together in a food processor.

FAQs

What does blue cheese dip taste like?

It is the perfect balance of creamy, cooling, tangy, sharp, and spicy. Give it a stronger flavor with more blue cheese or turn down the spice with less hot sauce, the choice is up to you.

How do you thicken blue cheese dip?

Thicken the dip by first mashing the cheese in a separate bowl and blending it in, or adding more blue cheese crumbles. Allowing it to sit in the fridge for a few hours will help it stay thick upon serving.

What’s the difference between blue cheese dip and dressing?

Blue cheese dip vs dressing comes down to consistency. Blue cheese dressing is simply a thinner version of dip. To turn it into dressing, thin it out with a few tablespoons of whole milk.

How long does homemade blue cheese dressing last?

When stored covered or in an airtight container in the fridge, homemade blue cheese dip will last for 5 days. When serving, keep it out at room temperature for no longer than 2 hours. If the dip develops an off-color or odor after a few days, that means it’s time to throw it out.

Other Yogurt Based Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Blue Cheese Dip with No Sour Cream recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person dipping into blue cheese dip with no sour cream with a broccoli
Print

Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream Recipe

A healthier blue cheese dip/dressing made with yogurt instead of sour cream. Even though it is lighter it is still super delicious and great to serve with chicken wings or as a blue cheese dip by itself.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 170kcal

Ingredients

  • 1/2 cup plain yogurt preferably full fat
  • 1/4 cup mayonnaise or vegan mayo
  • 1-2 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2-3 dashes Tabasco Sauce or any hot sauce optional
  • 1/2 cup blue cheese crumbled
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon coarse black pepper

Instructions

  • Place yogurt, mayonnaise, garlic, lemon juice, and Tabasco sauce (if using) in a medium bowl. Give it a stir. Add the blue cheese.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in salt and black pepper.
  • Chill, covered, until you are ready to serve.
  • Serve with freshly cut carrots, broccoli, celery sticks, tomatoes, and/or chicken wings.

Notes

  • Be sure to give it a taste before adding salt. Most blue cheese has an ample amount of salt so it is important to give it a taste before adding more.
  • Make ahead: This veggie dip actually tastes better after chilling for a few hours in the fridge. Make it the night before or morning of, cover with plastic wrap, and store in the fridge.
  • Storing Leftovers: To store leftover blue cheese dip, simply transfer to an airtight container and keep for up to 5 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 170kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 630mg | Potassium: 121mg | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 129IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Healthy Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blue-cheese-dip/feed/ 0
4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/#comments Fri, 04 Feb 2022 22:00:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48350 Why Make This Recipe? This fast, easy guacamole recipe comes together in a cinch. With simple preparation, a few minimal ingredients, and a creamy, snackable taste, it’s the perfect dish for avocado lovers, large crowds, and even kids. Ingredients As the name suggests, you will only need 4 ingredients for this easy guac recipe. So, gather Hass avocado, garlic, kosher salt, and fresh lime juice. Since the main ingredient in...

The post 4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Why Make This Recipe?

This fast, easy guacamole recipe comes together in a cinch. With simple preparation, a few minimal ingredients, and a creamy, snackable taste, it’s the perfect dish for avocado lovers, large crowds, and even kids.

  • This basic recipe only takes 4 ingredients and 5 minutes to make, making it the ultimate beginner-level recipe.
  • Gluten-free, low-carb, and vegan, this healthy recipe tastes as good as it is good for you. This avocado-based dish packs a ton of essential nutrients, such as vitamin B6, healthy fats, and potassium.
  • This mild guacamole recipe is kid-friendly since it doesn’t have any spicy jalapeño or large chunks of onion. However, it’s easy to jazz up with other zesty, fresh, and spicy ingredients. More on that below.
  • You can easily make this 4-ingredient guacamole recipe for a crowd by multiplying the recipe. Doubling—or even tripling—this recipe is easy to feed a large group.
4 Ingredient guacamole from the top view served with tortilla chips

Ingredients

As the name suggests, you will only need 4 ingredients for this easy guac recipe. So, gather Hass avocado, garlic, kosher salt, and fresh lime juice.

Since the main ingredient in guacamole is avocado, it’s important to select the best kind. In my opinion, the best avocados for guacamole are Hass avocados because of their creamy flesh, rich taste, and protective skin.

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a kitchen counter

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

Whether you make this recipe a game-day snack or a condiment for your favorite Mexican meal, there are countless ways to make it yours. Adding flavor is a snap with these main ingredients.

Substitutions:

  • Garlic powder: Garlic powder is an easy, pantry-ready substitute for fresh garlic in this guacamole recipe. 
  • Lemon juice: Don’t like the taste of limes? Lemon juice will give your guac the same vibrancy without any unwanted bitter taste. You can even omit the extra juice for an easy 3 ingredient guacamole recipe.

Optional add-ins:

The beauty of this healthy guacamole recipe is that you can make it even more delicious with one or more of these optional add-ins. Simply chop them up and add them in as you are making your guacamole.

Easy guacamole with optional toppings like onion, cilantro, tomatoes and jalapenos
  • Red onion: Red onion is just the ingredient you need for guacamole that packs a punch. Pungent and crisp, this add-in will take your guac to the next level. And if you want to take it up a notch, try adding a tablespoon of my Mexican Pickled Onions.
  • Fresh tomato or fresh cherry tomato salsa (pico de gallo): These additional ingredients will give your guacamole brilliant color, juicy texture, and a garden-fresh taste that’s out of this world.
  • Jarred salsa: Could you eat salsa by the spoonful? Adding a little of this tasty condiment will give your guacamole a layer of savory, piquant flavor.
  • Cilantro: Fresh and earthy, this herb will bring out all the green flavors of your homemade guacamole. One of the best ways to enliven your guac recipes is to sprinkle a handful of fresh cilantro on top of the guacamole.
  • Jalapeño: If you love spicy foods, then jalapeno is the ingredient you’ve been looking for. This bright pepper will make every bite of your guac explode in your mouth.
  • Ground cumin: Want to add some depth to your four-ingredient guacamole? This rich spice will give any dish a rich, warm, and earthy layer.

How To Make This Recipe?

Ready in five minutes, this easy four-ingredient guacamole recipe is a lifesaver for anyone looking for a quick, delicious fix. Whip up this dish in no time and without the messy clean-up.

Person showing how to make four ingredient guacamole recipe with step by step photos
  1. Prepare the avocados: Peel, pit, and cube your ripe Hass avocado, and put the cubes in a medium bowl. Then, use a potato masher or a fork to mash the cubes until smooth.
  2. Add the rest of the ingredients: Add the garlic, salt, and lime juice to the avocado puree. Stir the mixture until it’s thoroughly combined. You can make it super smooth or leave it chunky depending on your preference. Taste for seasoning and add in more if preferred.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

With a working fridge and an airtight container, there’s no reason to let a bite of this basic guacamole go to waste. Meal prep and leftover storage will be a breeze with these handy tips.

A collage of photos showing how to store guacamole
  • Make-Ahead and Storage: You can make your four ingredient guac up to one day in advance. Evenly spread the guacamole in an airtight container and cover its surface with a thin yet visible layer of water, lemon juice, or lime juice. Then, cover the container with a layer of plastic wrap, pressing the plastic flush against the surface of the guacamole. Once all air bubbles have been removed and the container is sealed, store the guacamole in the fridge. When ready to eat, remove the liquid and enjoy!
  • Freezing: Unlike guacamole recipes with water-filled ingredients, like tomatoes, onions, and jalapenos, this simple recipe freezes wonderfully. Just store it in an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. Your leftover guacamole will stay fresh for up to three months.

Expert Tips

This 4 avocado guacamole recipe is super simple to make, but you make your life even easier with these pro tips. Find all the scrumptious secrets about my homemade guac right here.

  • Serve your guacamole at room temperature. Not only do ripe avocados have a better flavor when served at room temperature, but cold guacamole is also harder to scoop. Plus, this recipe’s fresh, mild flavors come out when served at room temperature. 
  • Multiply the recipe for an easy dish to serve a crowd. No one has to lose out on this savory dish. Make sure everyone gets their fill by multiplying this recipe to satisfy as many mouths as your table can handle.

How to Use?

It doesn’t matter whether you make this simple guacamole recipe for nachos, serve it with chili, or eat it by the spoonful. This tasty recipe is guaranteed to stun no matter how you serve it.

  • By itself: Serve this delicious dip with tortilla chips or raw veggies for a healthy snack you can make in minutes. Take the stress out of party menus and afternoon pick-me-ups when you have this simple recipe at your fingertips.
  • With nachos: Warm, cheesy, and bursting with savory flavor, this Mexican classic is the perfect pair with guacamole. Dollop your 5-minute dip atop my layered Chicken Nachos and prepare yourself for a heap of compliments to the chef!
  • With tacos: Guacamole, and tacos? Sounds like a match made in heaven! This mild topping amplifies every bite of savory, rich, and spicy tacos. Try it alongside my Flank Steak Tacos or Brisket Tacos for a meaty meal that will fill you in minutes. Or, serve this good guac with Black Bean Quinoa Tacos for a gluten-free dish vegetarians will adore.
  • With quesadillas: Take your ooey-gooey quesadilla to the next level by serving it alongside a bowl of fresh, flavorful guacamole. Serve this condiment alongside my rich, buttery Spinach Quesadillas or Chicken Quesadilla Cake, and your tastebuds will thank you.
  • To top off chili or burrito bowls: Want to add a rich, creamy taste to your favorite Mexican bowl? Spoon some guacamole on a bowl of hot, smoky chili—like my White Chicken Chili or Vegetarian Chili—or atop homemade Vegan Burrito Bowls to bring out every layer of flavor.
  • Make Avocado Toast or a Burger: If you have any leftovers, simply spread it on a piece of toast the next day and top it off with a fried egg for a delicious and healthy breakfast. Or use it to layer an Avocado Bacon Burger during the BBQ season.
  • With Margaritas: What is better than a bowl of guacamole served with margaritas? Try my Pineapple Margaritas or Blueberry Margaritas to treat yourself with some Mexican deliciousness.
Person scooping guac with a chip from the top view

FAQs

Have more questions about this five-star recipe? Make this mild guacamole recipe easy with this collection of most-asked questions. You’ll be an avocado expert in no time. 

Is it safe to eat avocado after it turns brown?

Yes! Though brown avocados may not look appetizing, the browning process results from a chemical reaction when avocado flesh touches to air—a non-toxic process known as oxidation. Avocados can sit out for several days before spoiling.

Is guacamole good for you?

Guacamole has tons of health benefits. This avocado-based recipe has many vitamins, healthy fats, and potassium, among countless other essential nutrients.

  • How many avocados for guacamole for 4?
  • As a general rule, I recommend using one avocado per person. Therefore, you should use four avocados to serve four people.

  • How do you make guacamole for nachos?
  • To make this dish for nachos, follow the recipe as written. Then, put dollops of guacamole on top of your nachos or in a side dish right before serving.

    Similar Recipes You Might Like:

    If you are a fan of quick and easy appetizers like this guacamole recipe here are a few more recipes that you might also like:

    If you try this 4 ingredient guacamole recipe or any other one of our easy Mexican recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    4 Ingredient guacamole served in a bowl from the top view
    Print

    4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe

    This easy 4-ingredient guacamole recipe is made by mixing together ripe avocados, garlic, lime and salt. It is not only the best but also the easiest appetizer you can make in 5 minutes for your next Mexican fiesta.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 326kcal

    Ingredients

    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • 4 large ripe Hass avocados

    Instructions

    • Mix together garlic, lime juice, and salt in a large bowl.
    • Cut the avocados in half and carefully remove the pit. Scoop out the avocados and place them into the bowl.
    • Using a potato masher or the back of a fork mash the avocados until it reaches to your desired level of chunkiness.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

    Video

    Notes

    • Salt: I used Kosher salt but you can also use table salt or sea salt.
    • Make-Ahead and Storage: You can make this recipe one day in advance. Evenly spread the guacamole in an airtight container and cover its surface with a thin yet visible layer of water, lemon juice, or lime juice. Then, cover the container with a layer of plastic wrap, pressing the plastic flush against the surface of the guacamole. Once all air bubbles have been removed and the container is sealed, store the guacamole in the fridge. When ready to eat, remove the liquid and enjoy!
    • Freezing: Unlike guacamole recipes with water-filled ingredients, like tomatoes, onions, and jalapeños, this simple recipe freezes wonderfully. Just store it in an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. Your leftover guacamole will stay fresh for up to three months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 326kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 305mg | Potassium: 990mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 297IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

    The post 4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/feed/ 8
    Blueberry Salad with Spinach and Feta https://foolproofliving.com/blueberry-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/blueberry-salad/#comments Wed, 21 Jul 2021 14:45:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25314 Today’s recipe, Blueberry Salad, is a celebration of the blueberry season and local farmer’s markets. I have been joined by Yankee Candle’s Farmers Market Collection to enhance the experience and help me bring the farmer’s market home with me. If you are a fan of savory fresh fruit salads such as my Apple Salad, Strawberry Spinach Salad, Peach Avocado Salad, and Watermelon Salad, I am pretty sure you will enjoy...

    The post Blueberry Salad with Spinach and Feta appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    Today’s recipe, Blueberry Salad, is a celebration of the blueberry season and local farmer’s markets. I have been joined by Yankee Candle’s Farmers Market Collection to enhance the experience and help me bring the farmer’s market home with me. If you are a fan of savory fresh fruit salads such as my Apple Salad, Strawberry Spinach Salad, Peach Avocado Salad, and Watermelon Salad, I am pretty sure you will enjoy this recipe as well.

    Packed with juicy blueberries, baby spinach, crunchy pecans, and creamy feta cheese and drizzled with a simple lemon vinaigrette, this spinach and blueberry salad recipe is not only delicious but also easy and quick to put together. Not to mention, it is the perfect salad for all your summer cooking.

    Blueberry Salad recipe serve in a bowl by a person

    Why Should You Make It?

    If you consider the fact that most of us eat with our eyes, you would not go wrong with if you included this blueberry summer salad as a part of your summer cooking spread. But there is more to love because it is:

    1. Packed with superfoods: My husband refers to this salad as “Blueberry Spinach Power Salad” as it is packed with superfoods like spinach, blueberries, onions, and pecans. If you are fan of Dr. Oz, you know he refers to blueberries as brain berries.
    2. Quick & easy to make: All you need is 15 minutes to make this salad from start to finish. It is so easy that it is great for even beginner cooks.
    3. Easy to customize: I made my blueberry salad with feta and spinach but you can play with the choice of greens and cheese and use peppery arugula and blue cheese instead. I made sure to include other creative variations below to help you make this delicious salad your own with what you have in your fridge.
    4. Serve it as a side salad or a light main course: You can serve this simple salad as a side dish with all your grilled meats and vegetables or by itself as a light but filling lunch.
    Just came back from the farmer's market with ingredients

    Ingredient Checklist:

    To make this fresh blueberry salad recipe, you will need two sets of ingredients:

    • The homemade dressing: For the salad dressing, I used my go-to lemon vinaigrette but adjusted the amounts to work for this spinach blueberry salad. You will need freshly squeezed lemon juice, extra virgin olive oil, dijon mustard, fresh garlic, and salt and pepper.
    • Salad ingredients: You will need fresh blueberries, raspberries, baby spinach, red onion, crumbled feta cheese, and pecans.

    Ingredient Substitutions & Notes:

    • Salad greens: I used baby spinach but any leafy greens would work here. Spring mix, arugula, romaine lettuce, butter lettuce can all be used in place of baby spinach. Or better yet mix whatever greens you have on hand. I make mixed green salad with blueberries all the time.
    • Berries: I used a combination of fresh blueberries and raspberries but a strawberry blueberry salad is also delicious.
    • Cheese: If you are following a vegan diet, then omit using cheese. If you are not you can use feta cheese like I did or change it up with crumbled blue cheese, creamy burrata cheese, goat cheese, or even shaved parmesan cheese. My favorite combo after the one I shared here is Goat Cheese Blueberry Salad.
    • Salad dressing: If you are a fan of balsamic vinegar, then use my Lemon Balsamic Dressing instead of the basic lemon dressing I used.
    • Nuts: I added a handful of pecans for a nice crunch but any nuts would work here. Swap pecans with sliced roasted almonds, walnuts, or even cashews. And if you have nut allergies use a handful of sunflower seeds.
    • Want to make it more filling? Add in a cup of cooked quinoa for some plant protein. Blueberry Quinoa Salad is one of my go-to meal prep recipes during the summer months.
    • Add a ripe avocado: Avocado comes on top of the list of healthy fats and would make this salad even more delicious.

    How To Make A Blueberry Salad

    The process of making this blueberry spinach salad has 3 folds and takes no more than 15 minutes to put together.

    1. Make the lemon dressing by simply whisking together extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice, dijon mustard, garlic, salt, and pepper.
    four images showing how to make blueberry salad in stages
    1. Assemble the salad: Place all the salad ingredients – baby spinach leaves, sliced red onion, feta cheese, pecans (almonds would also work) and fresh blueberries (or a mix of berries) – in a large salad bowl.
    2. Season/Dress & Toss: Finally, drizzle your blueberry feta spinach salad with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. That’s it!

    How To Make Ahead & Store Leftovers

    • Make Ahead: You can make this blueberry spinach salad a day before. To do so, prepare the salad ingredients and dressing and store them in separate airtight containers. Drizzle the salad with the dressing right before serving. Give it a toss and serve.
    • Storage: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge up to 2 days.
    Spinach salad with blueberries and feta with spoons on the side

    Calorie Information

    The recipe below serves 4 servings as a side dish. This blueberry salad is only 196 calories per serving. Not too bad for a delicious and filling summer salad, right?

    A Few Tips for The Best Blueberry Feta Salad Recipe

    • As in most recipes that use feta cheese as a garnish, I recommend tasting the saltiness of the cheese before adding salt into the dressing. You can then adjust the amount accordingly.
    • If you have it on hand, a splash of raspberry or blueberry vinaigrette (approximately 1 tablespoon) takes this salad to the next level.
    • I highly recommend spending a few extra minutes to toast pecans before adding them into the salad. Doing so adds another layer of earthy flavor to the overall recipe. Also, you can swap pecans with other nuts like sliced almonds, walnuts, or even hazelnuts.

      PRO TIP: To toast pecans (or any nut), place in a dry skillet over medium-low heat, stirring occasionally, for 5-7 minutes, or until a shade darker. When you smell the fresh scent of toasted pecans, you know they are perfectly toasted! Transfer to a plate and cool completely.
    A woman is photographed as she is lighting up a Yankee candle with the blueberry salad in the background.

    Make freshly picked farm flavors & smells as a part of your table set up:

    If you have ever been to one of the many Yankee Candle stores throughout the country, you know how amazing their candles smell. Having been a fan for years, I can tell you that this new collection is nothing short of incredible. Whether it is the Dried Lavender and Oak, Farmstand Festival (my favorite), or Ciderhouse, it is perfect for any home gathering when you want to share the delicious smells of the farmer’s markets with your friends and family.

    I use them every day as a part of my summer table set up.

    Other Blueberry Recipes You Might Like:

    If are making this spinach salad with blueberries, you might need some more blueberry recipe inspiration to try. Here are a few more recipes you can make:

    Blueberry Salad in a bowl
    Print

    Blueberry Salad with Spinach and Feta Cheese recipe

    This Spinach Blueberry Salad recipe is a delicious summer (or any time of the year) salad made with a mix of fresh berries, baby spinach leaves, feta cheese, and red onion. It is drizzled with an easy to make lemon-olive oil-mustard base dressing. We love ours topped off with pecans but almonds would work just as well. Whether you serve it as a side dish for 4 or as an entree for 2, it is the perfect blend of savory and sweet.
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 283kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Salad Dressing:

    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    • 1 clove of garlic peeled and minced
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    For The Blueberry Spinach Salad:

    • 6 cups baby spinach washed and spin-dried
    • ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion
    • 1 ½ cups blueberries
    • ½ cup strawberries or raspberries washed and hulled
    • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese
    • ½ cup pecans or almonds lightly roasted

    Instructions

    • To make the blueberry salad dressing: Place all ingredients in a mason jar, put the lid and give it a good shake.
    • To Make the salad: Place baby spinach, red onion, blueberries, strawberries (or raspberries), feta, and pecans in a large bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Serve.

    Notes

    A Few Helpful Notes:
    • As in most recipes that use feta cheese as a garnish, I recommend tasting the saltiness of the cheese before adding salt into the dressing. You can then adjust the amount accordingly.
    • If you have in on hand, a splash of raspberry vinaigrette (approximately 1 tablespoon) takes this salad to the next level.
    • I highly recommend spending a few extra minutes to toast pecans before adding them into the salad. Doing so adds another layer of earthy flavor to the overall recipe. Also, you can swap pecans with other nuts like sliced almonds, walnuts, or even hazelnuts.
    • To Make Ahead: You can make this blueberry spinach salad a day before. To do so, prepare the salad ingredients and dressing and store them in separate airtight containers. Drizzle the salad with the dressing right before serving. Give it a toss and serve.
    • To Store leftovers: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge up to 2 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 283kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 551mg | Potassium: 398mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 4329IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 152mg | Iron: 2mg

    The post Blueberry Salad with Spinach and Feta appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/blueberry-salad/feed/ 14
    Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad https://foolproofliving.com/cucumber-tomato-mozzarella-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/cucumber-tomato-mozzarella-salad/#comments Mon, 19 Jul 2021 08:54:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14463 Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella is one of my most requested side dishes—and not only because it pairs with nearly everything! This light yet flavorful salad gives any meal, from a simple Cornish Hen recipe to Grilled Shrimp, a rich and crisp garden taste. This cucumber tomato mozzarella basil salad is as easy as it is flavorful. Drizzled with my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette, it is the perfect healthy salad that you can...

    The post Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella is one of my most requested side dishes—and not only because it pairs with nearly everything! This light yet flavorful salad gives any meal, from a simple Cornish Hen recipe to Grilled Shrimp, a rich and crisp garden taste.

    This cucumber tomato mozzarella basil salad is as easy as it is flavorful. Drizzled with my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette, it is the perfect healthy salad that you can make in about 10 minutes. 

    Cucumber Tomato Mozzarella Salad in a bowl with spoons on the side

    If you’d use any excuse to serve Caprese-inspired dishes like this, look no further! Mouths will water over my other fresh tomato salads: Burrata Caprese, Tomato White Bean Salad, Tabbouleh with Quinoa, and my Tomato Galette Recipe.

    Why You Should Make This Recipe:

    How often do you find a side dish that’s both delectable and a breeze to make? It’s no wonder why this fresh and tart cucumber tomato and mozzarella salad will be your new go-to side:

    • Cucumber mozzarella salad has tons of flavor. Sharp yet creamy, rich yet simple, and bursting with herbaceous flavor, this salad is an easy fan favorite.
    • This recipe is so quick and easy that it comes together in three steps and less than ten minutes!Perfect as a breakfast salad, light lunch or a side dish with main dishes.
    • This salad is easy to adapt to fit your own tastes, so you can be sure that every bite is as herby, tangy, or juicy as you want it. You can make it with or without basil or change it up with whatever fresh herb you have on hand. Fresh parsley, mint, or even dill would work.

    Ingredients:

    Don’t spend hours sweating over complicated side dishes. This cucumber tomato and mozzarella salad is so simple that you can find all its fresh ingredients at the farmer’s market!

    Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette ingredients from the top view
    • The Salad Dressing: Gather olive oil, freshly squeezed lemon juice, balsamic vinegar, minced garlic, kosher salt, and freshly cracked black pepper.
    salad ingredients in small bowls from the top view
    • Salad Ingredients: For the salad, get together Persian cucumbers, grape or cherry tomatoes, fresh mozzarella cheese, and basil leaves.

    Substitutions

    Whether you want to add an authentic Italian twist or a zesty tang to this dish, it’s a cinch to do! Check out these simple substitutions to make this delicious salad distinctly yours. 

    • Basil vs. Parsley: It doesn’t matter if you only have basil or parsley on hand. Both taste amazing in this tomato cucumber salad with cheese. You can also do away with herbs altogether for tomato mozzarella salad without basil.
    • Fresh Tomatoes: I used cherry tomatoes but you can use Roma or heirloom tomatoes as well. Be sure to cut them into smaller pieces to make it easier to eat. 
    • Mozzarella: It’s easy to chop up fresh mozzarella into little cubes for this recipe. However, you can also make this salad with mozzarella pearls and turn it into a tomato cucumber bocconcini salad!
    • Persian Cucumbers vs. English Cucumber: Persian cucumbers are smaller than English cucumbers, but both are delicious in this cucumber tomato salad recipe. If you use Persian cucumbers, you’ll need 4-5, but only 1 English cucumber is enough. Whether you peel them is up to you!
    • Lemon Balsamic Dressing: The lemon balsamic dressing used in this cucumber mozzarella salad is a classic, but you can also make it with a basic lemon dressing.

    How To Make It

    Tomato mozzarella cucumber salad is the easiest side salad you will ever prepare. Did I mention it only takes 10 minutes to make? 

    person whisking the salad dressing in a bowl
    1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together lemon juice, balsamic vinegar, minced garlic, salt and pepper. Pour in the olive oil, while still whisking, and mix until creamy.
    2. Prep the salad ingredients: Cut cherry tomatoes into quarters and slice cucumbers into bite size pieces. Be sure to cut the fresh mozzarella cheese into small pieces as well.
    Photos showing how to make tomato mozzarella cucumber salad
    1. Assemble the salad: In a large bowl, layer the cucumbers, tomatoes, and mozzarella.
    2. Garnish the salad: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and garnish with fresh basil. Before serving, taste the salad and add salt and black pepper, if necessary.

    Variations:

    • Turn this recipe into a Pesto Caprese Pasta Salad with tomato cucumber and mozzarella by adding two simple ingredients: cooked pasta & my irresistible pesto salad dressing!
    • Add some sliced red onion to give this fresh side dish a tantalizing bite.
    • Give it a Mediterranean flair by adding a handful of chopped Kalamata olives
    • Not a fan of juicy tomatoes? No problem! Try this salad without tomato for a mozzarella salad with no tomato or better yet try my Creamy Cucumber Salad recipe.
    • Add a cubed ripe avocado for extra creaminess and flavor.

    Make Ahead & Storage:

    You may meal prep for main dishes, but did you know you can meal prep side dishes, too? This cucumber salad with tomatoes and mozzarella can be made ahead for a stress-free side any day. 

    • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad and the tangy balsamic vinaigrette and store them in separate containers. Storing them separately will keep your veggies—especially the tomatoes—from getting soggy.
    • Storage: This Chopped Caprese Cucumber Salad will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 2 days.

    What Dishes Go Well With Caprese Salad With Cucumbers?

    This caprese salad recipe with cucumbers is so appetizing that you’ll be looking for any excuse to make it. Serve it any day of the week alongside these perfectly paired mains:

    • Easy Chicken Stroganoff: There’s no pairing quite as balanced as rich, creamy stroganoff and the light, fresh vegetables in Cucumber Caprese Salad.
    • Grilled Shrimp: My cucumber tomato side is the perfect summer salad for any weeknight barbecue—especially when paired with smoky, grilled shrimp.
    • Baked Meatballs and Potatoes: Your dinner table will pop with herby greens, juicy reds, and peppery oranges when you serve this dish alongside this salad
    • Roasted Cornish Hen: This succulent chicken classic never tastes better than when it’s paired with the complex, herby flavors of my salad recipe.
    • Ground Turkey Meatloaf: Put a mature and healthful spin on this childhood staple by serving it alongside my cucumber Caprese salad recipe.
    • Serve it by itself with a crusty loaf of bread like Challah bread or No Knead Dutch Oven Bread.

    You Might Also Like:

    Enliven your tastebuds with crisp cucumbers, creamy mozzarella, and rich balsamic vinegar without spending hours in the kitchen. Simple seasonings and bold, healthy colors make this cucumber tomato mozzarella basil salad irresistible. Can’t get enough? Here are a few more similar recipes you might also like.

    tomato cucumber mozzarella salad in a bowl with two spoons on the side
    Print

    Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad Recipe

    This Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad is a vegetarian salad recipe made with fresh produce like cucumbers and tomatoes. Drizzled with homemade balsamic vinegar dressing, it is easy and quick to make. Perfect when you need a side dish that looks just as delicious as it tastes.
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 337kcal

    Ingredients

    For the dressing:

    • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 clove garlic peeled and minced
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt or 1/2 teaspoon sea salt, more if needed at the end
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

    For the salad:

    • 4-5 Persian cucumbers sliced ¼-inch thick slices (skin on)
    • 2 cups colorful cherry tomatoes cut into quarters
    • 8 ounces fresh mozzarella cheese cut into small cubes
    • handful fresh basil leaves or Italian parsley leaves (optional)

    Instructions

    • To make the dressing: Place balsamic vinegar, fresh lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Give it a whisk. While still whisking, slowly add in the extra-virgin olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
    • To assemble the salad: Place cucumber slices, tomatoes, and mozzarella cheese in a bowl. Drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a toss.
    • Garnish with fresh basil or Italian parsley.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in some more salt and crushed black pepper, if necessary. Serve.

    Notes

    • This salad makes an excellence topping for toast for breakfast, if you have any leftovers on the next day.
    • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad and the tangy balsamic vinaigrette and store them in separate containers. Storing them separately will keep your veggies—especially the tomatoes—from getting soggy.
    • Storage: This Chopped Caprese Cucumber Salad will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 2 days..

    Nutrition

    Calories: 337kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 45mg | Sodium: 367mg | Potassium: 419mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1427IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 313mg | Iron: 1mg

    The post Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/cucumber-tomato-mozzarella-salad/feed/ 30
    Lemon Balsamic Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-balsamic-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-balsamic-dressing/#comments Sat, 17 Jul 2021 01:51:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=42678 I have been on a mission to help you build a collection of salad dressing recipes for a year now. Today’s recipe, Lemon Balsamic Salad Dressing is the newest one that I think you will enjoy. It is the balsamic vinegar added version of my all time favorite, Lemon Salad Dressing. I recently used this lemon balsamic vinaigrette in Cucumber Mozzarella Tomato Salad recipe but you can pretty much use...

    The post Lemon Balsamic Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    I have been on a mission to help you build a collection of salad dressing recipes for a year now. Today’s recipe, Lemon Balsamic Salad Dressing is the newest one that I think you will enjoy. It is the balsamic vinegar added version of my all time favorite, Lemon Salad Dressing.

    I recently used this lemon balsamic vinaigrette in Cucumber Mozzarella Tomato Salad recipe but you can pretty much use it in any salad. This dressing especially compliments salad recipes with a minimal number of ingredients like my Blueberry Salad and Avocado Quinoa Salad.

    Lemon balsamic dressing in a bottle

    Why Should You Make This Recipe?

    1. You know what goes in there: I get it. It is convenient to grab a bottle of balsamic vinaigrette when you are at the store. However, most of those are packed with preservatives and low quality ingredients. When you make homemade dressings like this one, you know every single ingredient that goes in this one.
    2. It comes together in minutes: All you need is 6 ingredients (including salt & black pepper) and 5 minutes to whip this easy recipe.
    3. Easy to adjust: I think the recipe is perfect but you can easily use it as a base and adjust it to your liking, which I will talk more about below.

    Citrus Balsamic Vinaigrette Ingredients:

    You will need balsamic vinegar, extra virgin olive oil, fresh garlic, freshly squeezed lemon juice, and salt and pepper to make this lemon balsamic vinaigrette recipe.

    Ingredients on a white backdrop

    Ingredient Notes & Substitutions:

    • Citrus: While I love the tangy flavors of freshly squeezed lemon juice, when I want it to be a bit sweeter I use orange juice instead. It is extra special if you can get your hands on blood oranges.
    • Meyer lemons: Swap regular lemon with Meyer lemon for a sweeter and more fruity lemon balsamic vinegar salad dressing. Be sure to add the lemon zest for an additional layer of flavor.
    • Sea Salt vs. Kosher Salt: I mostly use Diamond Kosher (affiliate link) salt in my cooking and for this recipe 1 teaspoon kosher salt is ideal. However, if you don’t have it you can use 1/2 teaspoon sea salt instead.
    • Agave Nectar: Most store bought versions of this dressing usually have some sugar in it. If you prefer yours on the sweeter side, I recommend adding in a tablespoon of agave nectar or maple syrup.
    • White Balsamic Vinegar: The lemon balsamic vinaigrette recipe below uses a regular aged, dark colored balsamic vinegar, but if you want it to have a lighter color and less syrupy consistency, use white balsamic vinegar instead.

    How To Make Lemon Balsamic Vinegar:

    The process of making this salad dressing recipe could not be easier. Simply:

    1. Place balsamic vinegar, fresh lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Give it a whisk.
    Person showing how to make lemon balsamic vinaigrette recipe
    1. While still whisking, slowly pour in the extra-virgin olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated and smooth.
    2. Transfer it to a bottle or jar with a fitted lid. Be sure to give it a good shake before using.

    How To Store?

    This lemon garlic balsamic vinaigrette keeps well up to 5 days as long as it is stored in an airtight container like a mason jar or bottle with a tight fitting lid in the fridge. 

    Ways To Use This Dressing:

    • As a salad dressing: This balsamic lemon vinaigrette can be drizzled over healthy salad greens like arugula, baby spinach, and/or butter lettuce. You can also use it in vegetable salad recipes like Tomato White Bean Salad, Pesto Caprese Pasta Salad, Strawberry Spinach Salad, and Cucumber Caprese Salad (made with juicy cherry tomatoes.) 
    • Use it as dipping oil: While I use this dressing mostly as a simple salad dressing, I sometimes serve it as a balsamic vinaigrette dip as an alternative to my bread dipping oil recipe. It goes well with a loaf of crusty bread like my olive bread.
    • Use it as a chicken marinade: This may come as a surprise but this dressing makes a great light marinade for chicken as well. 
    lemon balsamic vinaigrette placed in a bottle with salad ingredients around it.

    Expert Recipe Tips:

    • Use good quality ingredients: Be sure to use good quality olive oil and balsamic vinegar for best results. They don’t have to necessarily be expensive. My favorite *affordable* olive oil brand for this simple lemon balsamic vinaigrette salad dressing is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link) and balsamic vinegar is Stonewall brand (affiliate link)
    • Taste before you use: When making a salad dressing my rule is to make it a bit saltier and sour than I would if I was consuming the dressing by itself. Because chances are that you will use it in a salad that is packed with vegetables that can always benefit from being properly seasoned. So, use the recipe below as a place to start, give it a taste and adjust it according to your recipe and taste buds.
    • Add in fresh herbs or Italian seasoning: Depending on the recipe you are using, you can jazz it up with garden herbs like fresh parsley or basil. Or if you are short on time, add in a teaspoon of Italian seasoning for extra flavor.

    Other Homemade Salad Dressings You Might Like:

    lemon balsamic dressing in a glass bottle from front view
    Print

    Lemon Balsamic Dressing Recipe

    This lemon balsamic vinaigrette dressing recipe is made with just a few simple ingredients and ready in less than 5 minutes. Make this salad dressing to drizzle on salads, use as a dipping sauce or even marinade meat in it.
    Course Salad Dressing
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 133kcal

    Ingredients

    • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons freshly squeezed lemon juice
    • 1 clove garlic peeled and minced
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
    • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

    Instructions

    • Place balsamic vinegar, fresh lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Give it a whisk.
    • While still whisking, slowly add in the extra-virgin olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated and smooth.
    • Transfer it to a bottle or jar with a fitted lid. Be sure to give it a good shake before using.

    Notes

    • This recipe makes 2/3 cup of Lemon Balsamic Dressing. The calorie information below considers it to be good for 4 servings.
    • To store: Place in the fridge in an airtight container like a mason jar or a bottle with a tight fitting lid.
    • Swap lemons with Meyer lemons for a little bit sweeter dressing.
    • I used Diamond Kosher salt but you can also use sea salt. If you do so, use 1/2 teaspoon sea salt.
    • Before using it in your recipe be sure to give it a taste and add in seasoning if necessary.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 133kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 585mg | Potassium: 28mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 2IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 7mg | Iron: 1mg

    The post Lemon Balsamic Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-balsamic-dressing/feed/ 8
    Creamy Avocado Salad Dressing Recipe (Easy & Quick) https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-avocado-salad-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-avocado-salad-dressing/#comments Thu, 17 Jun 2021 09:13:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10508 I created this recipe last week after I was able to find ripe avocados on sale in our local grocery store. After using it in my Southwestern Chicken Salad with Creamy Avocado Dressing recipe I knew it was a keeper and deserves a spot in my collection of healthy salad dressing recipes. That was the real inspiration for this easy homemade creamy avocado dressing recipe. Just like my 4-ingredient guacamole...

    The post Creamy Avocado Salad Dressing Recipe (Easy & Quick) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    I created this recipe last week after I was able to find ripe avocados on sale in our local grocery store. After using it in my Southwestern Chicken Salad with Creamy Avocado Dressing recipe I knew it was a keeper and deserves a spot in my collection of healthy salad dressing recipes.

    That was the real inspiration for this easy homemade creamy avocado dressing recipe. Just like my 4-ingredient guacamole recipe, it is simple to make and absolutely divine.

    A jar of homemade avocado salad dressing with cilantro and a raw avocado on the side

    This is why I decided to feature this creamy salad dressing all on its own so you can really learn what it takes to make the best avocado-based dressing. Plus, it’s a richer and creamier alternative to my all-time favorite, Simple Lemon Vinaigrette.

    Why I Love This Recipe:

    If you are someone who appreciates the value of a ripe avocado, you probably don’t need much convincing. But if you do, here are a few reasons why I think this is the best creamy avocado sauce:

    1. All you need is 10 minutes and six simple every day ingredients like ripe avocados, cilantro, jalapeno peppers, garlic, and lemon or lime juice.
    2. It is super versatile. Use it as a salad dressing in your favorite salad recipes, avocado dipping sauce as a part of your meat and cheese platter, or as a spread for your avocado toast.
    3. It is the best way to use ripe avocados that are about to go bad.
    4. It works for a variety of special diets because it is vegan, raw, gluten-free, egg-free dairy-free, low-carb, paleo, and Whole30 friendly.

    Ingredient Checklist:

    This simple homemade avocado dressing is made with ripe avocados, olive oil, garlic, fresh cilantro, freshly squeezed lime juice, kosher salt, black pepper, water (or almond milk) and jalapeno (depending on if you’d like it spicy).

    Ingredients for creamy guacamole dressing

    Helpful notes on the ingredients

    • Avocados: There are two popular types of avocados easily available in the supermarket – Hass and Gwen. Hass is considered the best variety of avocado for its buttery, nutty flavor, and the type I always use. For this DIY avocado salad dressing, we want avocados at the peak of ripeness.
    • Jalapeno: I prefer my avocado dressing mild, so I remove the seeds and ribs before blending. Feel free to leave these intact for a spicy salad dressing. Or simply omit the entire jalapeno to keep it mild.
    • Water or Almond Milk: Adding water or almond milk is optional. The dressing is very thick when you first whirl it in the blender. Adding any form of liquid, whether it is plain water, almond milk, or your favorite plant-based milk will make it looser. It’s best to add the liquid 1 Tablespoon at a time depending on how thick or thin you want it.
    • Lemon juice or Lime Juice: This is one of those dressings that you can use fresh lime and lemon juice interchangeably. The important thing to note here is that freshly squeezed is always better than storebought.
    • Fresh garlic or garlic powder: If you find the flavors of fresh garlic to be too strong, you can use 2 teaspoons of garlic powder instead.

    How to make homemade avocado salad dressing from scratch?

    This simple and homemade avocado sauce requires a food processor (or a blender) and less than 10 minutes to creamy goodness. Simply:

    Learn how to make avocado salad dressing
    1. Start with the liquid ingredients. In the base of your food processor, add olive oil and fresh lime juice.
    2. Add avocados. Next, add the remaining ingredients – avocado flesh, fresh garlic, fresh cilantro, salt, pepper and jalapeno (if using).
    Creamy Avocado cilantro lime dressing is in a food processor
    1. Blend. Blend for 30 seconds or until it has reached to your desired creamy texture. If you’d like the dressing to have a thinner consistency, add water or almond milk, 1 Tablespoon at a time stopping the machine and scraping the sides of the bowl a few times. Taste and adjust seasonings, if necessary.

    Pro Tip: I used a food processor but an upright blender or even an immersion blender would also work.

    How To Store & Freeze:

    • Storage: Place it in an airtight container, cover the top of the dressing with a sheet of plastic wrap (to prevent oxidizing and turning brown) and tighten the lid before placing in the fridge.
    • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this dressing recipe.

    FAQs:

    How Long Does Avocado Dressing Last

    This dressing made with avocados will last for 3-4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. The acidity in the freshly squeezed lime juice will help prevent the sauce from turning brown.

    How To Keep Raw Avocado Dressing From Turning Brown?

    The acid in the lime juice will help keep the avocado from turning brown. But for added insurance, the best way to prevent the dressing from oxidizing and turning brown is to press a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface.
    Alternatively, simply drizzle the surface with a thin layer of mild olive oil after each use.
    A woman is placing plastic wrap over the sauce to prevent it from turning brown

    How Many Calories In One Serving Of Dressing?

    This recipe makes about a cup and a half of avocado garlic dressing, which is about 24 tablespoons. One serving, or about 1 Tablespoon of this healthy avocado dressing, is 15 calories. Keep in mind this dressing is packed with clean, good-for-you ingredients. And the avocados come with a ton of healthy fats you can feel good about.
    It also just so happens to be Paleo, Raw, Dairy-Free and Vegan, too!

    Variations

    I think this is a fantastic salad dressing, dip or sauce you can make year-round that makes the best use of ripe avocados. A few variations include:

    • Omit the olive oil. If you are calorie conscious and want to avoid adding additional fat in the dressing, feel free to add water instead of olive oil.
    • Make it mild, medium or spicy. If you like heat, keep the seeds of the jalapeno pepper intact. If you are not a fan, omit the seeds for medium or simply omit the jalapeno for mild.
    • No cilantro. I know a lot of people who do not like cilantro. If you are one of them, you can always replace it with fresh herbs like flat-leaf Italian parsley or mint, or omit the herb entirely.
    • Add a creamy ingredient. This will no longer make it vegan, but ¼ cup full-fat Greek yogurt, Mexican crema, or sour cream would add a special touch. This will thicken the sauce, so make sure to have extra water or almond milk nearby.

    Uses for Avocado Dressing

    I know that I have been talking about this recipe as more of a vegan salad dressing, but it could also be used as a pasta sauce or even as a dip. I love to add this creamy, vibrant dressing to any type of leafy greens or salad recipe, but you could also try:

    Avocado crema used to top off tacos
    Raw vegan avocado sauce used as a dip
    • Serve it as a dip on a cheese plate: Eating it as a creamy guacamole dressing with fresh-cut vegetables and tortilla chips as a part of a Mexican-inspired cheese plate.
    • Use it as a topping in place of sliced avocados: Topping your favorite chili bowls like my ultimate Vegan Chili, Vegetarian Quinoa Chili or Easy Chicken Chili.
    healthy avocado dressing is spread over a piece of toast and topped off with an egg
    • As a base for your avocado toast: Simply spread a piece of toast with a generous amount of this avocado cilantro lime sauce and top it off with a fried egg.
    • Add a dollop on any of your favorite grain bowl or rice bowl recipes.

    At this point, I think we can all agree that this creamy avocado lime dressing is one of those lifesaver dressings. If you have it in your fridge, you can have dinner on the table in no time.

    Other Recipes with Avocados That You Might Like


    Paleo avocado dressing placed in a jar
    Print

    Creamy Avocado Salad Dressing Recipe

    This 10-minutes-to-make and vegan Creamy Avocado Salad Dressing is an easy way to freshen up your salads and pasta dishes. You can even serve it as a dip with chips on the side. It is made with everyday ingredients like ripe avocados, cilantro, jalapeno peppers, garlic, and lemon or lime juice.
    Course Dressing
    Cuisine Mexican/Southwestern
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes
    Servings 6 servings or 1 1/2 cups
    Calories 173kcal

    Ingredients

    • 3 tablespoons of lime or lemon juice
    • 3 tablespoons of olive oil
    • 2 ripe avocados peeled and cut into small pieces
    • 2 cloves of garlic peeled and minced
    • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded (optional)
    • ½ cup cilantro rinsed and roughly chopped
    • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • Almond milk – optional

    Instructions

    • Place lime or lemon juice, olive oil, avocados, garlic, jalapeno, cilantro, 3/4 teaspoon salt, and black pepper into the bowl of a food processor. Process 4-5 minutes or until creamy. Scrape down the bowl with a spatula a few times during the process.
    • If you want a more liquidy avocado dressing add in almond milk in one tablespoon increments until it reaches to the consistency you desire.
    • Taste for seasoning and add if necessary.
    • Place in a jar, place a piece of stretch film on top of the surface of the dressing to keep it from browning, and close it tightly with a lid. As long as it is kept in the fridge, this dressing will be good for 4-5 days.

    Video

    Notes

    • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 1/2 cups of dressing, which is good for 6 serving (or so). Each serving is around 4 tablespoons.
    • Storage: As long as it is stored in an airtight container and stored in the fridge, this avocado dressing will keep fresh up to 4-5 days. 
    • If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender or an immersion blender as well.
    • This recipe can easily be multiplied. Though I highly recommend stopping the machine regularly and scraping the sides during the process.
    • While I love a creamy avocado dressing, if you like it to have more of a chunky avocado texture, you can process less.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 173kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 340mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 213IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 1mg

    This recipe was originally published in September 2016. It is updated with new photos, additional helpful information and a how-to video in June 2021.

    The post Creamy Avocado Salad Dressing Recipe (Easy & Quick) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-avocado-salad-dressing/feed/ 32
    Easy Shrimp Marinade – Perfect for Grilling! https://foolproofliving.com/easy-shrimp-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-shrimp-marinade/#comments Sat, 29 May 2021 01:43:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=41175 An easy shrimp (or prawn) marinade recipe can come handy when you are short on time and need to put dinner on the table. The beauty of shrimp is that it cooks up super quick and can be enjoyed as a healthy dinner alongside some of my favorite sides. Plus, marinated shrimp can be transformed into Grilled Shrimp Skewers or Shrimp and Veggie Kabobs, for an eye-catching summer meal that...

    The post Easy Shrimp Marinade – Perfect for Grilling! appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    An easy shrimp (or prawn) marinade recipe can come handy when you are short on time and need to put dinner on the table. The beauty of shrimp is that it cooks up super quick and can be enjoyed as a healthy dinner alongside some of my favorite sides. Plus, marinated shrimp can be transformed into Grilled Shrimp Skewers or Shrimp and Veggie Kabobs, for an eye-catching summer meal that you can make on a Tuesday night.

    They also make a great salad topper and a healthy meal, like in Shrimp Orzo Salad, Shrimp Avocado Corn Salad and Spinach Shrimp Salad.

    Grilled shrimp marinade in a bowl with a wooden spoon on the side

    If you agree that there is nothing like biting down on a juicy and succulent piece of shrimp that has been marinated with bright and zesty flavors read on…

    Why You Should Make This Recipe

    I like to think of this simple shrimp marinade as the only thing standing between a bland and bold piece of shrimp.

    I love it because it’s:

    • Made with 7 pantry ingredients and comes together in 5 minutes.
    • Flavor-forward and works for all methods of cooking shrimp (and prawn) – grilled, baked, broiled and sauteed.
    • Versatile and can be used for raw, frozen and cooked shrimp or prawns. 
    • My go-to seafood marinade for grilling and can be used on other types of seafood such as scallops, salmon, or halibut.
    • An easy overnight marinade (with one minor adjustment)!

    Ingredient Notes & Substitutions:

    The ingredient list includes olive oil, lemon zest, fresh lemon juice, honey, fresh garlic, paprika, crushed red pepper flakes, fresh parsley, kosher salt, black pepper and cleaned shrimp.

    Ingredients are laid out on a white backdrop

    Below are a few helpful notes, including a few substitutions for the marinade ingredients:

    • Best Shrimp to use: I like to purchase medium size shrimp (21-25 count) that have already been peeled and deveined. Whole prawns (with their heads still intact) or jumbo shrimp are both great options, too.
    • Olive oil vs Butter: I used olive oil but you can substitute it with an equal amount of melted and cooled butter if you want.
    • Any citrus would work: Feel free to use lime zest and lime juice instead of lemon. Orange or grapefruit would offer a nice twist, too.
    • Asian Flavor: Soy sauce is a wonderful replacement for the lemon juice if going for an Asian zing. If doing so, omit the salt in the recipe.
    • Do not skip the honey: I originally made the marinade without honey and let me tell you, the honey makes all the difference! It adds a subtle sweet flavor that makes the shrimp all the more addicting. I like it with a mild honey, such as orange blossom or clover, but use whatever you have on hand.
      Brown sugar is a great alternative for honey. The sugar granules will naturally dissolve while whisking the marinade.
    • Use your favorite paprika: A mild or hot paprika will do. Use whatever spice level you prefer. Smoked paprika would add a touch of smoky flavor without ever having to turn on the grill.
    • Hot Sauce: If you are fan of spicy food, feel free to add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce for an addictively spicy marinade.

    Grocery Shopping Tip: Shrimp are labeled in a range of sizes – small, medium, large, extra large, jumbo and colossal, but it’s the number you’re looking for. Here is a great article about various sizes of shrimp.

    Usually this is shown as a divided number (ex: 21/25) or a number preceded by the letter ‘U’ (ex: U-15). The number represents the average amount of shrimp in a one pound bag.

    How to Peel and Devein Shrimp

    I like to purchase uncooked shrimp that have already been peeled and deveined. That being said, it is so easy to peel and devein the shrimp when you get home. Simply:

    • Rinse shrimp under cold water.
    • Pull off the legs and large part of the shell with your fingers. At this point, you can leave the tail on or remove it. Discard or save the shells to make seafood stock.
    • Cut across the top of the shrimp with a paring knife, then remove the vein with the knife or a wooden skewer.
    • If some sandy grit remains, wash it away under cool running water.

    How to Make Marinade for Shrimp

    All it takes is a few easy steps to have the garlic shrimp marinade ready in no time! Simply:

    Showing how to make grilled shrimp marinade
    1. Place olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, honey, garlic, paprika, red pepper flakes, parsley salt, and pepper in a medium bowl. Give it a whisk until fully combined.
    2. Reserve one tablespoon of the marinade. 
    3. Add the shrimp into the bowl and toss to coat. Cover it with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes. Alternatively, you can place it in a plastic bag if you want it to take less space in your fridge.
    Showing how to cook marinated shrimp on the grill
    1. To cook, you can grill (using my Easy Grilled Shrimp Recipe using an outdoor grill or on the stove top using a grill pan) or saute shrimp for 2-3 minutes on each side or until pink and opaque.
    2. Drizzle the reserved marinade over the shrimp and serve.

    Note: For proper food safety, discard any leftover raw shrimp marinade as it can not be reused.

    How Long Can You Marinate Shrimp

    I recommend marinating the shrimp for 30 minutes or less since there is lemon juice in the marinade. The acid in the lemon juice will actually start to cook the shrimp if left to sit for too long and make the shrimp mushy.

    That being said, the shrimp can be marinated for a few hours and up to overnight as long as you omit the lemon juice. Simply add the lemon juice up to 30 minutes before planning to cook. In either case, marinate in the fridge until you’re ready to start cooking.

    How to Cook Marinated Shrimp

    Marinated shrimp can be grilled, baked, broiled, or sautéed. No matter which way you choose, cook the shrimp for 2-3 minutes on each side in medium-high heat, or until pink and opaque. You know they’re ready when the tails start to curl in.

    Marinated prawn on a baking sheet from the top view

    Pro Tip: Jumbo shrimp will take longer to cook than medium size shrimp. Because of this, I recommend purchasing jumbo shrimp or prawns with the shell on. Snip the top with a pair of kitchen shears, remove the vein and marinate and cook with the shell on. This helps to trap in their juices.

    How to Store

    The quick shrimp marinade can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days, which makes it great for meal prep.

    Keep in mind, this is only the marinade, not the marinade with the shrimp.

    Tips for Success:

    • Purchase fresh or frozen shrimp in whichever size you prefer. Frozen shrimp is actually the better buy since the raw shrimp in the fresh fish section of grocery stores has been previously frozen and thawed. This, in turn, shortens their shelf life. Fresh shrimp should be cooked within a day or two of purchasing.
    • Pat the shrimp dry before tossing with the marinade. This ensures the sauce sticks to the seafood.
    • Toss the shrimp gently to make sure every piece is coated with the marinade. A large bowl or plastic bag works well.
    • Reserve one tablespoon of the marinade for finishing. It adds a light, bright flavor at the end of cooking.
    • If short on time, make the marinade up to 3 days in advance and store in an airtight container (without the shrimp) until ready to use.

    FAQs

    Should I leave the tails on before I marinate the shrimp?

    Yes, you can leave the tails on the shrimp while marinating and cooking. I find the tails make a prettier presentation and make it easier to eat without utensils.

    Can you marinate frozen shrimp?

    Yes! Although more flavor will be absorbed into raw shrimp, frozen shrimp are so small, they start to thaw immediately when taken out of the freezer. After the 30 minute marinating time in the fridge, the shrimp should be thawed enough to cook through.

    Can you over marinate shrimp?

    Yes, if the marinade recipe includes citrus juice (lemon, lime, orange, grapefruit), then the acid in the citrus juice will start to cook the shrimp and break down its delicate protein. Stick to the 30-minute mark with this recipe.

    Can you marinate already cooked shrimp? Is it okay if I use this marinade for cooked shrimp?

    Yes! It is better to marinate raw shrimp but if you purchased already cooked shrimp or just do not feel like cooking it yourself, cooked shrimp is perfectly acceptable to marinate. For best results, marinate cooked shrimp for at least a few hours and up to overnight, but omit the lemon juice until you are ready to serve.

    How long can you marinate shrimp in lemon juice?

    Shrimp marinated in lemon juice, or any citrus juice, should marinate for 30 minutes or less. The acid from the citrus juice will start to cook the shrimp and turn the delicate meat mushy.

    You Might Also Like:

    If you try this Shrimp Marinade recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    Grilled shrimp on wooden skewers
    Print

    Easy Shrimp Marinade Recipe

    An easy shrimp marinade recipe you can use to sautee, broil, roast, or grilled shrimp (or prawns). It comes together in 5 minutes and makes the most delicious shrimp after 30 minutes of marinading time.
    Course Seafood
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Marinading Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 289kcal

    Ingredients

    • ¼ cup olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
    • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed*
    • 3 tablespoons honey
    • 3 cloves of garlic minced
    • 1 teaspoon paprika
    • Pinch of crushed red pepper flakes optional
    • 2 tablespoons chopped Italian parsley
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 lb. shrimp 16-20 or 21-25 count, peeled and deveined

    Instructions

    • Place olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, honey, garlic, paprika, red pepper flakes, parsley salt, and pepper in a bowl. Give it a whisk until fully combined.
    • Reserve one tablespoon of the marinade.
    • Add the shrimp into the bowl and toss to coat. Cover it with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes*.
    • To cook, you can grill or saute shrimp for 2-3 minutes on each side or until pink.
    • Drizzle the reserved marinade over the shrimp and serve.

    Notes

    • This shrimp marinade recipe makes enough to marinade 1 pound of shrimp. The recipe recipe can be multiplied if you want to marinade more shrimp.
    • How long to marinade? I recommend marinating the shrimp for 30 minutes or less since there is lemon juice in the marinade. The acid in the lemon juice will actually start to cook the shrimp if left to sit for too long and make the shrimp mushy.
    • To marinade overnight: The shrimp can be marinated for a few hours or overnight as long as you omit the lemon juice. Simply add the lemon juice up to 30 minutes before planning to cook. 
    • Best way to store the marinade: The quick shrimp marinade can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days, which makes it great for meal prep. Keep in mind, this is only the marinade, not the marinade with the shrimp.
    • Please take the nutrition information below with a grain of salt and only for reference per serving. Since we toss most of the marinade, the individual values would be less.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 289kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 286mg | Sodium: 1465mg | Potassium: 142mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 210IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 3mg

    The post Easy Shrimp Marinade – Perfect for Grilling! appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/easy-shrimp-marinade/feed/ 6
    Creamy Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sesame-ginger-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/sesame-ginger-dressing/#comments Sat, 08 May 2021 07:53:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=29332 There is something so unique about Asian cuisine. A little salty, a little sweet, a little savory – it provides the right balance of flavors to keep you going back for more. And that’s exactly what this sesame ginger vinaigrette recipe is all about. A main component of my Asian Chicken Salad Recipe, this salad dressing recipe is so delicious, I had to give it a spotlight all its own....

    The post Creamy Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    There is something so unique about Asian cuisine. A little salty, a little sweet, a little savory – it provides the right balance of flavors to keep you going back for more.

    And that’s exactly what this sesame ginger vinaigrette recipe is all about. A main component of my Asian Chicken Salad Recipe, this salad dressing recipe is so delicious, I had to give it a spotlight all its own.

    A jar of Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing recipe is in a jar with a whisk

    Plus, it provides the best excuse (if you need one) to eat more vegetables. I don’t say this often, but the reason to eat the salad is for this dressing. It’s that good.

    And it adds a pop of Asian flair to more than just salad recipes. I love to drizzle it on simple split chicken, meat, roasted vegetables, whole grains. It even works as an Oriental sauce for sandwiches and a flavorful marinade for chicken wings, too.

    What Is Ginger Dressing Made Out Of?

    The ingredient list for sweet sesame dressing include natural almond (or peanut) butter, honey, rice vinegar, soy sauce, toasted sesame oil, garlic, fresh ginger, chili pepper sauce (my favorite is Sriracha) and kosher salt.

    Ingredients for honey soy dressing

    A Few Helpful Notes on Ingredients & Substitution Ideas:

    • Almond or Peanut Butter: Use a natural, unsalted, unsweetened, creamy almond or peanut butter and steer clear of jars labeled almond or peanut butter “spread.” I also recommend roasted nut butters over raw. This will provide the cleanest, nuttiest flavor. If all you can find is a jar of salted nut butter, simply omit the salt in the recipe.
    • Rice Vinegar: I originally created this Asian salad dressing with rice wine vinegar but found this to be difficult to find, so I tested it again with rice vinegar and the dressing was just as delicious. Rice or rice wine vinegar can be used interchangeably.
    • Soy Sauce: Low-sodium soy sauce is my go-to for all of my Asian recipes, but use your favorite brand or whatever you have on hand.
    • Toasted Sesame Oil: It’s important to note I used toasted sesame oil, not regular sesame oil. The toasted oil has a stronger sesame flavor and is typically used for raw sauce preparations rather than cooking. If you can, I highly recommend seeking out the toasted sesame oil. Keep it in a cool, dark place in your cabinet and use it in any Asian-style vinaigrette or as a finishing touch to your rice, stir frys, and homemade chicken lo mein.
    • Chili Pepper Sauce: My favorite chili pepper sauce is Sriracha. If you have never worked with Sriracha before, this sesame dressing is a great introduction to this popular Thai condiment. Look for it in the global section of most grocery stores or online. Sambal oelek is another great option.

    Is Sesame Dressing Gluten-Free?

    This sesame soy ginger dressing is not gluten-free because soy sauce is the star of the show, aka the main ingredient of this salad dressing.

    Soy sauce is traditionally made with four ingredientssoybeans, wheat, salt, and water. And it adds that special hint of umami – a complex, salty, savory flavor.

    If you have to avoid gluten or have a slight sensitivity, there are several varieties of gluten-free soy sauces available on grocery store shelves or online. Some are made with rice, while others omit the grain altogether.

    Alternatively, for a gluten-free Asian vinaigrette, you can use an equal amount of Japanese tamari sauce or coconut aminos, both of which are gluten-free alternatives to soy sauce.

    PRO TIP: The most reliable way to confirm a soy sauce is gluten-free – check for the gluten-free claim on the label, but also check the ingredients. As long as none of the ingredients are wheat, rye, barley or any ingredients made from these grains, it can be certified as gluten-free.

    How to Make Sesame Ginger Dressing

    This incredibly delicious Asian salad dressing comes together in three simple steps. Simply:

    A woman is mixing sesame soy ginger vinaigrette in a jar with a whisk
    1. Whisk the nut butter. In a small bowl, whisk the nut butter until smooth.
    2. Finish the dressing. Add the honey, vinegar, soy sauce, toasted sesame oil, garlic, ginger, chili pepper sauce, and salt.
    3. Drizzle and Store. Use the toasted sesame dressing right away or store in a mason jar until ready to use.

    PRO TIP: If you’re using almond or peanut butter, I recommend using a bowl and a whisk rather than shaking it in a mason jar. A bit of arm strength ensures the dressing becomes smooth and emulsified.

    Variations

    This honey soy dressing is perfect just the way it is, but for a few easy variations, definitely try:

    • With Olive Oil: Replace the nut butter with 2 Tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil
    • Vegan: Rather than honey, use an equal amount of maple syrup as the liquid sweetener
    • Without Soy Sauce: Omit the soy sauce and use an equal amount of Japanese tamari or coconut aminos – this keeps it gluten-free, too!
    • Toasted Sesame Seeds: Add in a teaspoon of toasted sesame seeds for a little bit of a crunch and additional flavor.

    Make-Ahead and Storage Instructions

    This Asian sesame dressing recipe is a wonderful make-ahead recipe for the week. The longer the ingredients sit together, the more flavorful and potent the dressing becomes.

    It is best stored in an airtight container, salad dressing cruet (for easy dispensing), or mason jar for up to 5 days in the fridge.

    Creative Uses For This Asian Sesame Dressing

    I usually shake up a batch at the beginning of the week and use it for just about any recipe when I want to add a special Asian zing. It goes particularly well mixed into hot ramen noodles or drizzled over white or brown rice. Try it as:

    Chicken Chicken Salad being drizzled with Asian sesame vinaigrette
    • As a simple Chinese salad dressing for salads (or on iceberg lettuce, romaine lettuce or crunchy cabbage salads) 
    • Marinade for chicken thighs or chicken wings
    • Use it as a delicious stir fry sauce
    • Dip for fresh-cut vegetables or crispy wontons
    • Delicious snack right off the spoon

    Trust me, your taste buds will thank me!

    Other Salad Dressing Recipes You Might Like:

    If you are like me, enjoy trying new homemade salad dressing recipes, I suspect you might enjoy the other delicious dressings below:

     

    Sesame Ginger Dressing Recipe in a jar
    Print

    Sesame Ginger Dressing Recipe

    A deliciously creamy Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing made with soy sauce, sesame oil, vinegar, and honey. Ready in 5 minutes and it is great to use as a vinaigrette in all your favorite Asian Salads, chicken and meat dishes, and even in simple roasted vegetables.
    Course Salad Dressing
    Cuisine Asian
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 134kcal

    Ingredients

    • 3 tablespoons natural almond or peanut butter*, (unsweetened/unsalted)
    • 2 tablespoons honey
    • 1/4 cup rice vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 2 teaspoons toasted sesame oil
    • 1 clove of garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
    • 1 teaspoon chili pepper sauce I used Sriracha – optional
    • 1/4 teaspoon coarse sea salt

    Instructions

    • Whisk the nut butter: In a small bowl (or jar), whisk the nut butter until smooth.
    • Finish the dressing: Add the honey, vinegar, soy sauce, toasted sesame oil, garlic, ginger, chili pepper sauce, and salt.
    • Drizzle and Store: Use it right away or store in a mason jar until ready to use.

    Notes

    Variations:

    This honey soy dressing is perfect just the way it is, but for a few easy variations, definitely try:
    • With Olive Oil*: Replace the nut butter with 2 Tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil
    • Make it Vegan: Rather than honey, use an equal amount of maple syrup as the liquid sweetener
    • Without Soy Sauce: Omit the soy sauce and use an equal amount of Japanese tamari or coconut aminos - this keeps it gluten-free, too!
    • Toasted Sesame Seeds: Add in a teaspoon of toasted sesame seeds for a little bit of a crunch and additional flavor.

    Make-Ahead and Storage Instructions:

    It is best stored in an airtight container or mason jar for up to a week in the fridge.
    • The recipe above makes about 3/4 cup of dressing.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 134kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 676mg | Potassium: 109mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

    The post Creamy Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/sesame-ginger-dressing/feed/ 10
    Healthy Chocolate Frosting https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-chocolate-frosting/ https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-chocolate-frosting/#comments Wed, 05 May 2021 20:00:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=40821 One of the most popular recipes on this blog is my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake. I receive many emails, mostly from young mothers, thanking me for sharing such a great low sugar and low carb chocolate cake recipe that they can serve their children. One of those moms recently asked me how to turn that almond flour chocolate cake recipe into a paleo birthday cake. And because no cake is...

    The post Healthy Chocolate Frosting appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    One of the most popular recipes on this blog is my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake. I receive many emails, mostly from young mothers, thanking me for sharing such a great low sugar and low carb chocolate cake recipe that they can serve their children.

    One of those moms recently asked me how to turn that almond flour chocolate cake recipe into a paleo birthday cake. And because no cake is birthday-cake worthy without frosting, I had to develop a healthier chocolate frosting recipe that I could spread all over the cake.

    Healthy chocolate frosting spread on a spoon

    Why should you make this recipe?

    In addition to being the best substitute for butter and powdered sugar-packed frosting recipes, this paleo chocolate frosting is terrific because it:

    • Is made with five simple ingredients and comes together in the food processor in less than 5 minutes.
    • Can be adjusted to make it work for your taste buds and dietary needs. Not a fan of nut butters (i.e., almond butter or peanut butter)? Swap it with sunflower butter. Want it sweeter? Add in more maple syrup.
    • Has a deep chocolate flavor, and it is easily spreadable. Perfect for any of your cupcake, cake, or brownie recipes (like my Almond Flour Brownies) to use in place of regular frosting.

    Ingredients & Substitutions:

    To make this easy vegan chocolate frosting recipe, you will need:

    Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a marble countertop
    • Your choice of unsweetened nut butter (or seed butter): I used creamy almond butter, but you can use any of your favorite nut butters. Peanut butter, cashew butter, and walnut butter would all work. If you are allergic to nuts, you can use seed butters like tahini (sesame butter), sunflower seed butter, or even pumpkin seed butter.
    • Unsweetened Cacao Powder: Make sure it is unsweetened. My favorite brand is Valhrona (affiliate link)
    • Plant-based milk: I wanted this recipe to be dairy-free, so I used homemade almond milk, but any plant-based, dairy-free milk would work.
    • Maple Syrup: If you do not have maple syrup on hand, you can use an equal amount of agave nectar or honey instead. If you use honey, it won’t be vegan, but it will be a good substitute. You can also use coconut sugar, but you might have to add a few more tablespoons of almond milk to compensate for the liquid sweetener if you use that.
    • Vanilla Extract

    ProTip: For best results, make sure that all your ingredients are at room temperature.

    How to make chocolate frosting without sugar?

    Making this healthy frosting recipe is so easy and has only three folds:

    Four images showing how to make the recipe step by step
    1. Gather everything in the food processor: Place all ingredients in your food processor attached with the blade attachment.
    2. Pulse: Pulse 8-10 times in 1-second increments or until it is thoroughly combined and has a creamy texture. Stop the machine, scrape down the sides with a rubber spatula, and repeat until it reaches a soft and creamy consistency.
    3. Taste & Spread: Give it a taste and add in more sweetener if you prefer it to be sweeter. Once it is to your liking, spread over cakes, brownies, and cupcakes as you please.

    What Makes This Recipe Healthy?

    I call this easy frosting recipe healthy because it is made without butter and confectioners sugar (aka powdered sugar). Instead, it uses wholesome ingredients like unsweetened nut butters packed with good-for-you healthy fats and a natural sweetener like maple syrup.

    This doesn’t mean that you should eat all of it in one sitting, but when consumed in small amounts, this paleo-friendly and vegan cake frosting is a healthier alternative than traditional frosting.

    Variations:

    • Add in a pinch of salt: I usually add in a pinch of flaky sea salt when I am using it in my almond flour brownies or cake flour brownies recipes.
    • Use dried fruits as a sweetener: If you prefer not to use maple syrup or honey, you can also use dried fruits such as dates or unsulphured apricots. If you decide to do so, be sure to soak them in hot water for at least an hour before and drain them before using. For this recipe, I would start with 5-6 dates (or apricots) and increase it if it is not sweet enough to your liking. You will have to process longer, but it will still be delicious.

    Make-Ahead & Storage Instructions:

    • Make-ahead instructions: You can make this healthy cake frosting a day in advance and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. When you first take it out of the refrigerator, it will be hard. Let it sit on the counter for 30 minutes until it comes to room temperature, and stir it before using it in your recipe.
    • Best way to store: Place in an airtight container such as a mason jar and keep it in the fridge. It will stay fresh for up to 3 days.
    A bowl of paleo frosting in a bowl from top view

    Recipe Ideas To Put It To Use:

    You can spread this refined sugar-free frosting over any of your favorite cupcakes, brownies, cakes, and even cookies. Here are a few recipes I use it in:

    FAQs:

    What if I don’t have a food processor?

    If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender as well. If you do not have either, you can place everything in a medium bowl and whisk until it reaches your desired creaminess. However, I recommend using ingredients that are at room temperature.

    Can I place it in a piping bag to decorate my cake?

    Yes, you can, with a minor adjustment. The frosting recipe below uses seven tablespoons of almond milk. I recommend using one or two tablespoons less if you plan to use it to decorate your cakes.

    Can I use this recipe as chocolate icing?

    This healthy chocolate cake frosting would not work as icing as it has a much thicker consistency.

    Can I use it as a chocolate glaze?

    Again, the consistency is too thick to pour it as a glaze. You can adjust it to your desired consistency by adding in more almond milk, but it will still not be as thin as a chocolate glaze.

    Other Basic Recipes:

    I am a big fan of having a few back-pocket recipes that I can use in more than one recipe. If you agree and enjoyed this healthy vegan frosting recipe, you might also like the recipes below:

    Healthy Chocolate frosting in a bowl with a spoon and strawberries on the side
    Print

    Healthy Chocolate Frosting

    This Healthy Chocolate Frosting recipe is made without butter or powdered sugar. Instead, I used almond butter (or any other nut/seed butter like peanut butter can be used), cacao powder, maple syrup, almond milk, and vanilla extract. It comes together in a food processor in just about 5 minutes.
    Course Vegan & Naturally-Sweetened Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 1 cup
    Calories 1975kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup almond butter unsweetened & creamy – At room temperature
    • ½ cup cocoa powder unsweetened
    • cup maple syrup at room temperature
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • 7 tablespoons almond milk unsweetened

    Instructions

    • Place ingredients in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment.
    • Pulse 8-10 times, in 1-second increments, or until it is creamy and spreadable. You may have to stop the machine and scrape down the sides a once or twice to make sure that everything is throughly mixed.

    Notes

    • The calorie information below is for the whole frosting. I usually use it in an 8-inch cake which yields 8 slices, which in turn would be for 8 servings.
    • Nut Butter: If you have nut allergies, you can use sunflower or tahini instead of nut butters (i.e, almond, cashew, or peanut butter)
    • Sweetener: You can use agave nectar or honey (a non vegan option), instead of maple syrup.
    • Storage & Make ahead: You can make this healthy chocolate frosting recipe a day in advance, place it in an airtight jar, and keep it in the fridge. It should keep fresh up to 3 days. Be sure to let it sit on the counter 30 minutes before you are ready to use and give it a stir before using.
    • No food processor? If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender. It is a little bit messier with a blender but it would work. If you do not have both of those equipments, you can use a bowl and a whisk. It would take a bit longer but it would still work

    Nutrition

    Calories: 1975kcal | Carbohydrates: 146g | Protein: 61g | Fat: 146g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Sodium: 174mg | Potassium: 2786mg | Fiber: 40g | Sugar: 78g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Calcium: 1167mg | Iron: 15mg

    The post Healthy Chocolate Frosting appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-chocolate-frosting/feed/ 10
    Strawberry Spinach Salad with Poppy Seed Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-spinach-arugula-salad-lighter-poppy-seed-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-spinach-arugula-salad-lighter-poppy-seed-dressing/#comments Wed, 21 Apr 2021 13:36:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9137 When the warm weather starts to come around, I move away from warm quinoa salads and turn to fresh and vibrant cold summer salads like Apple Salad, Watermelon Avocado Salad, Blueberry Salad, and Peach Avocado Salad. If you’re wondering what dressing goes with strawberry salad, I take a little help from my poppyseed dressing recipe. A little sprinkle of cheese, a few toasted nuts, and you have a super cravable (and beautiful!) strawberry spinach poppy seed salad...

    The post Strawberry Spinach Salad with Poppy Seed Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>

    When the warm weather starts to come around, I move away from warm quinoa salads and turn to fresh and vibrant cold summer salads like Apple SaladWatermelon Avocado SaladBlueberry Salad, and Peach Avocado Salad.

    If you’re wondering what dressing goes with strawberry salad, I take a little help from my poppyseed dressing recipe.

    Strawberry Spinach Salad with Poppy Seed Dressing in a bowl with two spoons on the side

    A little sprinkle of cheese, a few toasted nuts, and you have a super cravable (and beautiful!) strawberry spinach poppy seed salad right before your eyes. Panera has got nothing on this one.

    Why You Should Make This Recipe

    They call it both Strawberry Salad and Strawberry Spinach Salad. Either way, I believe it’s just the right amount of flavor, color, and refreshing goodness that will have you craving it all year long.

    I love it because it’s:

    1. Light, bright, and packed with delicious, nutritious and fresh ingredients, including superfood baby spinach and fresh strawberries, it is the perfect spring salad recipe.
    2. Easily customizable to suit your taste – keep reading for super simple swaps below!
    3. Tossed in a lightened up and maple-sweetened homemade poppyseed dressing – the secret is Greek yogurt!
    4. An incredibly satisfying and healthy lunch, starter, or a great side dish to serve with grilled meat and vegetables! This summer salad makes a beautiful centerpiece on your Easter table, too.

    Ingredients

    The ingredient list for this strawberry spinach salad recipe comes together in two parts:

    Ingredients for the recipe from top view
    1. Salad Ingredients: Gather together fresh spinach, romaine, red onion (thinly sliced), strawberries, sliced almonds, and your favorite crumbled cheese.
    2. My go-to Poppyseed Dressing for Spinach Salad: It’s a lightened-up version with Greek yogurt, vegan mayo, maple syrup, vinegar, Dijon mustard, poppy seeds, and kosher salt.

    Substitution Ideas

    • Greens: Baby spinach and romaine make a great pair, but feel free to use all spinach, baby gem, mixed baby greens, arugula, or whatever you have on hand.
    • Fruit: Swap out the strawberries for any fresh or dried fruit, such as blueberries, raspberries, mandarin oranges, raisins, or dried cranberries.
    • Different Nuts: Instead of crunchy almonds, try toasted pecans or chopped walnuts. Toasted pumpkin or sunflower seeds would offer a great crunch factor – they also make the recipe nut-free.
    • Cheese: My go-to choice is goat cheese, but feta cheese, blue cheese, or gorgonzola are great options.

    How to Make

    This spinach salad with strawberries is as easy as 1, 2, 3.

    1. Make the creamy poppy seed dressing: Place all dressing ingredients in a bowl and give it a whisk.
    A collage of photos showing how to make strawberry salad
    1. Assemble the salad: Layer spinach, salad greens of your choice, red onion, strawberries, nuts, and cheese in a salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing.
    2. Toss & Serve: Give it a gentle toss using salad tongs and serve.

    What to Serve it With

    This strawberry poppyseed salad is a colorful counterpoint to:

    Because it is so crowd-pleasing, I always make it for Easter, summer BBQs and quiet dinner parties with friends.

    Variations

    One or two simple ingredient swaps (or add-ins) is all it takes to make this spinach strawberry salad recipe your own.

    • Serve it with chicken on top: Add some sliced or cubed baked chicken breasts just before serving.
    • Make it a Strawberry Balsamic Salad: Replace the vinegar with balsamic vinegar and feel free to drizzle some extra balsamic on top – juicy strawberries and balsamic are a classic flavor combo. Try this Strawberry Balsamic Vinaigrette to change it up. Or jazz it up with this cranberry vinaigrette during the holiday season.
    • Change up the salad greens: Use half spinach and half arugula for a fun, peppery twist.
    • Add one or two cubed avocados and toss gently just before serving. Or, make a batch of my creamy avocado dressing and drizzle that on top.
    • Change it up with other sweet berries: Sprinkle some fresh blueberries or rasberries for a fruity pop of color and flavor.
    • Use Candied Nuts: Make it a special treat around the holiday season and replace the sliced almonds with candied pecans or try my spicy candied nuts instead.
    • Want to make it dairy-free? Omit the cheese in the salad and swap yogurt with an equal amount of vegan mayo in the dressing.
    person pouring dressing over the salad

    How to Make Ahead & Store

    • To Make Ahead: If you’d like to prepare the spinach salad a few days ahead, I would recommend storing the salad greens, sliced strawberries, crumbled cheese, toasted nuts, and poppyseed dressing in separate containers. Then simply toss the salad just before you’re ready to serve.
      You’ll want to eat the salad once the poppyseed dressing has been drizzled over the spinach and greens, as the dressing wilts the spinach.
    • To Store: The composed salad will keep undressed for up to 2 days and stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Note, however, the nuts will lose some of their crunch factor.

    Helpful Tips:

    • Not into raw onions? Simply slice the onions in half moons and place them in a large bowl of cool water while preparing the rest of the ingredients. This takes away the strong and spicy bite of raw onions while still keeping their flavor intact.
    • Grocery Store Tip: Steer clear of the containers of pre-crumbled cheese and go for a log of goat cheese or a whole block of feta cheese or gorgonzola. The crumbled cheeses have starch added to prevent them from caking, and the whole block varieties are far better in flavor and texture.

    Other Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

    If you try this Spinach Strawberry Salad recipe or any other one of our salad recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below about your experience. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    Strawberry Spinach Salad with Poppy Seed Dressing placed in a large bowl with ingredients around it
    Print

    Strawberry Spinach Salad with Poppy Seed Dressing Recipe

    The BEST ever Strawberry Spinach Salad with Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing, goat cheese and almonds. Sweet, tangy, and a healthy summer salad!
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 473kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Poppy Seed Dressing:

    • ¼ cup mayonnaise
    • ¼ cup plain yogurt unsweeteened
    • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
    • 1 teaspoon white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar or lemon juice
    • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon poppy seeds
    • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt

    For The Salad:

    • 4 cups baby spinach leaves (approximately 10 oz)
    • 4 cups romaine or any salad greens
    • cup red onion thinly sliced *
    • 1 quart strawberries
    • 1 cup sliced almonds
    • 1 cup crumbled goat cheese optional – feta cheese or blue cheese would also work

    Instructions

    • Make the poppy seed dressing: Place all dressing ingredients in a bowl and whisk until smooth and creamy.
    • Assemble the salad: Layer spinach, salad greens of your choice, red onion, strawberries, almonds, and goat cheese in a salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing.
    • Toss & Serve: Give it a gentle toss using salad tongs and serve.

    Notes

    • To Make Ahead: If you’d like to prepare the spinach salad a few days ahead, I would recommend storing the salad greens, sliced strawberries, crumbled cheese, toasted nuts, and poppyseed dressing in separate containers. Then simply toss the salad just before you’re ready to serve.
    • To Store: The composed salad will keep undressed for up to 2 days stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Note, however, the nuts will lose some of their crunch factor.
    • A note on red onions*: If you have a few extra minutes, place the raw sliced onions in a large bowl of cool water while you prep the rest of the ingredients to take away the strong bite.
    • Earlier version of this recipe used a different kind of poppy seed dressing. If you prefer that version, below are the ingredients. Simple whisk everything in a bowl.
      1 medium size (or 2 small shallot, chopped), 3 tablespoons white wine vinegar, 3 tablespoons maple syrup, 1 tablespoon vegenaise or fat-free yogurt, 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil, 1 tablespoon poppy seeds, 1/2 teaspoon salt.
         

    Nutrition

    Calories: 473kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 626mg | Potassium: 761mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 5032IU | Vitamin C: 100mg | Calcium: 250mg | Iron: 4mg

    This Spinach and Strawberry Salad recipe was originally published in May 2016. It has been updated with new photos, text and adjustments to the originally published post in April 2021.

    The post Strawberry Spinach Salad with Poppy Seed Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-spinach-arugula-salad-lighter-poppy-seed-dressing/feed/ 23
    Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-poppy-seed-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-poppy-seed-dressing/#comments Wed, 21 Apr 2021 10:55:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=40564 It is no secret that I am on a mission to convince you that you should never buy salad dressing from a store. Homemade salad dressings are just better (and cheaper.) And today’s recipe, Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing, is the newest addition to my collection of salad dressing recipes.  It pairs perfectly with my Strawberry Spinach Salad, but it can also be used in other fruity summer salad recipes like...

    The post Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    It is no secret that I am on a mission to convince you that you should never buy salad dressing from a store. Homemade salad dressings are just better (and cheaper.) And today’s recipe, Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing, is the newest addition to my collection of salad dressing recipes. 

    It pairs perfectly with my Strawberry Spinach Salad, but it can also be used in other fruity summer salad recipes like Blueberry Salad, Yogurt Chicken Salad with Grapes, Quinoa Kale Salad, and Apple Salad

    Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing placed in a bowl with a whisk

    Are you a fan of Greek yogurt based salad dressings and dips? If so, be sure to also check out our Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Healthy Ranch Dip (made with plain yogurt), and Greek Yogurt Dill Sauce.

    Ingredients:

    The classic poppy seed vinaigrette recipe is made with mayonnaise (or some recipes even use sour cream). To make it a tiny bit healthier and cut down on the calories, I swapped some of the mayonnaise with Greek yogurt. I also used maple syrup to make sure that it is refined sugar free.

    Ingredients for the recipe photographed on a white marble

    The rest of the ingredients are pretty basic pantry staples. You can find them below with substitutions ideas:

    • Mayonnaise: I am a big fan of Vegan Mayo (affiliate link), but any of your favorite mayonnaise brands would work
    • Greek Yogurt: I used full-fat yogurt, but you can swap it with fat-free yogurt as well. 
    • Maple Syrup: Substitute with honey or agave nectar if you don’t have maple syrup
    • White Wine Vinegar: Substitute with apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
    • Dijon mustard: Grainy mustard would also work
    • Poppy Seeds: It is an extra step by if you have a few additional minutes toast them on a skillet for 2-3 minutes.
    • Kosher salt

    How To Make Poppy Seed Dressing?

    Making this creamy poppyseed salad dressing is so quick, easy and literally takes just a few minutes. All you need is a bowl and a whisk. 

    Person whisking poppy salad dressing with a whisk

    Simply place all ingredients in a bowl and give it a whisk until it is creamy and smooth.

    How To Store:

    The best way to store this homemade poppyseed dressing is to place it in a mason jar and tighten it with a lid. Then store it in the fridge for up to 4 days.

    Variations:

    • Not a fan of mayo? Swap it with an equal amount of Greek yogurt (in addition to the one we are already using in the recipe) and add 2 tablespoons of olive oil and a tablespoon of lemon juice to compensate for it.
    • Red Wine Vinegar Poppy Seed Dressing: Use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar.
    • Lemon Poppy Seed Dressing: For more of a zesty poppy seed dressing, swap vinegar with an equal amount of lemon juice and add in the zest of a lemon.
    Person drizzling a salad with poppy seed vinaigrette salad dressing

    Other Salad Dressing Recipes You Might Like:

    Skip the store-bought and bottled salad dressings and make them at home. Here are a few other clean salad dressing recipes to get you started:

    Creamy Poppy Seed Salad Dressing in a bowl with a whisk
    Print

    Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing Recipe

    Creamy poppy seed salad dressing made in minutes with six pantry staples. Sweetened with honey and lightened up with Greek Yogurt, this vinaigrette/salad dressing is guaranteed to impress.
    Course Salad Dressing
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 116kcal

    Ingredients

    • ¼ cup mayonnaise I use Vegan Mayo
    • ¼ cup Greek yogurt
    • 1 tablespoon of maple syrup
    • 1 teaspoon white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon poppy seeds
    • 1 teaspoon Kosher Salt

    Instructions

    • Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until creamy and smooth.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

    Notes

    • This recipe yields 1/2 cup poppyseed salad dressing. Feel free to multiply the recipe if you need more.
    • Store leftovers in an airtight mason jar in the fridge up to 4 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 116kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 106mg | Potassium: 36mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg

    The post Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-poppy-seed-dressing/feed/ 10
    Kale Pineapple Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/kale-pineapple-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-pineapple-smoothie/#comments Fri, 19 Feb 2021 21:53:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20237 Last summer I had one goal in mind and that was to share as many healthy smoothie recipes as I can. I even gave it a name, Summer Smoothies. In just a short few months I shared over 10 vegan, sugar-free and healthy smoothie recipes. Going into it, my long term plan was to turn this into a summer tradition and share weekly smoothie recipes during the summer months in...

    The post Kale Pineapple Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    Last summer I had one goal in mind and that was to share as many healthy smoothie recipes as I can. I even gave it a name, Summer Smoothies. In just a short few months I shared over 10 vegan, sugar-free and healthy smoothie recipes. Going into it, my long term plan was to turn this into a summer tradition and share weekly smoothie recipes during the summer months in the years to come.

    A few cups of kale Pineapple Smoothie is being served

    Sadly, life happened and I dropped the ball on that plan this summer. However, I am a firm believer that it is better late than never, so even if it means that I am sharing only one smoothie recipe for the whole summer of 2018, this Kale Pineapple Smoothie recipe should be on the blog.

    Ingredients are laid out

    With fresh summer produce (including gorgeous kale) in abundance, this healthy kale smoothie is what we have been drinking for breakfast for the last few weeks. For me, it is one of those tropical smoothie recipes that works as an instant energy boost that gets you going pretty quickly.

    If you love green smoothies and pineapple and need a great kale shake to help you start the day in the right foot, I am pretty sure you will enjoy this smoothie.

    How To Make Kale Pineapple Smoothie

    The recipe calls for only 5 ingredients. As the name suggests, kale and pineapple are in there. Plus, I used chia seeds for additional nutrition, unsweetened homemade almond milk as liquid, and a ripe banana for creaminess.

    With that being said, I know some people do not care for bananas in green smoothies. If you are one of those people, you can easily switch banana with an avocado. In my opinion, pineapple is sweet enough that you won’t need any additional sweetener. However, if you feel it needs some additional sweetener you can always add a few tablespoons of maple syrup or honey. Though either way, I recommend giving it a taste first.

    Healthy Kale Smoothie ingredients are in a blender

    How To Make Kale Taste Good in Smoothies

    I get asked this question all the time: How do you make kale smoothies taste good? Though I think there is no one way, I found that the best thing to do is to find the best ratio of sweetness and creaminess that will balance the bitter taste of kale.

    The ratio that works for me is to use 1 ½ cups of ripened fruit for every 2 cups of kale. While that formula usually works well, fruits like pineapples can be sweeter than other fruits so it is always a good idea to taste the fruit and adjusting the amount you use according to your sweetness preference.

    Additionally, adding some fat into the recipe will help mask the bitterness coming from kale. In the recipe below, I used almond milk as the liquid. Since almond milk is high in (healthy) fats, it helped quite a bit. If you try making this pineapple kale smoothie recipe using avocado instead of bananas, you will realize it will be even less bitter.

    Alternatively, you can use different plant-based milk options like cashew milk or coconut milk.

    How Many Calories Are There In A Kale Smoothie

    If you make this as a Kale Pineapple Banana Smoothie (using banana instead of avocado), it will be 84 calories with 2 grams of fat and 8.9 grams of sugar per serving. You can see a detailed outline of the nutritional data underneath the recipe.

    A woman is pouring green smoothie into a glass.

    If you swap banana with an avocado, the calorie count will jump up to 114 calories with 7.1 grams of fat and 5.4 grams of sugar. The good thing is that if you are someone who consumes avocado in moderation, it a very healthy and nutritious way to add good fats into your diet.

    Neither of the recipes mentioned above have any additional sugar added in them. Like I mentioned earlier, I find pineapple to be sweet enough so I don’t see it necessary to add-in. However, if you decide to use maple syrup or honey, the calorie information would change.

    With all this being said, the calorie value of a kale smoothie, in general, will depend on the type of fruit used.

    Kale smoothies decorated with berries.

    Expert Tips

    • Feel free to switch pineapple with berries or cherries when they are in season.
    • I also love adding a tablespoon of hemp seeds when I have them at home. They don’t have a very distinctive taste, but they are so nutritious.
    • If you want to make ahead, you can prep pineapple chunks and kale in advance, place in a resealable bag and freeze until you are ready to use.

    If You Liked This Kale Pineapple Smoothie Recipe You Might Also Like

     

    Kale Pineapple Smoothie Recipe Image
    Print

    Kale Pineapple Smoothie

    Ready to start your day with an energy boosting and healthy smoothie? If so, try this Vegan Kale Pineapple Smoothie. Made with only 5 ingredients, it is ready in than 10 minutes.
    Course Smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 101kcal

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups kale rinsed, stems removed and coarsely chopped
    • 1 ½ cups fresh pineapple cubed
    • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
    • 1 ripe banana peeled and cut into small chunks
    • 1 ½ cups unsweetened almond milk
    • Maple syrup - optional
    • 1 ½ cups ice

    Instructions

    • Place all ingredients in a blender. Blend until fully mixed and smooth.
    • Taste for sweetness and add in maple syrup if you think it is necessary.
    • Serve immediately.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 101kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 140mg | Potassium: 350mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 3401IU | Vitamin C: 72mg | Calcium: 192mg | Iron: 1mg

    The post Kale Pineapple Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/kale-pineapple-smoothie/feed/ 20
    Fall Harvest Salad https://foolproofliving.com/fall-harvest-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/fall-harvest-salad/#comments Fri, 23 Oct 2020 06:55:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=26395 This post was created in partnership with California Figs, but as always all opinions are mine. I think we can all agree that there is nothing better than Thanksgiving food. I’ll be honest; I do love turkey but I live for the side dishes. And as we all know, not all sides are created equal. While I am a big fan of my buttery mashed sweet potatoes, roasted sweet potatoes...

    The post Fall Harvest Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>

    This post was created in partnership with California Figs, but as always all opinions are mine.

    I think we can all agree that there is nothing better than Thanksgiving food. I’ll be honest; I do love turkey but I live for the side dishes. And as we all know, not all sides are created equal. While I am a big fan of my buttery mashed sweet potatoes, roasted sweet potatoes and brussels sprouts, and vegetarian cornbread stuffing, I think it is essential to make room for a delicious and healthy salad on the table.

    Fall harvest salad packed with kale, apples, and figs photographed from the top view.

    But not just any salad. One that has the perfect balance of sweet, salty, crispy, nutty and creamy. If you agree, then you need this harvest green salad in your life. Made with a combination of apples, dried California figs, pomegranate seeds, goat cheese, pecans, and a homemade fall salad dressing, it is a rather easy side dish you can make in less than 20 minutes.

    Harvest Kale Salad packed with apples, figs, and goat cheese photographed from the top view.

    How to make fall harvest salad?

    The process of making this harvest fall salad recipe has 2 folds.

    First, make the harvest salad dressing. I opted for a balsamic and olive oil-based dressing made by whisking together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, lemon juice, maple syrup with a small chopped shallot, and salt and pepper. Simply put them in a jar, put the lid on, and give it a shake.

    This happens to be my go-to sweet and sour salad dressing, but below I will share a few other vinaigrette recipes you can also use in this fall kale salad.

    Ingredients for Harvest Salad Dressing photographed from the top view.
    Salad dressing for fall green salad is photographed while a woman is whisking it from the top view.

    Second, prepare the harvest salad ingredients. In this salad, I mixed raw kale leaves with thinly sliced Honeycrisp apple,  juicy pomegranate arils, roasted pecans, crumbled goat cheese, and chopped dried figs.

    Harvest Kale Salad Ingredients: Kale, pecans. pomegranate arils, goat cheese, figs, and apples are photographed from the top view.

    Speaking of dried figs, I have to tell you. I am a huge fan of incorporating California figs into my holiday dishes. I love that they are naturally so sweet that using just a few them easily sweeten a dish and take it up a notch. I used a combination of Golden and Mission dried figs, but if you can get your hands on fresh figs, they would also work perfectly in this recipe.

    I also think that they have such a distinctive flavor that compliments all kinds of sweet and savory recipes. Lucky for us, the folks over at California Figs put together a brand new cookbook with over sixty recipes ranging from snacks to sauces to pasta and meat dishes. The recipes in the book are beautifully crafted to inspire you to get your creative juices flowing and incorporate more of this delicious fruit into your daily cooking.

    Fall Harvest Salad recipe photographed with a cookbook by its side.

    Variation for this autumn kale salad recipe:

    Having been a blogger for over 6 years now, I know many of you love that I share variations for my recipes. Because we all know that holiday meals mean entertaining a large number of people with various likes and dislikes. The good thing is that this harvest kale salad is one that you can change up easily. Below are a few variations to help you please your guests:

    • Swap Kale with Lettuce: During the colder months, I love using kale (especially massaged kale) as I think it pairs so well with all the fruits and vegetables in season. It also does a good job of standing up on its own when there are all kinds of flavors mixing together in one big bowl as it is happening in this Thanksgiving kale salad recipe.
      However, if you are not a fan of kale you can certainly swap it with lettuce or any other salad greens you like. Simply use 2-3 cups more of salad greens to compensate.
    • Use Other Types of Cheese: I am a huge fan of creamy goat cheese in this salad, but if you are not, you can swap it with feta, blue, or even parmesan cheese.
    • Use a Pear Instead of Apple: Don’t get me wrong. I love fall salads with apples, but a thinly sliced slightly ripened pear would also be great in this recipe.
    • Guests with Nut Allergies: If you have guests who cannot tolerate nuts, you can either omit using them or swap pecans with pumpkin seeds.

    Variations for the harvest salad dressing recipe

    While I love the simple balsamic vinaigrette I used in this salad, I sometimes switch it up with other fall salad dressings. Below are my two other favorite homemade salad dressings you can also use in this recipe:

    Harvest Salad with Maple Tahini Dressing: For a delicious Mediterranean/Middle Eastern twist, you can use my creamy maple tahini dressing.

    My Go-To Maple Tahini Dressing Recipe:

    • ¼ cup tahini (sesame paste)
    • 2 tablespoons of maple syrup (or more to taste)
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons freshly squeezed lemon juice
    • 2 tablespoons water to thin it out (adjust to your liking)
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Simply whisk together the ingredients listed below. Give it a taste and add in more seasoning to your liking.

    Harvest Salad with Apple Cider Vinaigrette: If you want an alternative to continuing the fall flavors you can also try my apple cider vinegar-based dressing that I based on my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette.
    My Go-To Apple Cider Vinaigrette Recipe:

    • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ cup all cider vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons honey or maple syrup
    • 1 clove of minced garlic
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Whisk everything in a small bowl or a jar. Give it a taste and add seasoning to your liking.

    Winter Harvest Salad recipe photographed from the top view with figs, goat cheese, and pecans around it.

    PRO TIP: I think we can all agree that a salad that is not dressed properly is not all that enjoyable to eat. What good homemade salad dressing does if it is not fully coating the greens? But worry no more because below is my foolproof step-by-step method for dressing salads to perfection:

    • Rinse and spin-dry your salad greens (kale, lettuce, spring mix, etc.)
    • Drizzle half of your salad dressing into an empty large salad bowl. 
    • Add in the greens. Gently toss the greens with a salad tong to ensure that they are covered with the dressing as much as possible.
    • Add in the rest of your ingredients and drizzle the salad with the rest of the dressing. 
    • Toss gently with your salad tong. Give it a taste and add in more seasoning if necessary. Serve.

    Tips on making the best fall harvest salad

    • Making this fall kale salad recipe for a crowd? As it is with salad recipes, this kale apple salad can be multiplied easily. 
    • Make-Ahead Instructions: You can make the salad dressing two days in advance, place in a jar with a lid, and keep it in the fridge.
      I find that it is easier and faster to use a salad spinner to wash my kale (or salad greens) right before serving. However, you can also wash and spin dry them a day ahead, gently roll the leaves in a large sheet of paper towel (or a kitchen cloth) and keep in the fridge.
    • How To Store Leftovers? This salad makes the perfect lunch the next day. Place the leftovers in an airtight container and place in the fridge.
    • Want to turn this into a vegan kale salad? If you want to turn this into a vegan kale salad simply omit using goat cheese.

    Other fall salads with apples you might like:

    Other simple fall salad ideas you might also like:

    Fall Harvest Salad photographed from the top view.
    Print

    Fall Harvest Salad Recipe

    This Fall Harvest Salad recipe is a healthy kale-based salad packed with apples, figs, and pecans and brought together with a homemade maple balsamic dressing.
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 493kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Dressing:

    • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • 1 small shallot chopped
    • 2 tablespoons maple syrup agave or honey would also work
    • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

    For The Salad:

    • 1 large bunch kale washed, stemmed and shredded (6 cups)
    • 1 apple sliced thinly
    • 1 cup dried California figs cut into small pieces
    • ½ cup pomegranate arils
    • 1 cup pecans lightly toasted
    • ½ cup goat feta, or blue cheese, crumbled

    Instructions

    • To make the dressing: Place all dressing ingredients in a jar, put the lid on and give it a vigorous shake. Set it aside.
    • To make the salad: Drizzle the bottom of a large salad bowl with half of the dressing. Add in the kale and give it a toss.* Make sure that all the kale leaves are coated with the dressing. 
    • Add in the sliced apple, figs, pomegranate arils, and pecans. Drizzle it with the rest of the dressing and give it a gentle toss.
    • Top it off with the cheese and serve immediately.

    Notes

    *Alternatively, you can massage the kale with clean hands to soften the leaves and make sure that the dressing is fully coated all the leaves.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 611mg | Potassium: 636mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 36g | Vitamin A: 1522IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg

    The post Fall Harvest Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/fall-harvest-salad/feed/ 10
    Basic Lemon Vinaigrette Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-vinaigrette/#comments Tue, 20 Oct 2020 18:29:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=28067 The Spring season is upon us and to me, that means all things green, fresh and flavorful. The new season brings so many vegetables to life – spring lettuce, asparagus, green peas, the list goes on. And I found one of my absolute favorite ways to enjoy all those fresh veggies is to drizzle them with a generous amount of homemade Lemon Vinaigrette. It’s incredible how much it brightens up...

    The post Basic Lemon Vinaigrette Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    The Spring season is upon us and to me, that means all things green, fresh and flavorful. The new season brings so many vegetables to life – spring lettuce, asparagus, green peas, the list goes on.

    And I found one of my absolute favorite ways to enjoy all those fresh veggies is to drizzle them with a generous amount of homemade Lemon Vinaigrette. It’s incredible how much it brightens up their flavor.

    A bottle of homemade lemon vinaigrette dressing recipe is photographed from the front

    The beauty of making your own fresh lemon salad dressing is the control you have over the quality of ingredients. Many store-bought dressings contain hidden ingredients and additives I do not want in my diet.

    It also makes a wonderful addition to my homemade vinaigrette dressing recipes. Much like my Chili Lime Vinaigrette, Lemon Dijon Vinaigrette, Greek Yogurt Dressing, Sesame Ginger Vinaigrette, Maple Dijon Vinaigrette, and Tahini Yogurt Sauce, this easy and simple Lemon Vinaigrette recipe is made with 6 ingredients in under 5 minutes – that’s much faster than a trip to the grocery store!

    Ingredients

    Lemon olive oil dressing is made with just that – olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper.

    Ingredients - lemon juice, garlic and olive oil, are laid out

    A little note on the quality of the ingredients:

    • Lemon Juice: For the best vinaigrette recipe, use freshly squeezed lemon juice from the fresh fruit rather than the bottled variety found in most supermarkets. This will provide the most natural flavor and acidity. Lemon juice concentrate is controlled to provide a certain level of acidity and flavor – they sometimes contain added preservatives, too. Purchase lemons a half dozen at a time (organic, if possible) and store the remainder for up to 2 weeks in your fridge.
    • Olive Oil: For quality and flavor, it’s best to purchase a single origin, cold-pressed Extra Virgin Olive Oil packaged in a dark bottle (olive oil doesn’t like light) (Source).
      Read the label to discover the country – or countries – of origin, the harvest date and to make sure it is “extra virgin” (if the label reads pure, light or just olive oil, those are not extra virgin). Look for certifications from the NAOOA (North American Olive Oil Association) or IOC (International Olive Council).

    PRO TIP: Color is no indication of the quality of the oil, it all comes down to taste. In other words, the olive oil you choose to cook and make salad dressings with comes down to taste and personal preference. A good quality olive oil will taste grassy and somewhat peppery on the back of your tongue. My favorite all-purpose olive oil that’s affordable and won’t overpower this vinaigrette recipe is California Olive Ranch Extra Virgin Olive Oil (affiliate link).

    How To Make Lemon Vinaigrette

    All you need is a small bowl and a whisk (or a mason jar) to make this easy lemon juice dressing. Simply:

    Shake, Shake, Shake! Place all the ingredients in a small bowl or mason jar and either use a small whisk to whisk until emulsified or seal the jar tight and shake for 30-60 seconds until smooth and silky.

    Ingredients are placed in a bowl and a woman is mixing them

    Now the dressing is ready to use for salads such as Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, Chickpea Tuna Salad, vegetables, meat, breaded fish and more!

    PRO TIP: To save on clean-up and time, use a hand grater or Microplane (affiliate link) to grate the garlic rather than a cutting board and knife or a difficult-to-clean garlic press.

    How To Store

    If you prepare the simple lemon dressing in a mason jar, you are already halfway there! Simply label and date and store the vinaigrette in the same jar you mixed it in for up to 5 days in the fridge. Keep in mind it might lose some of its bright flavors over time.

    Since most store-bought salad dressings are made with manufactured oils, the use of Extra Virgin Olive Oil offers the best in flavor!

    This homemade lemon salad dressing is also Low-Carb, Gluten-Free, Dairy-Free, Keto, Vegan, Vegetarian, and Whole30!

    A bowl of lemon salad dressing is in bowl with a whisk

    Variations for the recipe

    This lemon salad dressing is simple enough as is, but there are a few ways we can dress it up even more:

    • Lemon Zest: Add ½ teaspoon fresh lemon zest before you slice and juice the lemon.
    • Without Oil (Oil-free salad dressing): Although olive oil is an important ingredient, if you want a basic lemon sauce without the fat, simply omit the oil.
    • With Water: For a citrus juice dressing that is less acidic, add 2 Tablespoons of room-temperature filtered water to dilute the lemon juice’s acidity. Adjust the seasoning as necessary.
    • Basic: Omit the garlic and Dijon mustard and make a basic lemon dressing with olive oil, water, lemon juice, salt, and pepper (follow the directions for using water in the notes above).
    • Fresh Herbs: Add 1 teaspoon of any minced fresh herb, such as rosemary, oregano, thyme or parsley for a fun, Mediterranean twist.
    • With Honey or Maple Syrup: Add ½ – 1 teaspoon honey or maple syrup for a hint of natural sweetness.

    A Few Helpful Tips

    • The Dijon mustard adds a hint of spice and helps the dressing emulsify. Add more if you like your dressing a bit creamier.
    • Swap in minced shallot for garlic: I think lemon garlic vinaigrette is delicious but for a milder flavor you can use a small minced shallot instead.
    • A classic vinaigrette recipe calls for a ratio of 3:1 oil to acid, but I like my dressings less oily and more flavorful, so I use a ratio of 2:1. As always, adjust to your liking.
    • When storing, the olive oil may solidify in the fridge. Simply remove the salad dressing at least 5 minutes before using it to allow the olive oil to loosen in terms of consistency.
    • The lemon juice and olive oil will separate in the fridge. This is completely natural since oil and vinegar do not mix. All you have to do is give it a gentle shake before drizzling over your meal of choice.

     

    A bottle of salad dressing is in a jug with lemons on the side
    Print

    Lemon Vinaigrette Dressing Recipe

    Learn how to make lemon vinaigrette instantly brighten your salad, seafood, and vegetable dishes. Follow the steps below and never buy lemon salad dressing from the store again.
    Course Salad Dressing
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 4 servings (2/3 cups)
    Calories 246kcal

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup olive oil
    • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
    • 2 small cloves of garlic minced
    • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper

    Instructions

    • Place all the ingredients in a jar and give it a shake.

    Video

    Notes

    Notes:
    • The video in the recipe card shows you how to make three different quinoa salads using this simple lemon vinaigrette recipe.
    • The Dijon mustard adds a hint of spice and helps the dressing emulsify. Add more if you like your dressing a bit creamier.
    • Swap in minced shallot for garlic: I think lemon garlic vinaigrette is delicious but for a milder flavor you can use a small minced shallot instead.
    • A classic vinaigrette recipe calls for a ratio of 3:1 oil to acid, but I like my dressings less oily and more flavorful, so I use a ratio of 2:1. As always, adjust to your liking.
    • When storing, the olive oil may solidify in the fridge. Simply remove the salad dressing at least 5 minutes before using to allow the olive oil to loosen in terms of consistency.
    • The lemon juice and olive oil will separate in the fridge. This is completely natural since oil and vinegar do not mix. All you have to do is give it a gentle shake before drizzling over your meal of choice.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 3mg | Iron: 1mg

    This recipe was originally published in March 2020. It has been updated with a quick video and some additional helpful information in July 2020. No changes made to the original recipe.

    The post Basic Lemon Vinaigrette Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-vinaigrette/feed/ 10